The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About24-S-04 Executed Contract.pdf REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER 17626 E. Manning Ave. , Reedley , CA 93654 Contract # 24-S-04 The County of Fresno Department of Public Works and Planning 2220 Tulare St., 7t" Floor Fresno, California 93721 PROJECT MANUAL Bid Date: Thursday, July 18, 2024, 2:00 p.m. Budget/Account— 8905 / 7295 4� COU�� ti �c Development Services & Capital Projects Division j85 O�FRE 6 0 Department of Public Works and Planning CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 01 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115 - 1 ADDENDUM 01 Contract# 24-S-04 Dated: July 1, 2024 The foregoing documents are amended in the respects as herein set forth. This addendum and the amendments herein shall become part of said documents and of any contract entered into pursuant to said documents. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE THIS ADDENDUM ON YOUR PROPOSAL. IF YOU HAVE GIVEN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO SOMEONE ELSE, PLEASE FORWARD THIS ADDENDUM. Jul 1, 2024 9?,oFESS/p Date Signed o No.C80424 C�V CALF Engineer of Record: �PE Joseph C. Harrell, PE C80424 FRESNO COUNTY Department of Public Works and Planning m/a 2220 Tulare Street, Suite 720 Fresno, CA 93721-2106 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 01 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115 - 2 A. SPECIFICATIONS: a. Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete i. Paragraph 2.10, B: a. Delete the following sentence: "Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent." ii. Paragraph 2.11, A: a. Delete the following sentence: "Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size." iii. Paragraph 2.11, B: a. Delete the following sentence: "Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size." iv. Paragraph 2.11, C: a. Delete the following sentence: "Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size." b. Delete the following sentence: "Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd." and replace with: "Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, using both macro and micro size fibers at a combined rate of 5 Ibs/cu. yd." v. Paragraph 2.5, C: a. Replace this paragraph with the following: Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. B. GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS: Refer to Responses to Requests for Clarifications published on the County's Bid page. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 02 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200— 52 ADDENDUM 02 Contract # 24-S-04 Dated: July 15, 2024 The foregoing documents are amended in the respects as herein set forth. This addendum and the amendments herein shall become part of said documents and of any contract entered into pursuant to said documents. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE THIS ADDENDUM ON YOUR PROPOSAL. IF YOU HAVE GIVEN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO SOMEONE ELSE, PLEASE FORWARD THIS ADDENDUM. Jul 15, 2024 Date Signed 9?,oFESS/p�,, o�No.C80424 C/V q�t OF CALF Engineer of Record: 6 e Joseph C. Harrell, PE C80424 FRESNO COUNTY Department of Public Works and Planning m/a 2220 Tulare Street, Suite 720 Fresno, CA 93721-2106 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 02 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200— 52 A. PROJECT MANUAL: a. Section 0001113 Notice to Bidders DELETE: 2:00 P.M., (1400 hours and 00 seconds) Thursday, July 18, 2024 REPLACE with: 2:00 P.M., (1400 hours and 00 seconds) Thursday, July 25, 2024 ADD: The apparent lowest bidder shall submit a Cost Distribution of the bid, otherwise known as a "Schedule of Values," (refer to Section 002113 Instructions to Bidders 1.16 Post-Bid / Pre-Award Information and Requirements) within eight (8) days of the Bid Opening. b. Section 002113 Instructions to Bidders 1.06 SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL A. Electronic Bid Submittal Paragraph 1 DELETE: The bidder has the option to submit the bid for this Project electronically. The bidder must either attach an electronic bid bond or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code Section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening. REPLACE with: The bidder has the option to submit the bid for this Project electronically at: https://www.bidexpress.com/businesses/36473/home. The bidder must either attach an electronic bid bond or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code Section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening. c. Section 002113 Instructions to Bidders ADD: 1.16 POST-BID / PRE-AWARD INFORMATION Within eight (8) calendar days after bid opening, the apparent low bidder shall submit the following information to the Engineer: A. A cost distribution of the bid, with costs shown for major items of work as defined by either the project specification index, the Uniform Construction Index (UCI), or other method as appropriate for the project and approved by the Engineer. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 02 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200— 52 B. The cost distribution shall distinguish between work to be done by the bidder's own forces and work that will be subcontracted (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design); all subcontractors shall be named, regardless of the dollar amount of subcontracted work. Bidders' attention is also directed to California Public Contract Code Section 4100 et seq regarding subcontracting. The County reserves the right to reject any proposed subcontractor, installer, or supplier who cannot show satisfactory evidence of meeting the qualifications required by the specification documents. In the event of such rejection, the apparent low bidder shall, within five working days, submit the name and qualifications of a replacement subcontractor, installer or supplier satisfactory to the County. Such replacement submittal shall be in accordance with all specification requirements. No adjustment of bid prices shall be made in the event of such replacement. This information may be used in the evaluation of bids. If the project is awarded, the cost distribution will be used in determining amounts payable on progress payments and final payment. The County may request that bidders other than the apparent low bidder submit similar cost distribution or qualification information, for the purpose of evaluating bids. Upon completion of the bid evaluation process, cost distributions or qualification information submitted by other than the apparent low bidder will be returned upon request. d. Section 007200 General Conditions 2.24 PAYMENT B. SCHEDULE OF VALUES DELETE: Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Resident Engineer may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Resident Engineer, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. REPLACE with: Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Project Manager may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Project Manager, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 02 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200— 52 e. Section 007200 General Conditions 2.40 INSURANCE B. MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE Paragraph 1 DELETE: If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location (ISO CG 25 03 or 25 04) or the general aggregate limit shall be no less than two million dollars ($2,000,000). The umbrella or excess policy of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) must contain a clause stating that it takes effect (drops down) in the event the primary limits are impaired or exhausted. REPLACE with: If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location (ISO CG 25 03 or 25 04) or the general aggregate limit shall be no less than two million dollars ($2,000,000). The umbrella or excess policy of eight million dollars ($8,000,000) must contain a clause stating that it takes effect (drops down) in the event the primary limits are impaired or exhausted. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 03 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115— 1 ADDENDUM 03 Contract # 24-S-04 Dated: July 18, 2024 The foregoing documents are amended in the respects as herein set forth. This addendum and the amendments herein shall become part of said documents and of any contract entered into pursuant to said documents. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE THIS ADDENDUM ON YOUR PROPOSAL. IF YOU HAVE GIVEN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO SOMEONE ELSE, PLEASE FORWARD THIS ADDENDUM. Jul 18, 2024 QRoFESS/Ory� Date Signed X\ C• hlq�, � 0 No.C80424 c/v q� OF CALF Engineer of Record: Joseph C. Harrell, PE C80424 FRESNO COUNTY Department of Public Works and Planning 2220 Tulare Street, Suite 720 Fresno, CA 93721-2106 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 03 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115— 2 A. BID FORMS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS: No changes B. SPECIFICATIONS: No changes C. DRAWINGS: a. ARCHITECTURAL 1. Al — Site Plan a. Refer to Enlarged Site Plan — Dimensions were added from the fence corner to the gate posts. b. Added the limits of AC to be removed and disposed. c. Added Note #9 to the General Notes. 2. A2.1 — Equipment Plan a. Added Radio Tower Antenna drawings and details. b. Added more information to Equipment List#4 of the Equipment List Table 3. A5 — Details a. Revised Chain Link Fence and Gate Detail to show the addition of Barbed Wire and its Outrigger Arm, 8" dia. Concrete midway between posts for the Hook Bolt to be embedded on. b. STRUCTURAL 1. S1 — Structural Gen Notes a. Added the design criteria for the Microwave Tower. b. Added details Pipes below Footing, Pipes Thru Footing and Trenching near Footings. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 04 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115— 1 ADDENDUM 04 Contract # 24-S-04 Dated: July 22, 2024 The foregoing documents are amended in the respects as herein set forth. This addendum and the amendments herein shall become part of said documents and of any contract entered into pursuant to said documents. PLEASE ACKNOWLEDGE THIS ADDENDUM ON YOUR PROPOSAL. IF YOU HAVE GIVEN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO SOMEONE ELSE, PLEASE FORWARD THIS ADDENDUM. Jul 22, 2024 QgoFESS/p Date Signed C• o�No.C80424 A. C, V �q�t OF CALF Engineer of Record: Joseph C. Harrell, PE C80424 FRESNO COUNTY Department of Public Works and Planning 2220 Tulare Street, Suite 720 Fresno, CA 93721-2106 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ADDENDUM 04 REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 009115— 2 A. BID FORMS AND CONTRACT CONDITIONS: No changes B. SPECIFICATIONS: a. Section 000110 —Table of Contents i. Under Division 00 — Procurement Contracting Requirements add the following section to the Table of Contents: "00 11 14 - LOCATION MAP" b. Add Section 001114 Location Map, attached. c. Section 133613 — Self-Supporting Radio Tower i. Part 2 — Design, B. Design Requirements: 1. Replace e) Provide lightning protection with: e) Provide a lightning rod at the top of the tower. Each antenna feeder will also require a polyphaser lightning arrestor. 2. Add to j): Hangers shall be cushion type with 7 runs of 7/8" coaxial cable with N-Female Connectors at both ends. Antennas must come with N-Male Pigtails. C. DRAWINGS: a. STRUCTURAL i. S4 — ROOF FRAMING PLAN, FOUNDATION PLAN 1. Added the Generator Anchorage Detail. b. ELECTRICAL i. E03 — ELECTRICAL BUILDING PLAN 1. Added a 2"0 Conduit for Fiber Optic CONTRACT # 24-S-04 ~ J i z Q REQ w Q OLLIU)Q Qa Q o 0 QU) ~ z < NO a00 .11lOH N z � Nw z 3nbHO21nH N Qz �N131M/HOM HON 3nbN13 mo1>INH U) wva Alb' Y 3AV N131li N Q w LLI O W V � 3nb'3dOH N AIV MAIANBAIN/E dOH N J 3AV M3IAM3n1 A N 3AV M31AN3AIN N a Z O W lllV M31n213AIN/ 33N N AIV M31AN3AIN/a33N N m 3AV a33N S Q a (? Q W U _ WILL W O O W 3LL a � w 3 wo Q ° LL z w 'z z Q ROBINWpOD CIR r N OAK DR Q¢ J FALLBROOK CIR w � Q� LU�co AAl�ld a00MSONUI N `- O zJ LU Lu m w 0 0�w z w _D U) Q (IN N3AIN SONIA w F J N N M O > 3AV 1wanN S w b'HSVS z Z w y J O C Q Q U o m ENNIS RD J o 3AV ViSln ORI S t= O ca O w N N J Q w z z N N z N N O w O � N N O U U N L Z Z Y and O`dr O`dl S CDU) Q w w Ir = t] U REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SEALS PAGE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000107- 1 ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE CENTER EDUCATIONAL BUILDING Contract#24-S-04 Nathan Magsig, Chairman 51h District Buddy Mendes, Vice Chairman 41h District Brian Pacheco 1 st District Sal Quintero 3rd District Steve Brandau 2nd District Paul Nerland, County Administrative Officer Steven White, Director�� f y Department of Public Works and Planning W/ hozy Date Tigned pRE71'E i o No.C80424r% 1'/V \r. Supervising Engineer: OF FRESNO COUNTY Jose C. Harrell, 80424 Department of Public Works and Planning m/a 2220 Tulare Street, Suite 720 Fresno, CA 93721-2106 CONTRACT#24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SEALS PAGE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000107 - 2 Q,pFESS/oiv 6-18-24 ° cgti/- Date Signed COD U No.M23588 Exp.9-30-25 ��9T�FCHAN\GP��P F of CNO Plumbing and Mechanical Engineer: / V AQd -Michael Cantelmi, #M23588 License Renewal 09/30/2025 Lawrence Engineering Group 4910 E. Clinton Way, Suite 101 Fresno, CA 93727 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SEALS PAGE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000107 - 3 4� �8 ,Zvz ate Si ned QROFEss/oH RFV�� w No. 16581 rn a OF CA1.1F�� Electrical Engineer: Joseph Prevendar, #E16581 License Renewal 03/31/2026 Electrical Power Systems, Inc. 2187 Herndon Suite 102 Clovis CA 93611 CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER TABLE OF CONTENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND BID DOCUMENTS No. of Pages DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 10 - SPECIFICATIONS COVER........................................................................ 1 00 01 07 - SEALS PAGE............................................................................................. 3 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS.............................................................................. 3 00 11 13 - NOTICE TO BIDDERS ............................................................................... 5 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.................................................................. 7 00 22 13 - BIDDERS' CHECKLIST.............................................................................. 2 00 42 13 - PROPOSAL FORM .................................................................................... 2 00 43 13 - BID SECURITY FORM............................................................................... 1 00 43 36 - SUBCONTRACTOR LIST .......................................................................... 5 00 45 19 - NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION............................................................ 1 00 45 56 - TITLE 13 CARB CERTIFICATION.............................................................. 1 00 52 13 - AGREEMENT............................................................................................. 6 Exhibit A— Self Dealing Transaction Disclosure Form 00 65 36 - GUARANTY ............................................................................................... 1 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS...........................................................................66 DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 — SUMMARY................................................................................... 6 01 74 19— CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL....................6 01 77 00 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES......................................................................6 DIVISION 02 — NOT USED DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 20 00 — CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT............................................................... 4 03 30 00 — CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...................................................................21 DIVISION 04— MASONRY 04 22 00 — CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY ..................................................................16 DIVISION 05— METALS 05 40 00 — COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING... ......................................................12 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER TABLE OF CONTENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000110 - 2 DIVISION 06 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 16 00 - SHEATHING... .......................................................................................... 4 DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 19 00 -WATER REPELLENTS... .......................................................................... 6 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION...... .................................................................... 4 07 41 13.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS.........................................13 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM .....................................................10 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES.............................................................................. 6 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.............................................................. 7 DIVISION 08- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES................................................ 8 08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ...................................................................... 9 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE..................................................................................13 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD... .................................................................................. 6 09 67 23 - RESINOUS (EPDXY) FLOORING... ......................................................... 4 09 91 00 - PAINTING..................................................................................................11 DIVISION 10-12 - NOT USED DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 36 13 - SELF-SUPPORTING RADIO TOWER... ................................................... 3 DIVISON 14-19 - NOT USED DIVISION 20 - MECHANICAL 20 01 00 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS................................................. 10 DIVISON 21 - NOT USED DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 04 00 - PLUMBING................................................................................................ 6 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER TABLE OF CONTENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 000110 - 3 DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILIATING AND AIR CONIDTIONING 23 08 00 — HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING ................................... 21 DIVISON 24— NOT USED DIVISION 25— INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 25 09 00 — DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM..................................................... 9 DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 — GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS... ................................................ 3 26 10 00 — BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................10 26 11 00 — ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK ............................................................... 4 26 20 00 — BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS........................................................11 26 21 00 — ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ............................................................... 3 26 30 00 — SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDING......................................... 9 26 31 00 — DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS.................................................................. 2 26 43 00 — TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION..................................... 2 26 49 50 — HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES ......................................................... 1 26 50 50 — EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 2 26 51 00 — EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND ATS.................................................... 9 26 96 09 — ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING AND FIELD TESTING............................. 6 TestRecord Sheets ................................................................................................... 17 DIVISION 27— COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 — GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS... ............................................................ 2 27 05 36 — CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.............................. 7 27 05 44 — SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS .............................................................. 4 27 11 00 — COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS ............................. 5 DIVISION 28-30 — NOT USED DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 31 10 00 — SITE CLEARING....................................................................................... 6 31 20 00 — EARTH MOVING.......................................................................................12 DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 31 13 — CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES... ...................................................... 7 END OF SECTION CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER NOTICE TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 0001113- 1 BOARD OF SUPERVISORS COUNTY OF FRESNO STATE OF CALIFORNIA NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed proposals will be received at: https://www.bidexpress.com/businesses/36473/home and at the Fresno County Department of Public Works and Planning, Office of the Design Engineer, Seventh Floor, Fresno County Plaza Building, 2220 Tulare Street, Fresno, CA 93721 until 2:00 P.M., (1400 hours and 00 seconds) Thursday, July 18, 2024 at which time the bidding will be closed. If you have any questions about bid submission, please contact us at DesignServicesCa-)_fresnocountyca.gov or calling (559) 353-4919 or (559) 600-4543. Promptly following the closing of the bidding all timely submitted bids will be publicly opened and viewable via a livestream (the link for which will be posted at http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/pIanholders) for construction in accordance with the project specifications therefor, to which special reference is made as follows: REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER 17626 MANNING AVENUE REEDLEY, CA 93654 Contract No. 24-S-04 The work to be done consists, in general, of providing the design, site preparation, and construction of a 250-foot above grade microwave tower, its corresponding equipment and the construction of a 1,011 sq ft. equipment shelter per the plans and specifications. The project also includes, but is not limited to, the installation of an electrical back-up generator, automatic transfer switch, communication equipment, and all associated site work, including fencing. The County of Fresno will supply the back-up generator, but it will be installed by the Contractor. This project is subject to the contracting requirements and implementing regulations as amended in Title 13, Section 2449 General Requirements for In-Use Off-Road Diesel-Fueled Fleets, of the California Code of Regulations (13 CCR § 2449(i)). Bidders must submit a valid Certificate of Reported Compliance (CRC) issued by the California Air Resources Control Board at the time of bidding. Bidders are responsible for submitting their listed subcontractors' CRCs and any supporting REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER NOTICE TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 0001113- 2 documentation within five (5) calendar days of bid opening. Failure to submit the required CRCs may render a bid non-responsive. Bidders may fill out a Request to be Added to Planholders list: https://www.fresnocountyca.gov/Departments/Public-Works-and-Planning/Construction- Bidding-Opportunities/Request-to-Be-Added-to-the-Planholders-List-Form Requesters will then be listed as a planholder for the project on the website and receive notifications and addenda issued for the project. Prospective bidders may also select the project on https://www.bidexpress.com/businesses/36473/home. Those that demonstrate interest in the project will be added to the planholders list, and receive notifications and addenda issued for the project. Electronic copies, in ".pdf" file format, of the official project plans and specifications, bid books and proposal sheets, as well as cross sections and such additional supplemental project information as may be provided, are available to view, download, and print at http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/planholders. If a bidder is unable to submit a bid via Bid Express, Bid Books, which contain bid proposal sheets necessary to submit a bid, may be obtained within the Specifications documents posted on the Fresno County website. Electronic bids shall be submitted via the Bid Express website. Hardcopy bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the Department and labeled with the name of the bidder, contract number, name of the project, and the statement "Do Not Open Until the Time of Bid Opening." Bid security in the amount of ten (10) percent of the amount of the bid, and in the form of a bid bond issued by an admitted surety insurer licensed by the California Department of Insurance, cash, cashier's check or certified check shall accompany the bid. You must either attach an electronic bid bond or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening. Bid security shall be made in favor of the County of Fresno. Hardcopy bid bonds shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the Department and labeled with the name of the bidder, the name of the project and the statement "Do Not Open Until the Time of Bid Opening — BID BOND" A Summary of Bids and a list of subcontractors for the apparent low bidder will be posted at the above listed website, generally within 24 hours of the Bid Opening. All requests for substitutions (refer to Section 012500, Substitution Procedures) and questions regarding this project shall be in writing and shall be received by the Department REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER NOTICE TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 0001113- 3 of Public Works and Planning, Design Division, no later than 2:00 P.M. on the tenth (10th) calendar day prior to bid opening. All substitution requests and questions received after this deadline will not receive a response unless the Department of Public Works and Planning elects to issue an addendum to revise the bid opening date. In the event that the bid opening date is revised, the deadline for questions will be extended to no later than 2:00 P.M. on the tenth (10th) calendar day before the revised bid opening date. Questions shall be submitted on the "Request for Clarification" form provided on the project website at: https://www.fresnocountyca.gov/Departments/Public-Works-and-Planning/Construction- Bidding-Opportunities/24-S-04-Reedley-Radio-Tower-and-Equipment-Shelter/Request-for- Clarification-Form Any changes to, or clarification of, the Contract documents and specifications, including approved substitutions, shall be in the form of a written addendum issued to planholders of record. Questions that prompt a change or clarification shall be included in the addendum with the subsequent answer. Any oral explanation or interpretations provided with regard to this project are not binding. No contract will be awarded to a contractor who has not been licensed in accordance with the provisions of the Contractors State License Law, California Business and Professions Code, Division 3, Chapter 9, as amended, or whose bid is not on the proposal form included in the contract document. A valid California Contractor's License, Class B (General Building Contractor), is required for this project. Asbestos certification from the Contractors State License Board and registration with the Division of Occupational Safety and Health is not required to bid this project. [Health and Safety Code 25914.2] The Contractor and their subcontractors shall comply with all applicable statutes and regulations, and all provisions of Sections 2.51 , 2.52 and 2.55 of the General Conditions, regarding payment of wages, hours of work and all other labor compliance issues. Pursuant to Section 1773 of the Labor Code, the general prevailing wage rates in the county, or counties, in which the work is to be done have been determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations. These wages are set forth in the General Prevailing Wage Rates for this project, available at County of Fresno, Department of Public Works and Planning, 2220 Tulare Street, Sixth Floor, Fresno CA 93721-2104 and available from the California Department of Industrial Relations' Internet web site at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD. Future effective general prevailing wage rates, which have been predetermined and are on file with the California Department of Industrial Relations are referenced but not printed in the general prevailing wage rates. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER NOTICE TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 0001113- 4 No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal for a public works project unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)]. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded a contract for public work on a public works project unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5. This contract is subject to state contract nondiscrimination and compliance requirements pursuant to Government Code, Section 12990. Minimum wage rates for this project, as predetermined by the Secretary of Labor, are set forth in the Special Provisions. If there is a difference between the minimum wage rates predetermined by the Secretary of Labor and the Prevailing Wage Rates predetermined by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California for similar classifications of labor, the contractor and their subcontractors shall pay not less than the higher wage rate. The Board of Supervisors hereby specifies that portions of the work can only be performed outside the regular working hours as defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreement filed with the Director of Industrial Relations in accordance with Labor Code Section 1773.1, and that the overtime requirements for Saturdays, and holidays are hereby waived for these portions of the work, as more particularly described in the specifications. However, this exemption shall not negate the overtime provisions specified in Labor Code Section 1815. Bids are required for the entire work described herein. Bids will be compared on the basis of the total lump sum bid. In addition to the bid bond required by law of all bidders on public works projects, the successful bidder shall furnish a faithful performance bond, a payment bond and a warranty bond in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.36 of the General Conditions. The successful bidder shall furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract amount and a payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract amount. Each bond specified in this Notice (bid bond, faithful performance bond and payment bond) shall meet the requirements of all applicable statutes, including but not limited to those specified in Public Contract Code section 20129 and Civil Code section 3248. Each bond specified in this Notice shall be issued by a surety company designated as an admitted surety insurer in good standing with and authorized to transact business in this state by the California Department of Insurance, and acceptable to the County of Fresno. Bidders are cautioned that representations made by surety companies will be verified with REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER NOTICE TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 0001113- 5 the California Department of Insurance. Additionally, the County of Fresno, in its discretion, when determining the sufficiency of a proposed surety company, may require the surety company to provide additional information supported by documentation. The County generally requires such information and documentation whenever the proposed surety company has either a Best's Key Rating Guide of less than A and a financial size designation of less than VIII. Provided, however, that the County expressly reserves its right to require all information and documentation to which the County is legally entitled from any proposed surety company. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, substitution of securities for any moneys withheld by the County of Fresno to ensure performance under the contract shall be permitted. The Board of Supervisors reserves the right to reject any or all bids. Board of Supervisors, County of Fresno Paul Nerland, County Administrative Officer Bernice E. Seidel, Clerk to the Board Issue Date: June 18, 2024 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01 EXPLANATION TO BIDDERS An explanation desired by bidders regarding the meaning or interpretation of the bid documents must be requested in writing no later than seven (7) days prior to the bid opening. Oral explanations given before the award of the contract will not be binding. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an addendum to the bid documents, said addendum will only be issued by the County's Director of Public Works and Planning ("Director"). Any addenda or supplemental information will be published on the Fresno County website at https://www.fresnocountyca.gov/planholders and the planholders of record will be notified. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SITE OF WORK The bidder is required to examine carefully the proposal, plans, specifications, special provisions, and contract forms for submitting a proposal. It is mutually agreed that the submission of a proposal shall be considered prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such examination and is satisfied with the conditions to be encountered in performing the work and as to the requirements of the plans, specifications, and special provisions of the contract documents. 1.03 PROPOSAL GUARANTEE The bidder shall furnish a proposal guarantee, consisting of a bid bond, cash, certified check, or cashier's check, for ten percent (10%) of the total amount bid, including additives. If security is provided in the form of a certified check or cashier's check, the County may make such disposition of same as will accomplish the purpose for which submitted. Checks deposited by unsuccessful bidders will be returned as soon as practicable after the bid opening. 1.04 PREPARATION OF PROPOSALS The bidder shall prepare a proposal on the blank proposal form furnished by the County. The bidder's proposal shall be executed by the individual, by one or more partners of the partnership, or by one or more of the officers of the corporation submitting it. If the proposal is made by an individual, a name and post office address must be shown. If made by a partnership, the name of each member of the partnership must be shown. If made by a corporation, the proposal must show the name of the state under which the corporation was chartered and the name of the president, vice president, secretary and treasurer. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 2 1.05 SUBCONTRACTORS Every person submitting a bid to perform the work called for in the bid request shall set forth in this bid: A. The name and the location of the place of business, and the California contractor's license number, and the public works contractor registration number issued pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor Code, of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the general contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one-half(1/2) of one percent (1%) of the general contractor's total bid; and B. The portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor. The attention of bidders is directed to the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 4100 et seq which set forth the consequences and possible penalties which may result from a failure to comply strictly with the foregoing requirements for listing of subcontractors. 1.06 SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL A. Electronic Bid Submittal The bidder has the option to submit the bid for this Project electronically. The bidder must either attach an electronic bid bond or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code Section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening. Bidders submitting online may use one of the accepted electronic sureties (Tinubu Surety or Surety 2000) to submit their bid bond; or may submit cash, cashier's check, certified check, or a bidder bond to Design Services at 2220 Tulare St., Seventh Floor, Fresno, CA 93721. Those submitting bid bonds directly to Design Services must submit their bid bond: 1. Under sealed cover 2. Marked as a bid-bond 3. Identifying the contract number and the bid opening date on the cover If necessary, please e-mail DesignServices(a�fresnocountyca.gov or call (559) 600-4241 or (559) 600-4543, so that arrangements may be made to hand deliver your bid bond. Each proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope labeled to clearly indicate the contract and contents. B. Bid Submittal by Personal Delivery or by Mail The bidder has the option to submit the bid by personal delivery or by mail. The bidder shall specify, on the blank Proposal form, a lump sum price in both words and figures for each bid item, including alternates, additives and supplemental items. If the bid is not submitted electronically, then all words and figures shall be written on the Proposal form in ink. In the case of a discrepancy between the prices written in words and those written in figures, CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 3 the written words shall govern. The bidder's proposal shall be signed in ink by the individual executing the bid on behalf of the bidder. The required proposal guarantee must accompany the proposal. When sent by mail, a sealed proposal must be addressed to the Fresno County Department of Public Works and Planning, Office of the Design Engineer, Sixth Floor, Fresno County Plaza Building, 2220 Tulare Street, Fresno, CA 93721. All proposals shall be filed prior to the time and at the place specified in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. Proposals received after the time for opening of the proposals will be returned to the bidder unopened. 1.07 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS Proposals that do not conform to bid requirements may be rejected as nonresponsive. Proposals shall be considered irregular and may be rejected for various reasons, including but not limited to the following: A. The proposal forms furnished by the County are not used or are altered. B. There are unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate proposals or irregularities of any kind which tend to make the proposal incomplete or indefinite. C. The bidder adds any provision reserving the right to accept or reject an award, or to enter into a contract pursuant to an award. D. The bid fails to contain a price for each bid component. 1.08 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS Any one or more of the following may be considered to constitute sufficient cause for disqualification of a bidder and rejection of that bidder's proposal: A. More than one proposal for the same work from an individual, partnership or corporation. B. Evidence of collusion among bidders. Participants in such collusion will receive no recognition as bidders for any future work of the County until such participant shall have been reinstated as a qualified bidder. C. Lack of competency or inadequate machinery, plant or other equipment as considered necessary to perform this project, as may be revealed by financial statement if required. D. Unsatisfactory performance record as shown by past work for the County, judged from the standpoint of workmanship and progress. E. Prior commitments or obligations which in the judgment of the County might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of the work. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 -4 F. Failure to pay, or satisfactorily settle, all bills due for labor or materials which remain pending under any former contract(s) at the time of submittal of the bid for this project. G. Failure to comply with any prequalification requirements of the County. H. Failure to furnish full amount of Proposal Guarantee with bid or failure to sign bid bond. 1.09 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF PROPOSALS A bidder may, without prejudice, withdraw a proposal after it has been deposited, provided the request for such withdrawal is received in writing before the time set for opening proposals. The request shall be executed by the bidder or the bidder's duly authorized representative and shall include the name of the individual authorized to receive the withdrawn proposal. Said individual shall be required to present photo identification prior to withdrawing the proposal. The bidder may then submit a revised proposal provided it is received prior to the time set for opening proposals. 1.10 PUBLIC OPENING OF PROPOSALS Proposals will be opened and read publicly at the time and place indicated in the Notice to Bidders. Bidders or their authorized agents are invited to be present. 1.11 BID PROTEST PROCEDURE / RELIEF OF BIDDER A. BID PROTEST PROCEDURE Any bid protest must be submitted in writing and delivered by the Bidder by either of the following means: (1) via e-mail to DesignServices(a-.fresnocountyca.gov; or (2) via certified mail, return receipt requested to the following address: Design Division, Department of Public Works and Planning, 2220 Tulare Street, Sixth Floor, Fresno, CA 93721. The bid protest must be received no later than 5:00 p.m. of the seventh (7th) calendar day following the deadline for submittal of the specific bid document(s) placed at issue by the protest. Any Bidder filing a protest is encouraged to submit the bid protest via e-mail, because the deadline is based on the Department's receipt of the bid protest. A bid protest accordingly may be rejected as untimely if it is not received by the deadline, regardless of the date on which it was postmarked. The Bidder's compliance with the following additional procedures also is mandatory: The initial protest document shall contain a complete statement of the grounds for the protest, including a detailed statement of the factual basis and any supporting legal authority. The protest shall identify and address the specific portion of the document(s)forming the basis for the protest. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 5 The protest shall include the name, address and telephone number of the person representing the protesting party. The Department will provide a copy of the initial protest document and any attached documentation to all other Bidders or proposers who appear to have a reasonable prospect of receiving an award depending upon the outcome of the protest. The Board of Supervisors will issue a decision on the protest. If the Board of Supervisors determines that a protest is frivolous, the party originating the protest may be determined to be irresponsible and that party may be determined to be ineligible for future contract awards. The procedure and time limits set forth herein are mandatory and are the Bidder's sole and exclusive remedy in the event of a bid protest. Failure by the Bidder to comply with these procedures shall constitute a waiver of any right to further pursue the bid protest, including the subsequent filing of a Government Code Claim or legal proceedings. B. RELIEF OF BIDDER A bidder who claims a mistake in their bid must follow the procedures in Public Contract Code Section 5100 et seq in seeking relief of their bid. 1.12 AWARD OF CONTRACT The award of the contract, if it is awarded, will be to the lowest responsible bidder whose proposal complies with all the prescribed requirements. The award, if made, will be within 54 days after the opening of proposals. If the County finds that it will be unable to award the contract within 54 calendar days after the opening of proposals, the Director may request any or all bidders to extend all terms of their proposal(s) to a specified date. It is possible that additional extensions may subsequently be requested. If a bidder does not elect to extend the terms of their proposal beyond the 54 calendar days following opening of proposals, or does not respond within 10 days to any request for an extension, that bidder's proposal will be deemed as having expired 54 calendar days following opening of the proposals, and that bidder's proposal will not be considered for award of the contract. The successful bidder will be notified in writing, by letter mailed to the address shown on their proposal, that their bid has been accepted and that they have has been awarded the contract. The right is reserved by the County to reject any or all proposals, to waive technicalities (such as immaterial bid irregularities), to advertise for new proposals, or to proceed to do this work otherwise, if in the judgment of the awarding authorities the best interests of the County will be promoted thereby. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 6 1.13 CANCELLATION OF AWARD The awarding authority reserves the right to cancel the award of any contract at any time before the execution of said contract by all parties without any liability against the County. 1.14 CONTRACT BONDS The bidder to whom the award is made shall, within ten days, enter into a written contract with the County. The bidder shall forfeit the proposal guarantee in case the bidder does not follow through with execution of the written contract within ten days after the contract is awarded. The successful bidder shall furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount of 100 percent (100%) of the contract amount and a payment bond in the amount of 100 percent (100%) of the contract amount, and one-year Warranty Bond in the amount of 10 percent (10%) of the contract amount. Said bonds shall be submitted in triplicate. The payment bond shall contain provisions such that if the Contractor or their subcontractors shall fail to pay (a) amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work performed under the contract, or (b) any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid over to the Employment Development Department and to the Franchise Tax Board from the wages of the employees of the Contractor and subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to such work and labor, then the surety will pay these amounts. In case suit is brought upon the payment bond, the surety will pay a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. The contract form is attached hereto for the Contractor's information only. Execution of the contract by the successful bidder will not be required until after the bid award is made. Liability and Workers Compensation Insurance requirements shall be as set forth in the Agreement. 1.15 BUILDERS RISK INSURANCE The Contractor shall obtain and maintain in force Builder's Risk Insurance against loss or damage from all perils. The policy shall cover the entire structure on which the work of this contract is to be done, up to the full insurable value thereof (except that if the contract is for remodeling, alteration, repair, or maintenance, then the policy shall cover the value of the contract therefore), including items of labor and materials connected therewith on the site, materials in place or to be used as part of the permanent construction including materials stored and partially paid for by the County as provided in Division 00-General Conditions, surplus materials, shanties, protective fences, bridges, or temporary structures, miscellaneous materials and supplies incident to the work , and such scaffolding, stagings, towers, forms and equipment as are not owned or rented by the Contractor, the cost of which is included in the cost of the work. EXCLUDED: This insurance does not cover any tools owned by mechanics, any tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging, towers, and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the work, or any structures erected for the Contractor's administration of the project. All subcontractors shall be insured to the extent of their portion of the work under the Contractor. The Contractor shall request, and is responsible to confirm with its insurer, that CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002113 - 7 the County and all subcontractors are named, both as additional insured and as additional loss payees, on the Builder's Risk insurance policy. The County, Contractor, and all subcontractors waive all rights, each against the others, for damages arising from perils covered by the insurance required under the terms of this article, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of the Builder's Risk insurance obtained and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall file a certificate of such insurance with the County upon issuance of the policy, and with any subcontractors upon its request. END OF SECTION CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER BIDDERS CHECKLIST REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002213 - 1 BIDDERS' CHECKLIST (BUILDING CONTRACTS) Because of numerous technical irregularities resulting in rejected proposals for projects, the following checklist is offered for the bidders' information and use in preparing the proposal. This checklist is not to be considered as part of the contract documents. Bidders are cautioned that deleting or not submitting a form supplied in the bid documents (even if the form does not require signature) may result in an irregular bid. PROPOSAL/BID SHEET (Section 004213) Bidder name on each sheet. Price for each item including: each additive, deductive, supplemental or alternate items. Make no additions such as "plus tax", "plus freight", or conditions such as "less 2% if paid by 15th". Use ink or typewriter. Acknowledge addenda. BID SECURITY FORM - Read the Notices and Notes (Section 004313) Indicate type of bid security provided. Provide contract license information. State business name and if business is a: Corporation - list officers Partnership - list partners Joint Venture - list members If Joint Venture members are corporations or partnerships, list their officers or partners. Individual - list Owner's name and firm name style Signature of Bidder—BID MUST BE SIGNED! Corporation - by an officer Partnership - by a partner Joint Venture - by a member Individual - by the Owner If signature is by a Branch Manager, Estimator, Agent, etc., the bid must be accompanied by a power of attorney authorizing the individual to sign bids, otherwise the bid may be rejected. Business Address - Firm's Street Address Mailing Address - P.O. Box or Street Address BID SECURITY (PROPOSAL GUARANTEE) Ten percent (10%) of the total amount bid (to include supplemental or additive items). Type of Bid Security: Cash - Not recommended; cash is deposited in a clearing account and is returned to bidders by County warrant. This process may take several weeks. Cashier's or Certified Checks - Will be held until the bid is no longer under consideration. If submitted by a potential awardee, they will be returned when the contract bonds are submitted and approved. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER BIDDERS CHECKLIST REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 002213 - 2 Bid Bonds - Must be signed by the bidder and by the attorney-in-fact for the bonding company. Signature of attorney-in-fact should be notarized and the bond should be accompanied by bonding company's affidavit authorizing attorney-in-fact to execute bonds. An unsigned bid bond will be cause for rejection. If the bid is submitted electronically, then the bidder must either attach an electronic bid bond or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code Section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening, as more thoroughly specified in the Instructions to Bidders, Section 1.04.A ("Electronic Bid Submittal"). SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Section 004336) One firm for each type of work to be subcontracted. Fill out as completely as possible. Name and location of place of business, California contractor's license number, public works contractor registration number issued pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor Code, and description of work to be performed are required to be listed for each subcontractor in accordance with Public Contract Code section 4104. NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION (Section 004519) Must be completed, signed, and returned with bid. TITLE 13 CARB CERTIFICATION (Section 004556) Contractors, if applicable, must submit valid Certificates of Reported Compliance with their bid. Subcontractor certificates will be due no later than 4:00 PM on the fifth (5t') calendar day after the bid opening if not submitted with the bid. GUARANTY OF WORK (Section 006536) Does not need to be submitted with the bid. (Must be signed and submitted by the successful bidder together with the executed contract and requisite bonds and insurance certificates, within ten days after award of the Project.) OTHER If the bid forms have been removed from the specifications booklet, staple the pages together. Make sure the bid envelope is sealed and shows the project name, bid package and contract number. If the bid is mailed, allow sufficient time for postal delivery prior to the bid closing time. Bids received after the scheduled time will be returned unopened. Be sure the statement "DO NOT OPEN UNTIL TIME OF BID OPENING" is on the envelope. END OF SECTION CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER PROPOSAL FORM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 004213 - 1 PROPOSAL TO THE BOARD OF SUPERVISORS COUNTY OF FRESNO Contract: REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER Contract No.: 24-S-04 Fund / Subclass/ Org /Account/ Program or Memo No.: 1020 / 10000 / 8905 / 7295 Work to be performed: The work to be done is shown on a set of Plans, Department File No. 11328, entitled: "Reedley Radio Tower and Equipment Shelter" Building No.: TBD Project Address: 17626 Manning Avenue Reedley, CA 93654 In case of a discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail. If this proposal shall be accepted and the undersigned shall fail to contract, as aforesaid, and to give the two bonds in the sums to be determined as aforesaid, each issued by a surety satisfactory to the Awarding Authority, within ten (10) days after the award of the contract, the Awarding Authority, at its option, may determine that the bidder has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this proposal and the acceptance thereof shall be null and void, and the forfeiture of such security accompanying this proposal shall operate and the same shall be the property of the County. The undersigned, as bidder, declares that all addenda issued with respect to this bid have been received and incorporated into this Proposal. The bidder's signature on this Proposal also constitutes acknowledgement of all addenda. The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only persons, or parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named herein; that this proposal is made without collusion with any other person, firm or corporation; that the bidder has carefully examined the annexed proposed form of contract, and the plans therein referred to; and the bidder proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted, that the bidder will contract with the County of Fresno to provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus and other means of construction, and to do all the work and furnish all the materials specified in the contract in the manner and time therein prescribed, and according to the requirements of the County as therein set forth, and that the bidder will take in full payment therefor the following lump sum price, to-wit: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 General Info Total: $2,326,683.00 Number Description 24-S-04 Reedley Radio Tower and Equipment Shelter Deadline The work to be done consists, in general, of providing the design, site preparation, and 07/25/2024 02:00 PM PDT construction of a 250-foot above grade microwave tower, its corresponding equipment and the construction of a 1,011 sqft. equipment shelter per the plans and specifications. The Vendor project also includes, but is not limited to, the installation of an electrical back-up Katch Environmental, Inc. generator, automatic transfer switch, communication equipment, and all associated site dba Katch General work including fencing. The County of Fresno will supply the back-up generator, but it will be installed by the Contractor. Submitted Allows zero unit prices and labor 07/25/2024 01:54 PM PDT No Signed by Allows negative unit prices and labor Paul Katchadourian Account Holder Jenn No Schmid Opened 07/25/2024 02:07 PM PDT By jgeddert@fresnocountyca.gov Attachment List County of Fresno - Project Website RFC form, bid opening details, any Supplemental Information including RFC responses, Pre-bid Conference information, etc. Project Manual Specifications Plans Drawings Addendum 1 (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sharedassets/county/v/2/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding-opportunities/ 24-s-04-reedley-radio-tower-and-equipment-shelter/00-91-15-addendum-01.pdf) Addendum 1 Addendum 2 (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sha red assets/county/v/2/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding-opportunities/ 24-s-04-reedley-radio-tower-and-eq uipment-shelter/001915-addendum-2.pdf) Addendum 2 Addendum 3 (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sharedassets/county/v/1/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding-opportunities/ 24-s-04-reedley-radio-tower-and-equipment-shelter/00-91-15-addendum-03.pdf) Page 1 of 20 07/25/2024 Addendum 3 Addendum 3 Plan Sheets (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sharedassets/county/v/1/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding- opportun ities/24-s-04-reedley-rad io-tower-a nd-eq u ipment-shelter/add end u m-3-plan-sheets.pdf) Addendum 3 Plan Sheets Addendum 4 (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sharedassets/county/v/1/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding-opportunities/ 24-s-04-reedley-radio-tower-and-equipment-shelter/00-91-15-addendum-04.pdf) Addendum 4 Addendum 4 Plan Sheets (http://www.fresnocountyca.gov/files/sharedassets/county/v/2/public-works-and-planning/design/construction-bidding- opportun ities/24-s-04-reedley-rad io-tower-a nd-eq u ipment-shelter/add end u m-4-plan-sheets.pdf) Addendum 4 Plan Sheets Proposal Section 004213 - 1-2 Proposal to the County of Fresno Contract Name: Reedley Radio Tower and Equipment Shelter Contract No.: 24-S-04 Fund / Subclass / Org / Account / Program or Memo No.: 1020 / 10000 / 8905 / 7295 Work to be performed: The work to be done is shown on a set of Plans, entitled: "Reedley Radio Tower and Equipment Shelter" Building No.: TBD Project Address: 17626 Manning Avenue Reedley, CA 93654 In case of a discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail. If this proposal shall be accepted and the undersigned shall fail to contract, as aforesaid, and to give the two bonds in the sums to be determined as aforesaid, each issued by a surety satisfactory to the Awarding Authority, within ten (10) days after the award of the contract, the Awarding Authority, at its option, may determine that the bidder has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this proposal and the acceptance thereof shall be null and void, and the forfeiture of such security accompanying this proposal shall operate and the same shall be the property of the County. The undersigned, as bidder, declares that all addenda issued with respect to this bid have been received and incorporated into this Proposal. The bidder's signature on this Proposal also constitutes acknowledgement of all addenda. The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only persons, or parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named herein; that this proposal is made without collusion with any other person, firm or corporation; that the bidder has carefully examined the annexed proposed form of contract, and the plans therein referred to; and the bidder proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted, that the bidder will contract with the County of Fresno to provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus and other means of construction, and to do all the work and furnish all the materials specified in the contract in the manner and time therein prescribed, and according to the requirements of the County as therein set forth, and that the bidder will take in full payment therefor the following lump sum price, to-wit: Page 2 of 20 07/25/2024 Proposal Section 004213 - 2 Bid $2,326,683.00 Item Item Description Item Price Extension No. 1 250 ft tall, 3-sided, self-supporting radio tower design and construction as per the $683,999.00 $683,999.00 detailed specifications 2 Equipment shelter construction and tower equipment as specified in the plans $1,642,684.00 $1,642,684.00 and specifications and all associated work including fencing Total: $2,326,683.00 Proposal Section 004213 - 2 Acknowledgement of Addendum Type N/A if no addenda were issued. Click "+" to add additional fields. Addendum No. * 01 Dated 07/01/2024 Type N/A if no addenda were issued. Click "+" to add additional fields. 1 Addendum No. * 02 Dated 07/15/2024 Type N/A if no addenda were issued. Click "+" to add additional fields. 2 Addendum No. * 03 Dated 07/18/2024 Page 3 of 20 07/25/2024 Type N/A if no addenda were issued. Click "+" to add additional fields. 3 Addendum No. * 04 Dated 07/22/2024 Bid Security Form Section 004313 - 1 Accompanying this proposal is security (check one only) in an amount equal to at least ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid: Bond Percentage 10.00% Guarantee Method Paper Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier's Check, Cash Paper Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier's Check, Cash Confirmation * I have provided a Paper Bid Bond for 10.00% of the bid total amount, to the public works office, prior to the solicitation deadline. If Cash Security, Enter Amount You must either attach an electronic bid bond here or provide an original bid bond (or other form of bid security authorized by Public Contract Code Section 20129(a)), prior to the bid opening. Bid Security Form Section 004313 - 1 (cont.) Business Name * Katch Environmental, Inc. dba Katch General Page 4 of 20 07/25/2024 Note: If bidder or other interested person is a corporation, state legal name of corporation. If bidder is a co-partnership, state true name of firm. Type of Business Corporation - list Officers Business Owners and Officers Names Paul Katchadourian - President/Owner Note: If bidder or other interested person is: • a corporation, list names of the president, secretary, treasurer and manager thereof • a partnership, list names of all individual co-partners composing firm. • an individual, state first and last name in full. Names of Owners and Key Employees Paul Katchadourian - President/Owner Note: List majority owners of your firm. If multiple owners, list all. Also include anyone, including key employees, who are actively promoting the contract. (SB1439) Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of Contractors: Class B Contractor License No. * Expires 933096 11/30/2025 DIR Registration Number 1000010211 Page 5 of 20 07/25/2024 Business Address 929 L St, Fresno, CA Zip Code 93721 Mailing Address 929 L St, Fresno, CA Zip Code 93721 Business Phone * Fax Number (559) 292-6653 E-mail Address estimating@katchgeneral.com Signature of Bidder Paul Katchadourian Dated * 07/25/2024 NOTE: If bidder is a corporation, the legal name of the corporation shall be set forth above together with the signature of the officer or officers authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation; if bidder is a co-partnership, the true name of the firm shall be set forth above together with the signature of the partner or partners authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the co- partnership; and if bidder is an individual, his signature shall be placed above. If signature is by an agent, other than an officer of a corporation or a member of a partnership, a Power of Attorney must be on file with the Owner prior to opening bids or submitted with the bid; otherwise, the bid will be disregarded as irregular and unauthorized. Subcontractors List Section 004336 - 1 SUBCONTRACTORS The following named subcontractor(s) will perform with labor, or otherwise render services to the general contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent of the total bid presented herewith. Please fill out as completely as possible when submitting your bid. Use subcontractor's business name style as registered with the License Board. Submission of subcontractor's name, location of business and description of work, California contractor's license number and public works contractor registration number issued pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor Code, all are REQUIRED, by Section 4104 of the California Public Contract Code, to be submitted prior to bid opening. (The "location of Page 6 of 20 07/25/2024 business" must specify the city in which the subcontractor's business is located, and the state if other than California.) All other requested information shall be submitted, either with the bid or within 24 hours after bid opening. Please fill out as completely as possible when submitting your bid. Use subcontractor's business name style as registered with the License Board. FAILURE TO LIST SUBCONTRACTORS AS DIRECTED MAY RENDER THE BID NON-RESPONSIVE, OR MAY RESULT IN ASSESSMENT OF A PENALTY AGAINST THE BIDDER IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 4110 OF THE CALIFORNIA PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE. Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. Subcontractor: * Soto Brother Custom Concrete, Inc. Business Address * 3527 E. Pico Ave„ Fresno, CA 93726 Class License No. 1094552 DIR Registration No. 1001091041 Item No. or Description of Work Rebar & Concrete Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 1 Subcontractor: * EWI Doors and Millwork Page 7 of 20 07/25/2024 Business Address * 2555 North Argyle, Fresno, CA 93727 Class License No. 1919914 DIR Registration No. 1000005826 Item No. or Description of Work Hollow Metal Doors Doors, Frames and Hardware (Materials Only) Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 2 Subcontractor: * McCurley and Day Masonry Business Address * 5740 E. Shields Ave., #104, Fresno, CA 93727 Class License No. 620562 DIR Registration No. 1000012425 Item No. or Description of Work Masonry Page 8 of 20 07/25/2024 Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 3 Subcontractor: D-One Business Address 961 N. Armstrong Ave., Clovis, CA 93611 Class License No. 1060276 DIR Registration No. 1000561495 Item No. or Description of Work Cold-Formed Metal Roofing, Sheathing, Rough Carpentry & Gypsum Board Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 4 Subcontractor: * Ro's Precise Painting, Inc. Page 9 of 20 07/25/2024 Business Address * 1816 INDUSTRIAL WAY, Sanger, CA 93657 Class License No. 1937283 DIR Registration No. 1000000284 Item No. or Description of Work Water Repellants, Resinous Flooring & Painting Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 5 Subcontractor: * California Building Products Business Address * 5712 E. Fountain Way, Fresno, CA 93727 Class License No. 1084969 DIR Registration No. 1000054846 Item No. or Description of Work Insulation Page 10 of 20 07/25/2024 Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 6 Subcontractor: * Four CCCC's Constructors Business Address * 1560 H Street, Fresno, CA 93721 Class License No. 908294 DIR Registration No. 1000002824 Item No. or Description of Work Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels, Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 7 Subcontractor: * Precision Doors Millwork Co. Page 11 of 20 07/25/2024 Business Address * 15088 La Palma Dr., Chino, CA 91710 Class License No. 759197 DIR Registration No. 1000007541 Item No. or Description of Work Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Hardware (Installer) Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 8 Subcontractor: Full Signal Business Address 46750 Longview Lane West, Coarsegold, CA 93614 Class License No. 819510 DIR Registration No. 1001076948 Item No. or Description of Work Self-Supporting Radio Tower Page 12 of 20 07/25/2024 Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 9 Subcontractor: Modern Air Business Address 2200 Copper Avenue, Merced, CA 95344 Class License No. 569680 DIR Registration No. 1000002692 Item No. or Description of Work Mechanical, HVAC & Direct Digital Control System Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 10 Subcontractor: * Larger Electric, Inc. Page 13 of 20 07/25/2024 Business Address * 3034 Avenue 393, Kingsburg, CA 93631 Class License No. 929677 DIR Registration No. 1001013766 Item No. or Description of Work Electrical & Communications Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor List - Section 004336 - 2 Optional: Vendor is not required to complete. Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. Subcontractor: * JT2 Inc dba Todd Companies Business Address * PO Box 6820, Visalia, CA 93290 Class License No. 788798 Page 14 of 20 07/25/2024 DIR Registration No. 1000002649 Item No. or Description of Work Plumbing, Site Clearing & Earthwork Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Subcontractor: To add more subcontractor listings, click the "+" to add additional fields. 1 Subcontractor: * Fresno Fence Connection Business Address * PO Box 458, Sanger, CA 93657 Class License No. 692620 DIR Registration No. 1000014751 Item No. or Description of Work Chain Link Fences & Gates Dollar Amount: OR Percentage of Total Bid: Email Address: Page 15 of 20 07/25/2024 Noncollusion Declaration Section 004519 - 1 TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID* The undersigned declares: I am the (Choose one of the following options): Owner If Corporate Officer please list Title: of (Business Name): * Katch Environmental, Inc. dba Katch General the party making the foregoing bid. The bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or refrain from bidding. The bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder. All statements contained in the bid are true. The bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for that purpose. Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the bidder. I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed on 2024, Date: * 07/25/2024 at City, State: Fresno, CA Signature: Paul Katchadourian Page 16 of 20 07/25/2024 (See Title 23 United States Code Section 112; Calif Public Contract Code Section 7106) *NOTE: Completing, signing, and returning the Non-Collusion Declaration is a required part of the Proposal. Bidders are cautioned that making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution. Title 13 CARB Certification Section 004556 - 1 In conformance with Title 13 § 2449(i), bidders will be required to attach copies of valid Certificates of Reported Compliance for the fleet selected for the contract and their listed subcontractors. Before May 15th of each year, the prime contractor must collect a new valid Certificate of Reported Compliance for the current compliance year, as defined in section 2449(n), from all fleets that have an ongoing contract with the prime contractor as of March 1 of that year. Prime contractors must not write contracts to evade this requirement. Annual renewals must be provided to the Resident Engineer at least one week prior to the expiration date of the current certificate. https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/fact-sheets/fact-sheet-contracting-requirements Choose all that apply: Bidder's Certificate of Reported Compliance has been attached to the bid. Bidder does not have a fleet subject to this regulation as outlined in Section 2449(i)(1)-(4). Listed subcontractors' certificates have been attached or will be submitted within five (5) calendar days of the bid opening. F—The following subcontractors do not have a fleet subject to this regulation as outlined in Section 2449(i)(1)-(4): Page 17 of 20 07/25/2024 FAILURE TO PROVIDE THE CERTIFICATES OF REPORTED COMPLIANCE AS DIRECTED MAY RENDER THE BID NOW RESPONSIVE. Guaranty Section 006536 - 1 Optional: Vendor is not required to complete. CONTRACT NO: 24-S-04 This guaranty shall be executed by the successful bidder in accordance with Section 2.32 of the General Conditions. The bidder may execute the guaranty on this page at the time of submitting the bid or may, in the alternative, submit it with the insurance certificates and bonds within ten (10) days after award. GUARANTY To the Owner: County of Fresno The undersigned guarantees the construction and installation of the following work included in this project: ALL WORK Should any of the materials or equipment prove defective or should the work as a whole prove defective, due to faulty workmanship, material furnished or methods of installation, or should the work or any part thereof fail to operate properly as originally intended and in accordance with each individual Work Order Detailed Scope of Work and specifications, due to any of the above causes, all within 365 calendar days after the date on which the Work under this contract is accepted by the Owner, the undersigned agrees to reimburse the Owner, upon demand, for its expenses incurred in restoring said work to the condition contemplated in said project, including the cost of any such equipment or materials replaced and the cost of removing and replacing any other work necessary to make such replacement or repairs, or, upon demand by the Owner, to replace any such material and to repair said work completely without cost to the Owner so that said work will function successfully as originally contemplated. The Owner shall have the unqualified option to make any needed replacement or repairs itself or to have such replacements or repairs done by the undersigned. In the event the Owner elects to have said work performed by the undersigned, the undersigned agrees that the repairs shall be made and such materials as are necessary shall be furnished and installed within a reasonable Page 18 of 20 07/25/2024 time after the receipt of demand from the Owner. If the undersigned shall fail or refuse to comply with his or her obligations under this guaranty, the Owner shall be entitled to all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by reason of said failure or refusal. Date: No bid Name (Printed): No bid Signature: No bid Title: No bid Contractor: No bid Additional Documents (use if needed) Name Omission Terms Submitted File Not Required - Extra Space if needed Bid Bond_FC Not Required - Extra Space if needed Not Required - Extra Space if needed Confirmation_07 12 2024.pdf Not Required - Extra Space if needed Not Required - Extra Space if needed Non-Collusion Not Required - Extra Space if needed Declaration.pdf I am not enclosing this Not Required - Extra Space if needed document Not Required - Extra Space if needed Not Required - Extra Space if needed because the omission terms have been met. 3 Required Documents Required Document List Page 19 of 20 07/25/2024 Name Omission Terms Submitted File CARB Certification of Reported Compliance - CARB cert - Bidder Does not have a fleet subject to this regulation. Blue Line Valid CARB Certification of Reported Compliance Generator - Bidder 1.pdf I am not CARB Certification(s) of Reported Compliance - enclosing this Subcontractors Due by 4pm on the 5th calendar day after bid document Valid CARB Certification(s) of Reported opening or no listed subcontractors have a fleet because the Compliance - Subcontractors subject to this regulation. omission terms have been met. 2 Required Documents Page 20 of 20 07/25/2024 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPME T SHELTER GUARANTY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 006536 - 1 CONTRACT NO: 24-S-04 This guaranty shall be executed by the successful bidder in accordance with Section 2.32 of the General Conditions. The bidder may execute the guaranty on this page at the time of submitting the bid or may, in the alternative, submit it with the insurance certificates and bonds within ten (10) days after award. GUARANTY To the Owner: County of Fresno The undersigned guarantees the constructidr and installation of the following work included in this project: ALL WORK Should any of the materials or equipment pro*e defective or should the work as a whole prove defective, due to faulty workmanship, material furnished or methods of installation, or should the work or any part thereof fail to operate properly as originally intended and in accordance with each individual Work Order Detailed Scope of Work and specifications, due to any of the above causes, all within 365 Calendar Days after the date on which the Work under this contract is accepted by the Owner, the undersigned agrees to reimburse the Owner, upon demand, for its expenses incurred in restoring said work to the condition contemplated in said project, including the cost of any such eq Ipment or materials replaced and the cost of removing and replacing any other work necessary to make such replacement or repairs, or, upon demand by the Owner, to replace any such material and to repair said work completely without cost to the Owner so that said work will function successfully as originally contemplated. The Owner shall have the unqualified option to make any needed replacement or repairs itself or to have such replacements or repairs done by the undersigned. In the event the Owner elects to have said work performed by the undersigned, the undersigned agrees that the repairs shall be made and such materials as are necessary shall be furnished and installed within a reasonable time after the receipt of demand from the Owner. If the undersigned shall fail or refuse to comply with their obligations L nder this guaranty, the Owner shall be entitled to all costs and expenses reasonably incurrec by reason of said failure or refusal. Name (Printed): Paul Katchadourian Signature: Title: President Date: 09/27/2024 Contractor: Katch General END OF ECTION CONTRACT#24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 - 1 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made at Fresno, in Fresno County, California, by and between Katch Environmental, Inc. dba Katch General , hereinafter"Contractor", and the County of Fresno, hereinafter"Owner". WITNESSETH, the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration hereinafter named, agree as follows: ARTICLE I. The Contractor agrees to furnish all labor, equipment and materials, including tools, implements, and appliances required, and to perform all the work in a good and workmanlike manner, free from any and all liens and claims of mechanics, materialmen, subcontractors, artisans, machinists, teamsters, and laborers required for: Reedley Radio Tower and Equipment Shelter Contract No. 24-S-04 Located at 17626 Manning Avenue, Reedley, California, all in strict compliance with the plans, drawings, and specifications therefore prepared by the Director of the Fresno County Department of Public Works and Planning and his authorized representatives, hereinafter called the Project Manager, and other contract documents relating thereto. ARTICLE II. The Contractor and the Owner agree that the Advertisement (Notice to Bidders), the Wage Scale, the Proposal hereto attached, the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions of the contract, the Technical Specifications, the Drawings, and the Addenda and Bulletins thereto, the Contract Bonds and Certificates of Liability and Workers Compensation Insurance, and the Contract Change Orders, together with this Agreement form the Contract Documents, and they are as fully a part of the contract as if hereto attached or herein repeated. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to cooperate so that any work exhibited in the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, is to be executed the same as if both are mentioned in the specifications and set forth in the drawings, to the true intent and meaning of the said drawings and specifications when taken together. Provided, however, that no part of said specifications that is in conflict with any portion of this Agreement, or that is not actually descriptive of the work to be done thereunder, or of the manner in which the said work is to be executed, shall be considered as any part of this Agreement, but shall be utterly null and void, and anything that is expressly stated, delineated or shown in or upon the specifications or Detailed Scope of Work shall govern and be followed, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in any other source of information or authority to which reference may be made. ARTICLE III. The Contractor agrees that the work under the contract shall be completed as determined by the Owner within One hundred sixty (160) CALENDAR DAYS from the date shown in the Notice to Proceed. Time of performance shall be deemed as of the essence hereof and it is agreed that actual damages to the Owner from any delay in completion beyond the date provided for herein, or any extension thereof until the work is completed or accepted, shall be all provable damages plus liquidated damages in the amount of Three Thousand and 00/100 DOLLARS($3,000.00) per day;that said liquidated damage was arrived at by a studied estimate of loss to the Owner in the event of a delay considering the following damage items which are extremely difficult or impossible to determine: Additional construction expense resulting from delay of completion including, but not limited to, engineering, inspection, rental and utilities; provided, however, the Owner may conditionally accept the work and occupy and use the same CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 - 2 if there has been such a degree of completion as shall in its opinion render the same safe, fit and convenient for the use for which it is intended and in such cases the Contractor and Surety shall not be charged for liquidated damages for any period subsequent to such conditional acceptance and occupation by the Owner but Owner may assess actual damages caused by failure of total completion during such period. The time during which the Contractor is delayed in said work by the acts or neglects of the Owner or its employees or those under it by contract or otherwise, or by the acts of God which the Contractor could not have reasonably foreseen and provided for, or by storms and inclement weather which delays the work, or by any strikes, boycotts, or like obstructive action by employee or labor organizations, or by any general lockouts or other defensive action by employers, whether general, or by organizations of employers, shall be added to the time for completion as aforesaid. ARTICLE IV. COMPENSATION: The Owner agrees to make payments on account thereof as provided in the General Conditions in the total amount of Two Million Three Hundred TwentV- Six Thousand Six Hundred Eighty-Three Dollars and 00/100 ($2,326,683.00I in current funds for the performance of the contract which sum is computed as follows: TOTAL BID LUMP SUM. ARTICLE V. The Contractor and the Owner agree that changes in this Agreement or in the work to be done under this Agreement shall become effective only when written in the form of a supplemental agreement or change order and approved and signed by the Owner and the Contractor. It is specifically agreed that the Owner shall have the right to request any alterations, deviations, reductions, or additions to the contract, plans, and/or specifications and the amount of the cost thereof shall be added to or deducted from the amount of the contract price aforesaid by fair and reasonable valuations thereof. This contract shall be deemed completed when the work is finished in accordance with all Contract Documents as amended by such changes. No such change or modification shall release or exonerate any surety upon any guaranty or bond given in connection with this contract. ARTICLE VI. In the event of a dispute between the Owner or Project Manager and the Contractor as to an interpretation of any of the specifications or as to the quality of sufficiency of material or workmanship, the decision of the Project Manager shall for the time being prevail and the Contractor, without delaying the job, shall proceed as directed by the Project Manager without prejudice to a final determination by negotiation, arbitration by mutual consent or litigation and should the Contractor be finally determined to be either wholly or partially correct, the Owner shall reimburse him for any added costs he may have incurred by reason of work done or material supplied beyond the terms of the contract as a result of complying with the Project Manager's directions as aforesaid. In the event the Contractor shall neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provisions of this contract, the Owner, after three days' written notice to the Contractor, may, without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due to the Contractor, subject to final settlement between the parties as in this paragraph hereinabove provided. ARTICLE VII. TERMINATION: If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he or any of his subcontractors should persistently violate any of the provisions of the contract, or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 - 3 except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor or persistently disregard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the Project Manager, then the Owner may, upon the certificate of the Project Manager, when sufficient cause exists to justify such action, serve written notice upon the Contractor and his surety of its intention to terminate the contract, such notice to contain the reasons for such intention to terminate the contract, and unless within five (5) days after the serving of such notice, such violations shall cease and satisfactory arrangements for correction thereof be made, the contract shall, upon the expiration of said five days, cease and terminate. In the event of any such termination, the Owner shall immediately serve written notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor, and the surety shall have the right to take over and perform the contract, provided, however, that if the surety within ten (10) days after the serving upon it of notice of termination does not give the Owner written notice of its intention to take over and perform the contract or does not commence performance thereof within the ten (10) days stated above from the date of the serving of such notice, the Owner may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion by contract or by any other method it may deem advisable for the account and at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable to the Owner for any excess cost occasioned the Owner thereby, and in such event the Owner may without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances, plant and other property belonging to the Contractor as may be on the site or the work and necessary therefore. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner as herein provided, and damage incurred through the Contractor's default, shall be certified by the Project Manager. ARTICLE VIII. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall comply with Sections 1770 — 1780 of the California Labor Code and the provisions of Sections 2.52 and 2.55 of the General Conditions concerning the payment of wages to all workers and mechanics, and the employment and payment of apprentices by the Contractor or any subcontractor for all work performed under this Agreement. ARTICLE IX. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall comply with Sections 1810 to 1815 of the California Labor Code and the provisions of Section 2.51 of the General Conditions, concerning hours of work and payment of overtime compensation for all work performed under this Agreement. The Board of Supervisors hereby specifies that portions of the work can only be performed outside the regular working h ours as defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreement filed with the Director of Industrial Relations in accordance with Labor Code Section 1773.1, and that the overtime requirements for Saturdays, and holidays are hereby waived for these portions of the work, as more particularly described in the specifications. However, this exemption shall not negate the overtime provisions specified in Labor Code Section 1815. ARTICLE X. INDEMNIFICATION: To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to and shall indemnify, save, hold harmless and at County's request, defend County and its officers, agents and employees, and the Project Manager and their respective officers, agents and CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 -4 employees, from any and all costs and expenses, attorney fees and court costs, damages, liabilities, claims and losses occurring or resulting to County, or the Project Manager in connection with the performance, or failure to perform, by Contractor, its officers, agents or employees under this Agreement, and from any and all costs and expenses, attorney fees and court costs, damages, liabilities, claims and losses occurring or resulting to any person, firm or corporation who may be injured or damaged by the performance, or failure to perform, of Contractor, its officers, agents or employees under this Agreement. In addition, Contractor agrees to indemnify County for Federal, State of California and/or local audit exceptions resulting from non-compliance herein on the part of Contractor. In any and all claims against the County, the Project Manager, or any of their respective officers, agents or employees, initiated by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation set forth in the immediately preceding paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE XI. INSURANCE: Without limiting the Owner's right to obtain indemnification from Contractor or any third parties, Contractor, at its sole expense, in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.40 of the General Conditions, shall maintain in full force and effect the following insurance policies throughout the term of this Agreement, excepting only those policies for which a longer term is specified: A. Course of Construction (Builder's All Risk) Insurance, with scope and amount of coverage as specified in Section 2.40 B.5 of the General Conditions. B. Commercial General Liability Insurance, with scope and amount of coverage as specified in Section 2.40 B.1 of the General Conditions. C. Automobile Liability Insurance, with scope and amount of coverage as specified in Section 2.40 B.2 of the General Conditions. D. Professional Liability Insurance, with scope and amount of coverage as specified in Section 2.40 B.4 of the General Conditions. E. Worker's Compensation Insurance, with scope and amount of coverage as specified in Section 2.40 B.3 of the General Conditions. The Certificate of Insurance shall be issued in triplicate, to the County of Fresno, and all other participating agencies, whether or not said agencies are named herein, who contribute to the cost of the work or have jurisdiction over areas in which the work is to be performed and all officers and employees of said agencies while acting within the course and scope of their duties and responsibilities. ARTICLE XII. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: 1. AUDITS AND INSPECTIONS: The Contractor shall at any time during business hours, and as often as the Owner may deem necessary, make available to the Owner for examination all of its records and data with respect to the matters covered by this Agreement. The Contractor shall, upon request by the Owner, permit the Owner to audit and inspect all of such records and data CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 - 5 necessary to ensure Contractor's compliance with the terms of this Agreement. If this Agreement exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00), Contractor shall be subject to the examination and audit of the Auditor General for a period of three (3) years after final payment under contract (Government Code Section 8546.7). 2. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: In performance of the work, duties, and obligations assumed by Contractor under this Agreement, it is mutually understood and agreed that Contractor, including any and all of Contractor officers, agents, and employees will at all times be acting and performing as an independent contractor, and shall act in an independent capacity and not as an officer, agent, servant, employee,joint venture, partner, or associate of the Owner. Contractor and Owner shall comply with all applicable provisions of law and the rules and regulations, if any, of governmental authorities having jurisdiction over matters of the subject thereof. Because of its status as an independent contractor, Contractor shall have absolutely no right to employment rights and benefits available to Owner's employees. Contractor shall be solely liable and responsible for providing to, or on behalf of, its employees all legally-required employee benefits. In addition, Contractor shall be solely responsible and save Owner harmless from all matters related to payment of Contractor's employees, including compliance with social security, withholding, and all other regulations governing such matters. It is acknowledged that during the term of this Agreement, Contractor may be providing services to others unrelated to the Owner or to this Agreement. 3. DISCLOSURE OF SELF-DEALING TRANSACTIONS: This provision is only applicable if the Contractor is operating as a corporation (a for-profit or non-profit corporation) or if during the term of the agreement, the Contractor changes its status to operate as a corporation. Members of the Contractor's Board of Directors shall disclose any self-dealing transactions that they are a party to while Contractor is providing goods or performing services under this agreement. A self-dealing transaction shall mean a transaction to which the Contractor is a party and in which one or more of its directors has a material financial interest. Members of the Board of Directors shall disclose any self-dealing transactions that they are a party to by completing and signing a Self-Dealing Transaction Disclosure Form, attached hereto as Exhibit A and incorporated herein by reference, and submitting it to the Owner prior to commencing with the self-dealing transaction or immediately thereafter. 4. EXECUTIVE ORDER N-6-22: Under Executive Order N-6-22 as a contractor, subcontractor, or grantee, compliance with the economic sanctions imposed in response to Russia's actions in Ukraine is required, including with respect to, but not limited to, the federal executive orders identified in the EO and the sanctions identified on the U.S. Department of the Treasury website (https://ofac.treasury.gov/sanctions-programs-and-cou ntry-information/ukraine-russia-related- sanctions). Failure to comply may result in the termination of contracts or grants, as applicable. Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons List (SDN) (https://ofac.treasurV.gov/specially-designated-nationals-and-blocked-persons-list-sdn-human- readable-lists). ARTICLE XIII. The Contractor represents that he has secured the payment of Workers Compensation in compliance with the provisions of the Labor Code of the State of California and Paragraphs B.3, C.3 and EA of Article 2.40 of the General Conditions, and that he will continue so to comply with such statutory and contractual provisions for the duration and entirety of the performance of the work contemplated herein. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMffNT SHELTER AGREEMENT REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 005213 - 6 This Contract, 24-S-04,was awarded by th Board of Supervisors on September 241", 2024. It has been reviewed by the Department o Public Works and Planning and is in proper order for signature of the Chairman of the oard of Supervisors. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, they have exec ted this Agreement this �� day of J-4--C-ender 2024 Katch General COUNTY_ _OF FRESNO (CONTRACTOR) �~ (OWNER) 46-2662960 (TaxJpayer. ederal I.D. No.) -- B / t Nathan Magsig, Chairman Name: Paul Katchado_urian ~� of the Board of Supervisors of the T _ County of Fresno Title: President ATTEST: Bernice E. Seidel Clerk of the Board of Supervisors County of Fresno, State of California _ter: n� Deputy FOR ACCOUNTING USE ONLY VARIOUS ORGS. 8905 / 7295 END OF SECTION CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND SELF-DEALING TRANSACTION EQUIPMENT SHELTER DISCLOSURE FORM REEDLEY, CA. EXHIBIT A - 1 SELF-DEALING TRANSACTION DISCLOSURE FORM In order to conduct business with the County of Fresno (hereinafter referred to as "County"), members of a corporation's board of directors of the Consultant, must disclose any self-dealing transactions that they are a party to while providing goods, performing services, or both for the County. A self-dealing transaction is defined below: "A self-dealing transaction means a transaction to which the corporation is a party and in which one or more of its directors has a material financial interest" The definition above will be utilized for purposes of completing this disclosure form. INSTRUCTIONS (1) Enter board member's name, job title (if applicable), and date this disclosure is being made. (2) Enter the board member's company/agency name and address. (3) Describe in detail the nature of the self-dealing transaction that is being disclosed to the County. At a minimum, include a description of the following: a. The name of the agency/company with which the corporation has the transaction; and b. The nature of the material financial interest in the Corporation's transaction that the board member has. (4) Describe in detail why the self-dealing transaction is appropriate based on applicable provisions of the Corporations Code. (5) Form must be signed by the board member that is involved in the self-dealing transaction described in Sections (3) and (4). CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND SELF-DEALING TRANSACTION EQUIPMENT SHELTER DISCLOSURE FORM REEDLEY, CA. EXHIBIT A - 2 (1) Company Board Member Information: Name: Date: Job Title: (2) Company/Agency Name and Address: (3) Disclosure (Please describe the nature of the self-dealing transaction you are a party to): (4) Explain why this self-dealing transaction is consistent with the requirements of Corporations Code 5233 (a): 5 Authorized Signature Signature: Date: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT A. The Agreement shall be signed by the Contractor and the Owner. B. The Contract Documents are defined in ARTICLE II of the Agreement. C. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction ("Contract"). This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined above. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Engineer of record of record and the Contractor, but the Engineer of record of record shall be entitled to performance of the obligations of the Contractor intended for their benefit and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. 2.02 EXECUTION, CORRELATION, AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents are complementary and anything called for by one shall be supplied as if called for by all, providing it comes clearly within the scope of the Contract. B. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Words and abbreviations that have well-known technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. C. Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated personal observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. All work and material shall be the best of the respective kinds specified or indicated. Should any workmanship or materials be required that are not directly or indirectly called for in the Contract Documents, but which nevertheless are necessary for proper fulfillment of the obvious intent thereof, said workmanship or materials shall be the same for similar parts that are detailed, indicated or specified, and the Contractor shall understand the same to be implied and provide for it in his/her tender as if it were particularly described or delineated. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 2 2.03 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS All Contract Documents and copies thereof furnished shall remain the property of the Owner. With the exception of one (1) contract set for each party to the Contract, such documents are to be returned by Contractor or suitably accounted for to the Owner upon request at the completion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Engineer of record's common law copyright or other reserved rights. The Owner's use of the documents will not increase the Engineer of record's design liability beyond the Project and the site for which the design was originally intended. 2.04 DEFINITIONS The following words, or variations thereof, as used in these documents have meanings as defined: A. The Work - The Work comprises the completed construction required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to produce such construction, and all materials, other permits and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. B. The Project—The collective improvements to be constructed by the Contractor pursuant to the construction of the Sheriff Substation, Vehicle/Evidence Storage building, parking, and associated site improvements for Fresno County. C. Owner - The County of Fresno, State of California, as represented by the Fresno County Board of Supervisors and so named in the Agreement. The term Owner additionally includes the Owner's authorized representative (also known as the Resident Engineer) for this Project. D. Engineer of record — The Owner and his/her authorized representative, as defined in Section 2.04C, or a duly California licensed Engineer. E. Contractor- When used in the General Conditions refers to person(s) or entity (partnership or corporation) so named in Agreement and when used in the body of the Specifications, refers to the Contractor for that specific work, whether it be the General Contractor, Subcontractor, or other Contractor. The term Contractor means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. F. Subcontractor - Person, persons, entity, co-partnership or corporation having direct contract with Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor means a Subcontractor or a Subcontractor's authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or any separate contractor's subcontractors. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 3 G. Sub-subcontractor — Person, persons, entity, co-partnership or corporation having a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site (i.e. a second-tier, third-tier or lower-tier Subcontractor). The term Sub-subcontractor means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative thereof. H. Notice to Proceed - A written notice issued by the Owner directing the Contractor to proceed with construction activities to complete the Project. I. Technical Specifications — Contains the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. J. Days- All days shall be measured in calendar days unless specifically noted otherwise in these documents or referenced codes. K. Year- One year shall be measured in terms of 365 calendar days. 2.05 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A. Precedence —Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Subject to Section 2.02, in cases of discrepancy concerning dimension, quantity and location, the Drawings shall take precedence over the Specifications. Explanatory notes on the Drawings shall take precedence over conflicting drawn indications. Large scale details shall take precedence over smaller scale details and figured dimensions shall take precedence over scaled measurement. Where figures are not shown, scale measurements shall be followed but shall in all cases be verified by measuring actual conditions of Work already in place. In cases of discrepancy concerning quality and application of materials and non-technical requirements over materials, the specifications shall take precedence over Drawings. B. Division of Specifications — For convenience of reference and to facilitate the letting of independent contracts, this specification may be separated into certain sections; such separation shall not operate to oblige the Owner, Engineer of record or Professional Consultant to establish the limits of any contract between the Contractor and Sub-Contractor each of whom shall depend upon his/her own contract stipulations. The General Conditions apply with equal force to all work, including extra work. C. Governing Factors—Dimensions figured on drawings shall be followed in every case in preference to scale of drawings. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 4 D. Discrepancies — Should the Contractor, at any time, discover a discrepancy in a drawing or specification, or any variation between dimensions on drawings and measurements at site, or any lacking of dimensions or other information, he/she shall report at once to the Resident Engineer requesting clarification and shall not proceed with the work affected thereby until such clarification has been made. If the Contractor proceeds with work affected by such discrepancies, without having received such clarification, he/she does so at his/her own risk. Any adjustments involving such circumstances made by the Contractor, prior to approval by the Resident Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's risk and the settlement of any complications or disputes arising therefrom shall be at the Contractor's sole expense and Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner, Owner's representatives, and Resident Engineer from any liability or loss with respect to said adjustments. E. Scope of Drawings — The drawings shall be held to determine the general character of the Work as well as its details. Parts not detailed shall be constructed in accordance with best standard practice for work of this class, so as to afford the requisite strength and logically complete the parts they compose. Where it is obvious that a drawing illustrates only a part of a given work or of a number of items, the remainder shall be deemed repetitious and so construed. The Contractor shall be responsible for all errors made in using any drawings which have been superseded. F. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples — 1. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and establish standards by which the work will be judged. 2. The Contractor shall prepare, review, approve and submit to the Resident Engineer, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. 3. By preparing, approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so with reasonable promptness, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work, the Project, the Work Order and the Contract Documents. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 5 4. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Engineer of record's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Resident Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Engineer of record has reviewed the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Engineer of record's review of them. 5. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Engineer of record shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. The cost of such certifications shall be borne by the Contractor. Owner may elect to have an independent certification performed at its own expense. The Owner shall have final approving authority for performance-based items. 6. The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop drawings, Product Data, or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Engineer of record on previous submittals. 7. No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the Engineer of record. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with reviewed submittals. 8. Submission of Shop Drawings and Samples to the Resident Engineer is required for only those items specifically mentioned in the Specification Sections. If Contractor submits Shop Drawings for items other than the above, the Resident Engineer will not be obligated to distribute or review them. Contractor shall be responsible for the procuring of Shop Drawings for his/her own use as he/she may require for the progress of the Work. 9. The term "Shop Drawings" as used herein also includes but is not limited to fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, manufacturer's standard drawings, descriptive literature, catalogs, brochures, performance and test data, wiring and control diagrams, all other drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systems, and methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the positions and layout of each conform to the Contract requirements. As used herein the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass-produced, and the term "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out of selected materials to meet individual design requirements. Shop Drawings shall establish the actual detail of all manufactured or fabricated items; indicate proper relation to adjoining work; amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure; and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 6 10. Drawings: Following Contractor's review and approval, Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer for approval four (4) minimum to six (6) maximum prints and/or pdf submission of the same information via email. (Required delivery methods and quantities of submittals will be determined at the time of the Pre-Construction Meeting.) The Resident Engineer will check the submittal to see if it is complete. If complete, the Resident Engineer will forward the drawings to the Owner and the Engineer of record. The Engineer of record and Owner will check the drawings and note Engineer of record and Owner comments and affix a stamp to the drawing s indicating the status of acceptance, and will return same to the Resident Engineer, each retaining prints for his/her records. The Engineer of record or his/her consultants, as applicable, will review the Shop Drawings; mark the prints with required revisions; stamp the prints and indicate "No Exceptions Taken", "Make Corrections Noted", "Revise and Resubmit", "Submit Specified Item", or "Rejected", and return the prints. The Resident Engineer will return the prints to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then print and distribute the appropriate number of copies to his/her job personnel as required. If a drawing is stamped "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit", the Contractor shall correct and resubmit as outlined above. When stamped "Make Corrections Noted", or similar instructions, the Contractor shall correct and resubmit for record only, three (3) prints of each drawing. Also see Technical Specifications, Division I, General Requirements. 11. Samples: Following Contractor's review and approval, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer of record, five (5) minimum samples of all materials in quantities and sizes as specified herein as requested by the Engineer of record. Submittals shall be given to the Engineer of record at a time determined by the Contractor, which allows for any necessary resubmittal and which will not cause any delay in the Work. Samples will be forwarded to the Engineer of record. If a sample is stamped "Rejected" or "Revise and Resubmit", one sample so noted will be returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit as outlined above. If a sample is stamped "Make Corrections Noted", one sample so noted will be returned. Corrected samples shall be resubmitted for approval as per the original submittal. Also see Technical Specifications and General Requirements. 12. Brochures: Following Contractor's review and approval, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer of record, five (5) copies of all manufacturer's catalogs or brochures as required. Brochures will be forwarded to the Engineer of record for review. If a brochure is stamped "No Exception Taken", two (2)copies will be returned to the Contractor. If stamped "Rejected", one marked copy and two (2) unmarked copies will be returned. Corrected copies shall be resubmitted for approval as per the original submittal. Also see General Requirements. 13. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where any item or work is required by Specifications to be furnished, installed or performed in accordance with a specified product manufacturer's instructions, Contractor shall procure and distribute the necessary copies of such instructions to all concerned parties. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 7 G. Materials - All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and of good quality, proof of which shall be furnished by the Contractor; in case of doubt as to kind or quality required, samples shall be submitted to the Engineer of record through the Resident Engineer who will specify the kind and use of the material appropriate to the location and the function of the item in question. Contractor shall furnish such item accordingly. Before final payment, all material rejected by the Engineer of record or Resident Engineer shall be promptly removed from the premises by the Contractor, whether or not completely installed, and promptly and properly replaced with correct materials, including any other work adjoining if disturbed, in accordance with the contract and without expense to the Owner; the Contractor also shall pay for work of other Contractors as is affected by such removals and replacements. 2.06 THE ARCHITECT A. The Owner may delegate all or a portion of its rights and responsibilities to a California licensed Engineer of record as deemed necessary. B. The Engineer of record advises the Resident Engineer in all aspects of the construction phase of the Project. The Engineer of record's functions include advice and assistance to the Resident Engineer in the correct interpretation and application of the Contract Documents. The Engineer of record is not authorized independently to issue Addenda, Clarifications, Field Orders, Work Authorizations, or Supplemental Work Orders, or in any other way to bind the Owner in discussions with the Contractor. C. The Contractor shall deliver all correspondence relating to the proper execution of the Work to the Resident Engineer. The Resident Engineer reserves the right to consult with the Engineer of record and Owner prior to responding to the Contractor's correspondence. D. When discussions between the Contractor and the Resident Engineer occur either on the site or elsewhere, but the Engineer of record is not present, the Resident Engineer reserves the right to consult with the Engineer of record and Owner prior to issuing his/her final decision or instruction. E. The Engineer of record shall review or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall generally be taken within ten (10)working days, however under certain circumstances such as very complex submittals or if large number of submittals are submitted at one (1)time it may take longer. In this case the Contractor will be notified and given the opportunity to advise the Engineer of record of priorities. The Engineer of record's review of a specific item shall not indicate review of an assembly of which the item is a component. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 8 2.07 THE PROJECT MANAGER A. The Resident Engineer is the authorized representative of the Owner in all aspects of administering the construction contract on behalf of the Owner. All communications from and to the Contractor will be channeled through the Resident Engineer. However, the Resident Engineer does not have the authority to bind the Owner in matters affecting adjustments to the time or cost of the Project as defined in the Agreement for Construction. B. The Resident Engineer will be the Owner's representative during the construction and warranty periods, and until final payment to all contractors is due. The Resident Engineer will advise and consult with the Owner. All instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded through the Resident Engineer. The Resident Engineer will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument. C. The Resident Engineer will be on site during construction to monitor the progress and quality of the Work and to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of on- site observations and communication with the Contractor, the Resident Engineer will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. D. The Resident Engineer shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so that the Resident Engineer may perform its functions under the Contract Documents. E. Based on the Resident Engineer's observations, and an evaluation of the Contractor's Application for Payment, the Resident Engineer will determine the amount owing to the Contractor and will issue to the Owner Certificates for Payment incorporating such amount. F. The Resident Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and the initial judge of the performance hereunder by the Contractor. The Owner will have final authority of all such matters. G. The Resident Engineer will render interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with reasonable promptness and in accordance with agreed upon time limits. Either party to the Contract may make written request to the Resident Engineer for such interpretations. H. Claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Resident Engineer relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner (or his/her designee). I. All interpretations and decisions of the Resident Engineer will be in writing or in graphic form, and shall be both consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable therefrom. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 9 J. The Resident Engineer will have the authority to reject, or recommend to the Owner the rejection, of any work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in the Resident Engineer's opinion, it is considered necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Resident Engineer will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not such work be then fabricated, installed or completed. K. The Resident Engineer will receive from the Contractor and review all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, and forward same to Engineer of record and Owner for review. L. Following consultation with the Owner, the Resident Engineer will take appropriate action on changes, and will have authority to order minor changes in the Work as provided herein. M. The Resident Engineer will conduct inspections to determine the date of Completion, and will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents and assembled by the Contractor. The Resident Engineer will issue a final Project Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements for completion and final payment. The Resident Engineer will monitor the warranty for a period of365 Calendar Days from and after the date of acceptance of the Work, unless otherwise specified as a longer term. N. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Resident Engineer as the Owner's representative during construction, as set forth in the Contract Documents, will not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, the Contractor and the Resident Engineer, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Failure of the Contractor to respond within ten (10) business days to a written request shall constitute consent by the Contractor. O. In case of the termination of the employment of the Resident Engineer, the Owner may appoint a successor Resident Engineer, whose status and duties under the Contract Documents shall be the same as those of the former Resident Engineer. 2.08 OWNER A. Information and Services Required of the Owner 1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for the construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2. Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3. The Owner shall forward all instructions to the Contractor through the Resident Engineer. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 10 B. Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct defective work as required by Section 2.42 herein or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by a written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of any contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 2.12.C. C. Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and fails after written notice from the Owner to correct such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Contract Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the additional services of the Engineer of record or other professionals made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to the prior approval of the Engineer of record. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, or Owner may require payment by the surety on the performance or warranty bonds as appropriate. Such action shall, in no way, affect the status of either party under contract, nor be held as a basis of any claim by the Contractor for damages or extension of time. 2.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions 1. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Resident Engineer any discrepancy or inconsistency that may be discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or the Resident Engineer for any damage resulting from any such inconsistencies or discrepancies in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such inconsistencies or discrepancies and knowingly failed to report it to the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time unless authorized by the Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 11 2. Neither the Owner nor the Resident Engineer or Engineer of record assume any responsibility for an understanding or representation made by any of their agents or representation prior to the execution of the Agreement unless (1) such understanding or representations are expressly stated in the Agreement, and (2) the Agreement expressly provides that responsibility therefor is assumed by the Owner. 3. Failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself/herself with all available information will not relieve him/her from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the Work. 4. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Any inconsistencies or discrepancies discovered by the Contractor shall be reported to the Resident Engineer at once. 5. Before submitting any Request for Information (RFI), or other contractor-initiated request for information, the Contractor shall determine that the information requested is not clearly provided in the Contract Documents. RFI's shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer only from the Contractor, or Owner, and not from any subcontractor, supplier or other vendor, and shall be on a form approved by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a revised and updated RFI Priority Schedule on a weekly basis. The RFI Priority Schedule shall rank RFI's in order of priority and include a brief statement of reason for priority. Owner initiated RFI's will not be listed on the Contractor's RFI Priority Schedule. The Owner will provide the Engineer of record a separate list of Owner initiated RFI's upon request of the Engineer of record. The Engineer of record will endeavor to respect the order of priorities as requested by the Contractor or Owner for the overall benefit of the Project. The RFI process is for information and clarification only and may not be utilized to obtain approval for changes in Work Order Price or time. Also see Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Supervision Procedures 1. The Contractor shall efficiently supervise and direct the Work, using therein the Contractor's best skill and diligence for which he/she is remunerated in the Contract Price. The Contractor shall carefully inspect the site and study and compare the Contract Documents, as ignorance of any phase of any of the features or conditions affecting the Contract will not excuse him/her from carrying out its provisions to its full intent. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 12 2. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be so confirmed upon written request in each case. The Superintendent who begins the Project shall remain on the Project until the Project is completed, as long as the Contractor employs that person. The Superintendent shall not be replaced without the approval of the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his/her employees, subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 4. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his/her employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him/her. 5. The Contractor shall not be relieved from his/her obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Owner or the Engineer of record in his/her administration of the Contract, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 6. Contractor shall alert and inform their employees that State law requires that the identities of inmates/wards/patients/clients be kept confidential. Revealing the identities of inmates/wards/patients/clients is punishable by law. C. Construction Procedures 1. Means and Methods — The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and control of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, coordination and procedures for all the Work of this contract. Additionally, the Contractor shall be responsible for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 2. Laws of County and State —The Contractor must comply with all laws, rules, regulations, provisions and ordinances of the County in which the Work is being done, and all State laws pertaining to the Work. 3. Safeguards — The Contractor shall provide, in conformity with all local codes and ordinances and as may be required, such temporary walls, fences, guard-rails, barricades, lights, danger signs, enclosures, etc., and shall maintain such safeguards until all work is completed. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 13 4. Housekeeping — Contractor shall keep the premises free of excess accumulated debris. Clean up as required and as directed by the Resident Engineer. At completion of work all debris shall be removed from the site. Refer to General Requirements for additional requirements. 5. Labor and Materials — Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 6. The Contractor shall deliver to the Resident Engineer, prior to final acceptance of the Work as a whole, signed certificates from suppliers of materials and manufactured items stating that such items conform to the Contract Documents. 7. The Contractor, immediately upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed (or where shop drawings, samples, etc., are required, immediately upon receipt of review thereof), shall place orders for all materials, work fabrication, and/or equipment to be employed by him/her in connection with that portion of the contracted Work. The Contractor shall keep all materials, work fabrications and/or equipment specified and shall advise the Resident Engineer promptly, in writing, of all orders placed and of such materials, work fabrications and/or equipment which may not be available in a timely manner for the purposes of the Contract. 8. Any worker whose work is unsatisfactory to the Owner or the Engineer of record, or are considered by the Owner or Engineer of record to be careless, incompetent, unskilled or otherwise unfit shall be dismissed from work under the Contract upon written request to the Contractor from the Owner or the Engineer of record. 9. Temporary Facilities — Contractor may connect to existing water and electricity available on the site provided it is suitable to the Contractor's requirements. Water and electricity used will be paid by the Owner. Contractor shall bear all expenses for carrying the water or electricity to the appropriate locations and to connect or tap into existing lines. Toilet facilities may be available on a site to the workmen engaged in the performance of this contract. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to confirm with the Owner the availability of toilet facilities on the site. The use of such facilities may be revoked in the event of excess janitorial requirements. 10. Contractor shall not perform any fire hazardous operation adjacent to combustible materials. Any fire hazardous operation shall have proper fire extinguisher close by and the adjacent area shall be policed before stopping work for the day. Contractor shall provide not less than one OSHA/NFPA Class 6-ABC fire extinguisher for each 9,000 square feet of Project area or fraction thereof. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 14 11. Contractor shall erect temporary dust separation partitions and floor mats as necessary to confine dust and debris within area of work. Contractor shall post signs, erect and maintain barriers and warning devices for the protection of the general public and Owner personnel. 12. Trenching and Excavation — In accordance with Section 7104 of the California Public Contract Code, the following provisions shall apply to any contract involving digging of trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface: a. The Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the Owner, in writing, of any: i. Material that the contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. ii. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the Project site differing from those indicated by information about the site made available to bidders prior to the deadline for submitting bids. iii. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract. b. The Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work, shall issue a Contract Change Order in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.09 of the General Conditions. C. In the event that a dispute arises between the Owner and the contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, the contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the contract. The contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 15 2.10 SUBCONTRACTORS A. Agreements — Agreements between the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Subcontractors of lower tier shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, but in no case does such approval relieve the Contractor of any conditions imposed by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall only use those subcontractors that are required to be listed and included in his/her sealed bid Subcontractor List, section 004336, unless any proposed substitution is first approved by the Owner pursuant to statute. The Contractor shall not use any subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a Public Works Project pursuant to section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents, subcontractors may be added, deleted or substituted only in accordance with the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 4100 et seq. B. Relation with Subcontractor — By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for enforceability, the Contractor shall bind every Subcontractor and require therein that every Subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents to carry out their provisions insofar as applicable to their work; and the Contractor further agrees to pay to each Subcontractor promptly upon issuance of Certificate of Payment, his/her or their due portion. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer of record under the Contract Documents with respect to the work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Contractor-Subcontractor Agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, under the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with their Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of Contract Documents available to their Sub-subcontractors. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to create an agency relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or material supplier. C. Owner's Relation — Neither the acceptance of the name of Subcontractor nor the suggestion of such name nor any other act of the Owner or Engineer of record nor anything contained in any Contract Document is to be construed as creating any contractual relation between the Owner (or Owner's authorized representatives) and any Subcontractor of any tier nor as creating any contractual relation between the Engineer of record and any Subcontractor of any tier. D. All Subcontractors employed by the Contractor shall be appropriately licensed in conformity with the laws of the State of California. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 16 E. Jurisdictional disputes between Subcontractors or between Contractor and Subcontractor shall not be mediated or decided by the Owner, Engineer of record or the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the resolution of all such disputes based upon his/her contractual relationship with his/her Subcontractors. 2.11 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that the Owner's action results in delay, damage or additional cost attributable thereto, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner- Contractor Agreement. C. The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. D. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract. 2.12 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 17 B. When any part of the Contractor's Work depends upon proper execution or results of the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Resident Engineer any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. C. If, following the reporting of any discrepancy or defect as required herein above, the Contractor suffers damage due to disruption or delay caused by the separate contractor, without fault by the Owner, the Contractor's remedy shall be limited to seeking recovery from the separate contractor. D. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefor. E. Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work or property on the site,the Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage as provided herein. F. Should the Contractor wrongfully delay or cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any delay or damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings, and if any judgment or award against the Owner (or Owner's authorized representatives) arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment or award in full and shall reimburse the Owner for all costs which the Owner has incurred in connection with such matter. 2.13 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises between the Contractor and separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required in the Contract Documents, the Owner may clean up and the contractor responsible shall pay Owner such portions of the cost as the Resident Engineer shall determine to be just. 2.14 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of California. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 18 2.15 INSPECTION A. All material and workmanship (if not otherwise designated by the Contract Documents) shall be subject to inspection, examination, and test by the Owner and Resident Engineer at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction and at any and all places where such manufacture and/or construction are carried on. The Owner and Resident Engineer shall have the right to reject defective material and workmanship or require its correction. B. The Contractor shall furnish promptly without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary for the safe and convenient inspection and tests that may be required by the Owner and Resident Engineer. C. Where the Contract Documents, instructions by the Owner, laws, ordinances, or any public authority having jurisdiction requires work to be inspected, tested or approved before work proceeds, such work shall not proceed, nor shall it be concealed prior to inspection. D. The Contractor shall give the Resident Engineer at least two (2) business days advance notice of the readiness for any Contract compliance inspection by the Inspector. The Contractor shall give notice as required by all other inspecting and testing agencies of jurisdiction for Code and regular compliance inspection. In all cases, the Contractor shall schedule inspections so as not to delay the Work. E. If the Resident Engineer determines that any work requires additional special inspection beyond that identified in the specifications, the Resident Engineer will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided above. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Resident Engineer's additional services, testing or inspections made necessary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Contract Change Order shall be issued. F. Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the Resident Engineer at any time either before acceptance of the entire Work or after acceptance and within the guaranty period to make an examination of work already completed, by removing or tearing out same, the Contractor shall on request promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and material. If such work is found to be defective in any material respect, due to the fault of the Resident Engineer or his/her Subcontractors, he/she shall defray all the expenses of such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the contract, any compensation deemed appropriate shall be handled by issuance of a Contract Change Order to the Contractor and he/she shall, in addition, if completion of the work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time on account of the additional work involved. G. Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and the Contractor shall promptly deliver them to the Resident CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 19 Engineer for review and evaluation of compliance with the appropriate specifications and standards. H. When the work is completed the Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer in writing that the work will be ready for final inspection and test on a definite date which shall be stated in such notice. 2.16 TAXES, PERMITS, FEES, AND INDEMNIFICATION FOR PATENT INFRINGEMENT CLAIM A. The Contractor shall pay for and include all Federal, State and local taxes direct or indirect for the work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time the Notice to Proceed is issued, whether or not yet enacted, and secure and pay all fees and charges for permits and licenses, unless otherwise specified. B. Royalty and license fees incidental to the use of any patented material, device or process shall be paid by the Contractor and in the event of a claim of alleged infringement of patent copyright, or Trade Secret rights, the Contractor shall indemnify, save the Owner (and Owner's authorized representatives) free and harmless, and defend, at the Contractor's own expense, any and all suits that may be brought in such connection. C. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for the building permit, permanent utility connection fees, and right-of- way encroachment permit. The Contractor shall secure and pay for temporary construction utilities, and all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. D. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. E. It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Resident Engineer in writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. F. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to any laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, without notice to the Resident Engineer, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. G. Any reference in the Contract Documents to codes, standard specifications or manufacturer's instructions shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the Contract date. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 20 2.17 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Construction Schedule in CPM (Critical Path Method) form to the Resident Engineer for approval. The Construction Schedule shall be sufficiently detailed to accurately depict all the work required by the Contract. CPM Construction Schedule shall reflect shop drawings; submittals due and return dates, fabrication and delivery times, cost loading, crew mix, and equipment loading data. The Contractor shall thereafter adhere to the Construction Schedule, as updated monthly, or as necessary in accordance with the Contract Documents, including any scope changes or changes in the work approved by the Owner during the course of construction. "Slack" or "float" time on the CPM Construction Schedule is not intended, and shall not be, for the sole benefit of either the Owner or Contractor. B. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall provide a Submittal and Procurement Schedule indicating time periods for review of Shop Drawings, Data, Samples, and procurement of material and equipment required for the Work. Contractor shall allow time for submittal review in accordance with the General Requirements Section — Construction Progress Documentation. All items that require review by the Resident Engineer and/or are not readily available from stock and requiring more than thirty-five (35) days lead-time shall be included in the Submittal and Procurement Schedule. Items listed in the Submittal and Procurement Schedule shall also be identified as activities on the CPM Construction Schedule. Contractor shall identify items requiring coordination with work of separate contractors. The working day to calendar date correlation shall be based upon the Contractor's proposed work week with adequate allowance for legal holidays, days lost due to abnormal weather, and any special requirements of the Project. C. The Construction Schedule shall be prepared and maintained by the Contractor. D. The Owner, Resident Engineer, Contractor and other Contractor(s) shall jointly review the progress of the work weekly. Should this review, in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, indicate that the work is behind the schedule established by currently reviewed Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall either (1) provide a plan to the Resident Engineer indicating the steps the Contractor intends to take in order to recover the time behind schedule and conform to the reviewed Construction Schedule; or (2) submit a revised Construction Schedule for completion of the work, remaining within the contract completion time, to the Resident Engineer for review by the next weekly meeting. If the Contractor's recovery or revised schedule requires work to occur during other than normal working hours, the Contractor will be responsible for any resulting costs incurred by the Owner, including but not limited to, the costs for construction management, contract administration, inspection, testing and staffing. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 21 E. The Contractor shall deliver copies of his/her daily job logs to the Resident Engineer and Owner on a weekly basis or as otherwise agreed to by Owner. At a minimum, the Contractor's daily job log should include the sub-contractors working onsite, number of workers and their trade classification, description of work, visitors, temperature and weather conditions, accidents, delays, and any other important information pertaining to the Project that day. The Contractor will schedule and coordinate the Work of all sub-contractors on the Project. The Contractor will keep the Sub-contractors informed of the Construction Schedule to enable the Contractor to plan and perform the Work properly. 2.18 RECORDS, DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE A. The Contractor shall maintain all records of required Review Agencies, County or State inspections and shall promptly notify the Resident Engineer of the results of any inspection. Copies of all such records shall be provided to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall secure and maintain required certificates of inspection, testing or approval and shall promptly deliver them to the Resident Engineer. C. The Contractor shall maintain at the Project site, on a daily basis, one (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Resident Engineer and the Owner and reviewed weekly, and shall be delivered to the Resident Engineer for forwarding to the Owner upon completion of the Project. The Contractor shall advise the Resident Engineer on a current basis of all changes in the Work made during construction. Payment may be withheld from Contractor for failure to maintain current Record Documents. 2.19 USE OF SITE A. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. B. The Contractor shall coordinate all of the Contractor's operations with, and secure approval from, the Resident Engineer before using any portion of the site. Also see Technical Specifications, Division 01, General Requirements. 2.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 22 B. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. C. The Contractor in all cases shall exercise extreme care in any cutting operations, and perform such operations under adequate supervision by competent mechanics skilled in the applicable trade. Openings shall be neatly cut and shall be kept as small as possible to avoid unnecessary damage. Careless and/or avoidable cutting damage, etc., will not be tolerated, and the Contractor will be held responsible for such avoidable or willful damage. D. All replacing, patching and repairing of all materials and surfaces cut or damaged in the execution of the Work shall be performed by experienced mechanics of the several trades involved. All work of such nature shall be done with the applicable materials, in such a manner that all surfaces so replaced, repaired, or patched, will, upon completion of the Work, match the surrounding similar surfaces. 2.21 CLEANING UP A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by the Contractor's operations. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all the Contractor's waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. B. If the Contractor fails to clean up at the completion of the Work, the Owner may do so, and the cost thereof shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.22 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to and shall indemnify, save, hold harmless and at Owner's request, defend Owner and its officers, agents and employees, and the Engineer of record and Consultants and their respective officers, agents and employees, from any and all costs and expenses, attorney fees and court costs, damages, liabilities, claims and losses occurring or resulting to Owner, the Engineer of record or Consultants in connection with the performance, or failure to perform, by Contractor, its officers, agents or employees under this Agreement, and from any and all costs and expenses, attorney fees and court costs, damages, liabilities, claims and losses occurring or resulting to any person, firm or corporation who may be injured or damaged by the performance, or failure to perform, of Contractor, its officers, agents or employees under this Agreement. In addition, Contractor agrees to indemnify Owner for Federal, State of California and/or local audit exceptions resulting from non-compliance herein on the part of Contractor. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 23 B. In any and all claims against the Owner, the Engineer of record or Consultants, or any of their respective officers, agents or employees, initiated by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation set forth in the immediately preceding paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 2.23 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES CLAUSE Nondiscrimination: In connection with the performance of Work under the contract, the Contractor agrees (as prescribed in Chapter 6 of Division 3 of Title II of the Government Code of the State of California, commencing at Section 12900 and by Labor Code Section 1735) not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status or sex. The aforesaid provisions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees and applicants for employment, Notices to be provided by the County, setting forth the provisions of this discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all subcontracts hereunder, except subcontracts for standard commercial supplies of raw materials. 2.24 PAYMENT A. CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement ("the Agreement"), Section 005213, and, including authorized adjustments thereto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. B. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Resident Engineer may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Resident Engineer, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 24 C. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT The Owner will make progress payments to the Contractor upon completion of portions of the Work, as covered by the Contract Documents, in accordance with established Owner procedures. Before submitting an Application for Payment (Final or Partial) the Contractor shall reach an agreement with the Resident Engineer(in consultation with the Engineer of record) concerning the percentage complete of the Work and the dollar value for which the Application for Payment may be submitted. 1. On or about the twentieth (20th) day of the month in which the work was performed, the Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer an itemized Application for Payment, notarized if required, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or the Resident Engineer may require, including appropriate updates to the Construction Schedule, and reflecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Payment is expressly conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of conditional and unconditional waivers and release of lien rights upon progress payment as the Owner or the Engineer of record may require. Waiver and Release forms must be submitted on forms approved by the Owner. Copies of said forms shall comply with Civil Code Section 8132 through 8138, inclusive. 2. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments may be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site and, if approved in advance by the Owner, payments may similarly be made for materials or equipment suitably stored at some other location agreed upon in writing. Payments for materials or equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including applicable insurance and transportation to the site for those materials and equipment stored off the site. 3. The Contractor warrants that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, stop notices, claims, security interest or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to as "liens"; and that no work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. 4. On or about the twentieth (20t") day of the month following the month in which the work was performed, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor ninety-five percent(95%)of the value of said work in place, as checked and approved by the Resident Engineer. The balance of five percent (5%) of the estimate shall be retained by the Owner until the time of CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 25 final acceptance of said work. In lieu of the five percent(5%)retainage, the Contractor may substitute securities as provided herein below. a. If the Owner does not pay the Contractor within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted payment request for a progress payment, excluding that portion of the final payment designated by the contract as retention earnings, then the Owner shall pay interest to the Contractor as provided by Public Contract Code Section 20104.50. Said interest penalty is the sole recourse of Contractor and Contractor shall have no right to stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received, nor shall the contract completion time be extended, nor shall the Contract Sum be increased in any way, including by reason of any costs incurred by Contractor, except to the extent of said interest payment. b. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7107, in the event of a dispute between the Owner and Contractor, the Owner may withhold from the final payment an amount not to exceed one hundred and fifty percent (150%) of the disputed amount. Except as so provided, the Owner shall release the retention withheld within sixty(60)days after the date of completion of the Work, as "completion" is defined in Public Contract Code Section 7107. In the event that retention payments are not made within the time periods required by Public Contract Code Section 7107, the Owner may be subject to the interest provisions of Public Contract Code Section 7107. 5. Security Substitutions and Escrow for Moneys Withheld to Insure Contractor's Performance. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 22300, the Contractor may deposit in an escrow, equivalent securities for any moneys withheld to ensure performance and have said moneys paid directly to Contractor, or, in the alternative, have the Owner deposit such moneys directly into an escrow. Upon the closing of any such escrow, Contractor shall pay to each Subcontractor, not later than twenty (20) days after receipt of the closing payment, the respective amount of interest earned, net of costs attributed to retention withheld from each Subcontractor, on the amount of retention withheld to insure the performance of the Contractor. Any escrow established pursuant to this article shall be with a state or federally chartered bank, shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor, and shall be established using an escrow agreement in substantially the following form: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 26 (Begin Escrow Agreement) ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the County of Fresno, (hereinafter called "Owner"), (hereinafter called "Contractor"); and a state or federally chartered bank in California, (hereinafter called "Escrow Agent"). For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the Owner, Contractor, and Escrow Agent agree as follows: 1. Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Contractor has the option to deposit securities with Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by Owner pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into between the Owner and Contractor for in the amount of$ and dated (hereinafter referred to as the "Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the Owner within ten (10) days of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution, as valued by the Owner, shall be at least equal to the cumulative total cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the contract between Owner and Contractor. If the Owner determines that the securities are not adequate it will notify Contractor and Escrow Agent, and Contractor shall deposit additional security as further determined by the Owner. Securities shall be held in the name of the Owner and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner. 2. Securities eligible for investment under subdivision (c) of the above-referenced Section 22300 shall include those listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code, and shall also include bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest-bearing demand deposit accounts, and standby letters of credit. Deposit of any other type of security may be permitted only by mutual agreement of the Contractor and the Owner, evidenced by an amendment to this agreement executed by all of the parties hereto. 3. Upon the deposit of adequate securities, Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions. 4. When the Owner, at Contractor's written request, makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until such time as the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the Owner pays the Escrow Agent directly. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 27 5. Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by Escrow Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the Owner. The Owner, Contractor and Escrow Agent shall determine these expenses and payment terms. 6. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the Owner. 7. Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from Owner to the Escrow Agent that Owner consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor. 8. The Owner shall have the right to draw upon the securities or any amount paid directly to Escrow Agent in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven (7)days written notice to the Escrow Agent from the Owner of the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash, including any amounts paid directly to Escrow Agent, as instructed by the Owner. Escrow Agent shall not be concerned with the validity of any notice of default given by Owner pursuant to this paragraph, and shall promptly comply with Owner's instructions to pay over said escrowed assets. Escrow Agent further agrees not to interplead the escrowed assets in response to conflicting demands and hereby waives any present or future right of interpleader. 9. Upon receipt of written notification from the Owner certifying that the Contract is final and complete, and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payment of fees and charges. 10. Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the Owner and Contractor pursuant to Sections (6), (7), (8) and (9) of this Agreement and the Owner and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above. 11. The venue of any litigation concerning the rights and obligations of the parties to this agreement shall be the County of Fresno and the parties hereto waive the removal provisions of Code of Civil Procedure Section 394. 12. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on behalf of the Owner and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 28 On Behalf of Owner: On behalf of Contractor: Title — Business Manager Title Name — Lemuel Asprec Name Signature Signature Address: 2220 Tulare St, 6th Floor Address: Fresno, CA 93721 On behalf of Escrow Agent: Title Name Signature Address At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the Owner and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above. Owner: Contractor: Title — Steve White, Director Title Department of Public Works Name and Planning Signature Signature Address —2220 Tulare St, 6th Floor Address Fresno, CA 93721 Escrow Agent: Title Name Signature Address (End Escrow Agreement) CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 29 6. Itemized Breakdown: The Contractor shall submit a financial breakdown of the work, itemized by crafts or sections as designated by the Owner. The Contractor's payment shall be based upon the monthly percentage of completion of these items. 7. Lien Waivers: The Owner may require the Contractor to submit, along with the progress payment request, notarized lien waivers from each Subcontractor, materials or equipment supplier. Lien waivers shall comply with Civil Code Section 8132, et seq., and the aggregate sum thereof shall reflect all progress payments previously made. D. CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 1. The Resident Engineer shall, within seven (7) days after the receipt of the Project Application for Payment, review the Project Application for Payment and either issue a Project Certificate for Payment to the Owner for such amounts as the Resident Engineer determines are properly due, or notify the Contractor in writing of the reasons for withholding a Certificate provided in Part F of this Section 2.24. 2. The issuance of a Project Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Resident Engineer to the Owner that, based on the Resident Engineer's observations at the site as provided herein and the data comprising the Project Application for Payment, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Resident Engineer's knowledge, information and belief, the quality and timeliness of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Completion of the Work, to the results of any subsequent tests required by or performed under the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in the Certificate); and that based upon all currently available information, the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, by issuing a Project Certificate for Payment, the Resident Engineer shall not thereby be deemed to represent that the Resident Engineer has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. E. PROGRESS PAYMENTS 1. After the Resident Engineer has issued a Project Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 30 2. The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, the amount to which Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments to the Contract on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 3. The Resident Engineer may on request of any Subcontractor, at the Resident Engineer's discretion, furnish to that Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by the Contractor and the action taken thereon by the Resident Engineer on account of Work done by such Subcontractor. 4. Neither the Owner nor the Resident Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any Subcontractor or Material Suppliers except as may otherwise be required by law. 5. Neither certification of a progress payment, delivery of a progress payment, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. F. PAYMENTS WITHHELD 1. The Resident Engineer may decline to certify payment and may withhold the Certificate in whole or in part to the extent necessary to reasonably protect the Owner, if, in the Resident Engineer's opinion, the Resident Engineer is unable to make representations to the Owner as provided herein above for Certificates for Payment. If the Resident Engineer is unable to make representations to the Owner and certify payment in the amount of the Project Application, the Resident Engineer will notify the Contractor as provided herein. If the Contractor and the Resident Engineer cannot agree on a revised amount, the Resident Engineer will promptly issue a Project Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Resident Engineer is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Resident Engineer may also decline to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, the Resident Engineer may nullify the whole or any part of any Project Certificate for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary, in the Resident Engineer's opinion, to protect the Owner from loss because of: a. Defective Work not remedied; b. Third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, including claims by separate contractors; C. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment; CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 31 d. Engineer of record's determination, based upon reasonable evidence, that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; e. Damage to the Owner or another contractor; f. Engineer of record's determination, based upon reasonable evidence, that the Work will not be accomplished in compliance with the Work Order Completion Time; g. Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; h. Failure of the Contractor to submit Construction Schedules or Submittal and Procurement Schedules as required; i. Failure of the Contractor to maintain record drawings on a current basis; j. Failure of the Contractor to submit notarized lien waivers from each Subcontractor, materials or equipment supplier; k. Failure of the Contractor to submit certified payroll reports; I. Stop notice served upon the Owner. 2. A retention in the amount of one-thousand dollars ($1,000) will be withheld from the Contractor's monthly progress payment for each and every required document not submitted in a timely manner by the Contractor or its subcontractors up to a maximum of ten-thousand dollars ($10,000). For purposes of this Paragraph, the term "required document" includes, but is not limited to, certified payrolls, labor compliance documents, Disadvantaged Business Enterprise documents, and any other information or documents required to be submitted by the Contractor or any of its subcontractors under the terms of this Agreement or pursuant to applicable federal, state or local laws or regulations. The retention provided for in this Paragraph shall be in addition to any other deduction or retention allowed under this Agreement, and shall be in addition to any other remedy or consequence provided by law for untimely submission of any required document. Such retention shall remain in effect only until such time as the required documents have been submitted by the Contractor or its subcontractor(s) and have been determined by the Owner to be both complete and acceptable as to form. 3. When the grounds as noted above are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld on the basis thereof. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 32 G. COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 1. Following the Contractor's completion of the Work, the Contractor shall forward to the Resident Engineer a written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, and shall also forward to the Resident Engineer a final Application for Payment. Upon receipt, the Resident Engineer will promptly make such inspection. When the Resident Engineer finds the Work acceptable under the Contract documents and the Contract fully performed, the Resident Engineer will issue a Project Certificate for Payment which will certify the final payment due the Contractor. This certification will constitute a representation that, to the best of the Resident Engineer's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said Certificate, is due and payable. The Resident Engineer's certification of said Project Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set forth herein below have been fulfilled. 2. Neither the final payment nor the remaining retainage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Resident Engineer (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, and (3) other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any such lien. The bond cannot be from the original surety insurer for the Project or any affiliate of the original surety. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien. 3. All provisions of this Agreement, including without limitation those establishing obligations and procedures, shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding the making or acceptance of final payment, and the making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of any claims by the Owner. 4. Upon completion and acceptance of all work whatsoever required, and upon the release of all claims against the Owner as specified, the Owner shall file a written Notice of Completion with the County Recorder as to the entire amount of work performed. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 33 5. Final payment will be released within sixty (60) days after the date of acceptance of the Work as reflected in the Notice of Completion filed with the County Recorder's Office; provided, that Owner may withhold from the final payment, in the event of a dispute between Owner and Contractor, retentions in and amount not exceeding 150 percent of the disputed amount. At the Contractor's option, the Owner may release retention upon receipt of an unconditional lien release for the full value of the Work and any of its Contract Change Orders. 6. All manufacturers'warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of the Notice of Completion for the Work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, through appropriate contractual arrangements with all subcontractors, materialmen and suppliers, to ensure compliance with this requirement. 7. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment, after the date of Notice of Completion of the Project, shall be and shall operate as a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to the Contractor, under the Contract Documents or otherwise, for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work, excepting only the Contractor's claims for interest upon final payment, if such final payment be improperly delayed. No payments, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to release the Contractor or his/her sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Performance and Payment Bonds. 2.25 CHANGES TO THE WORK A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletion or other revisions. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by a Contract Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. B. CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER: A Change Order issued to add or delete Work from the Contract. Only an executed Contract Change Order will effectuate change in either the Contract Sum and/or the contract time. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor dually signed to show both the approval of the Engineer of record and Authorization of the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the contract time, and the full and final settlement of all costs (direct, indirect and overhead) related to the Work authorized by the Change Order. C. All claims for additional compensation to the Contractor shall be presented in writing before the expense is incurred and will be adjusted as provided herein. No work shall be allowed to lag pending such adjustment, but shall be promptly executed as directed, even if a disputed claim arises. No claim will be considered after the work in question has been done unless a Contract Change Order has been issued or a timely written notice of claim has been made by Contractor. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 34 D. Costs mean an itemized breakdown of all labor (by crafts), materials, sales taxes, equipment rentals, etc., for each portion of the Work which comprises the Change Order including any Subcontractor's itemized breakdown, plus not more than twenty (20) percent to cover all profits and administration. 1. Under no circumstance will the total sum of allowable mark up for General Conditions, General Requirements, supervision, overhead (excluding small tools) and profit, exceed a cumulative total of twenty percent (20%), including markups for all parties involved in a change. i. Work done by Contractor's own forces, not including bond and insurance premiums, fifteen percent (15%) ii. Work done by subcontractors, all tiers, including bond and insurance premiums, if any, shall not exceed a cumulative total of fifteen percent (15%) iii. General Conditions, General Requirements, Supervision, Overhead and Profit for Contractor on Subcontractor's work, five percent (5%). 2. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: i. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; ii. By unit prices state in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; iii. By cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or iv. By the method provided under Article 2.26. E. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner, as confirmed by the Resident Engineer, for any deletion or change that results in a decrease in the Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual cost. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 35 2.26 CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT (EXTRA WORK AT FORCE ACCOUNT) A. If none of the methods set forth in Section 2.25.D, is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided that a written order signed by the Owner is received, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the Resident Engineer, on the basis of reasonable expenditures or savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase in the Contract Sum, not more than twenty percent (20%)for all overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Section 2.25.D, Paragraph 3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner or the Resident Engineer may prescribe, an itemized accounting of actual cost together with appropriate supporting data for inclusion in a Contract Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: 1. Labor Cost is the cost of labor for the workers (including working foremen) used in the actual and direct performance of the extra work, whether employed by the Contractor, or Subcontractors and Specialized Forces of any tier. Labor Cost shall include: a. Actual Wages paid to the works, plus employer payments to or on behalf of the workers for health and welfare, pension, vacation, and training. If required by the Resident Engineer, certified payrolls shall be submitted with extra work reports as verification of wages paid to the workers. b. A Labor Surcharge of 20 percent (35 percent for demolition work and roofing work) will be added to the Actual Wages as defined above. The Labor Surcharge shall constitute full compensation for all payments imposed by State and Federal laws, including Workers Compensation Insurance, Social Security, and Unemployment Insurance. C. Subsistence and Travel Allowance if actually paid to the workers. Labor Surcharge will not be added to Subsistence and Travel Allowance. 2. Equipment Cost is the payment made for the equipment actually used in the performance of the extra work. a. Equipment valued at three hundred dollars ($300) or less shall be considered as small tools, and no payment will be made therefor. b. Equipment costs will be paid in accordance with the rental rates listed in the "Cal-Trans Equipment Rental Rates, County of Fresno, Department of Public Works and Planning," in effect at the time of bid, available from the Department, Suite 711, Fresno County Plaza Building, 2220 Tulare Street, Fresno, CA 93721. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 36 C. In the event that any of the equipment to be used is not listed in the above publication, the rental rate shall be agreed upon in writing by the Contractor and CM before the extra work is begun. 3. Materials Cost is the payment made for materials incorporated into the Work. a. Materials Cost shall include sales tax, freight, and delivery charges, less any available discounts whether or not said discounts are taken. b. Materials Cost shall be based upon supplier's or manufacturer's invoice. If invoices or other satisfactory evidence of cost are not furnished within sixty (60) days of delivery or within fifteen (15) days after acceptance of the Contract, whichever occurs first, then the Resident Engineer shall determine the Materials Cost, in his/her sole discretion, on the basis of available information and on his/her considered experience. 4. Specialized Services are those services or items of extra work that, by agreement of the Contractor and the Resident Engineer, cannot be performed by forces of the Contractor of his/her Subcontractors, and may be performed by a specialist. a. Specialized Services may be paid for by invoice if the established practice of the specialized force industry does not provide complete itemization of Labor, Equipment and Materials Costs. 5. Markup for Profit, Home Office and Field Office Overhead, Bond Premium, insurance, taxes, and supervision will be added to the total of Labor Cost, Equipment Cost, Materials Cost, and Specialized Services. a. Markup will be added only once on any Extra Work at Force Account, regardless of the number of contractors and subcontractors involved. b. It is recognized that individual contractors and subcontractors have different overhead costs, profit requirements and bond premium rates. The amount to be added to Extra Work for markup shall include compensation for profit, overhead and bond premium without distinguishing among these items. C. The markup to be added for Extra Work at Force Account on this Project shall be fifteen percent (15%) plus 1-1/2% for Performance and Payment Bonds for Contractor only. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 37 6. Records shall be maintained by the Contractor and Subcontractors in such a manner as to provide a clear distinction between the costs of Extra Work paid for on a forced account basis and the costs of other operations. From these records, the Contractor shall furnish the Resident Engineer a completed extra work report for each day's extra work to be paid for on a force account basis. Extra work reports shall itemize the materials used, equipment rental charges, and specialized services costs, and shall provide names or identifications and classifications of workmen, the hourly rate of pay, and hours worked. Extra work reports shall be compiled and submitted to the Resident Engineer daily for verification and signature. Extra work reports shall be signed by the Contractor or his/her authorized representative. 7. If the Contractor disputes the Engineer of record's cost determination, the Contractor may initiate a claim in compliance with the Claims and Disputes Resolution provisions of these General Conditions. 2.27 SITE CONDITIONS A. Where investigations have been conducted by the Owner of existing conditions on a site, including subsurface conditions, such investigations are made for the purpose of design only and for the information of bidders. The results of such investigations represent only the statement by the Owner as to the circumstance and character of materials actually encountered by the Owner during the investigations. The Owner makes no guarantee or warranty, express or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of conditions existing throughout the site of a Project or any part of it, or that unanticipated conditions might not occur. B. All excavation work shall be performed on an "unclassified basis"; that is, such work shall include the removal of all material encountered including earth or rock formations, regardless of the type or hardness thereof, or groundwater conditions in the excavation, the cost of such excavations being included in the Contract Sum. Unclassified excavation Work includes drilling or blasting operations. C. If site conditions are discovered that materially differ from previous information that the Contractor has received, and that could not have been discovered by the Contractor through prudent and reasonable investigation prior to developing the Contract Sum for the Work, the Contractor shall be compensated for additional costs incurred in working with the unknown site conditions, but only to the extent that such previously unknown and undiscoverable site conditions cause the Contractor to incur costs in addition to the Contract Sum for that portion of the Work. The Contractor must be able to demonstrate clearly the original Contract Sum for that portion of the Work (plus any Contract Change Orders applicable to that portion of the Work) and the additional costs incurred as a direct result of the unknown site conditions. Only additional costs over and above the amount of the Contract Sum for that portion of the Work will be compensated upon a recommendation of approval by the Resident Engineer. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 38 2.28 REQUEST FOR EQUITABLE ADJUSTMENT A. If the Contractor considers a Request for Equitable Adjustment is justified for any increase in the contract time, the Contractor shall promptly, upon first observance of the condition giving rise to the request, provide the Resident Engineer and Owner written notice of such condition and circumstance. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in emergency endangering life or property, in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the Emergency provisions of these General Conditions. No such request shall be valid unless so made. A Contract Change Order shall be required to authorize any change in the contract time resulting from such request for equitable adjustment. B. If the Contractor requests that additional cost or time is involved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written interpretation pursuant to Section 2.07.G, (2) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section 2.08 where the Contractor was not at fault, or any such order by the Resident Engineer as the Owner's agent, (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Section 2.29, the Contractor shall make such request for equitable adjustment as provided in Section 2.28.A. 2.29 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Resident Engineer will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the contract time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be enacted by written order issued through the Resident Engineer, and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. 2.30 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS The Owner and the Contractor, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 39 2.31 ASSIGNMENT OF MONEYS The Contractor shall not assign moneys due or to become due him/her under the contract without the written consent of the Auditor-Controller of Fresno County. Any assignment of moneys shall be subject to all proper set-offs in favor of the County of Fresno and to all deductions provided for in the contract and particularly all money withheld, whether assigned or not, shall be subject to being used by the County of Fresno for the completion of the work in the event that the Contractor should be in default therein. 2.32 GUARANTEE OF WORK A. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that all materials and equipment and the Work as a whole furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents, for a period of 365 Calendar Days from the date of acceptance of the Work as specified in the Notice of Completion, unless a longer period is otherwise specified. All manufacturer's warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of the filing of the Notice of Completion for the Work (which date necessarily will follow the performance under separate contracts). It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, through appropriate contractual arrangements with all subcontractors, material men and suppliers, to ensure compliance with this requirement. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly reviewed and authorized, may be considered defective. If required by the Resident Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. B. If repairs or changes are required in connection with guaranteed work within any guaranteed period, which, in the opinion of the Resident Engineer is rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, and without expense to the Owner(1) place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed work, correct all defects therein, and (2) make good all damage to the building or site, or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the Contract Documents; and (3) make good any work or materials, or the equipment and contents of said building or site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. C. If the Contractor disturbs any work guaranteed under another contract in fulfilling the requirements of the contract or of any guarantee, embraced in or required thereby, he/she shall restore such disturbed work to a condition satisfactory to the Resident Engineer and guarantee such restored work to the same extent as it was guaranteed under such other contract. D. The Owner may have the defects corrected if the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee and the Contractor and his/her surety shall be liable for all costs and expenses incurred in connection therewith. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -40 E. All special guarantees applicable to definite parts of the work that may be stipulated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Article 2.32 during the first (1st) year (365 Calendar Days) of the life of such special guarantee. 2.33 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE A. Neither the Owner, the Engineer of record, nor any officer or employee of the County, or officer or employee thereof, within the limits of which the work is being performed, shall be answerable or accountable in any manner, for any loss or damage that may happen to the work or any part thereof; or for any of the materials or other things used or employed in performing the work; or for injury to any person or persons, either workmen or the public, for damage to property from any cause which might have been prevented by the Contractor, or his/her workmen, or anyone employed by him/her, against all of which injuries or damages to persons and property the Contractor having control over such work must properly guard. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any liability imposed by law for any damage to any person or property resulting from defects or obstructions or from any cause whatsoever during the progress of the work or at any time before the issuance of the Notice of Completion. C. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Resident Engineer, the Engineer of record, and all of their respective officers and employees, from all claims, lawsuits or actions of every kind and nature whatsoever, brought for, or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons, resulting from any act or admission by the Contractor or his/her servants or agents, in the construction of the work or by or in consequence of any negligence in guarding the same, in improper materials used in its construction, or by or on account of any act or omission of the Contractor or his/her agents in the performance of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. In addition to any remedy authorized by law, so much of the money due the Contractor under and by virtue of the contract as shall be considered necessary by the Owner may be retained by the Owner until disposition has been made of such claims, lawsuits or actions for damages as aforesaid. 2.34 WRITTEN NOTICE Subject to any additional requirements that may be applicable to claims under the immediately following Article 2.35 RESOLUTION OF CONTRACT CLAIMS AND DISPUTES, formal service, when required, of written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, to the individual or member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if sent by registered or certified mail to the listed address of that entity for the attention of such individual. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -41 2.35 RESOLUTION OF CONTRACT CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. A Claim is a demand or assertion sent by registered mail or certified mail with return receipt requested by one (1) of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time, or a request for equitable adjustment or Contract Change Order which cannot be resolved per provisions of Section 2.25 - CHANGES TO THE WORK. Any Claim shall be reduced to writing and filed with the Resident Engineer, within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor has notice of the condition giving rise to the Claim, and final action per Section 2.25-CHANGES TO THE WORK procedures has taken place or has been declared as such in writing, by either party. Such ten (10)-day notice of an asserted claim is in addition to the requirement for prompt notice required per Section 2.25 - CHANGES TO THE WORK. B. The Contractor shall not claim or recover any overhead cost administrative or otherwise, particularly 'Home Office' expenses, 'Extended site overhead', or any other overhead cost on the basis of any 'Home Office' damages formula, 'Eichleay' formula, 'Total Cost' recovery formula or any other such formula. C. REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING A CLAIM. Claims shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer. Claims must be filed within the time specified above, but in no event shall any claim be considered by the Resident Engineer that is filed later than the date of final payment of the Project. The claim shall be in writing and shall be a sum certain if known. If unknown, Contractor shall specify the basis for establishing the sum certain. Claim shall include a statement of the reasons for the asserted entitlement, and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Such documents may include but are not limited to payroll records, purchase orders, quotations, invoices, estimates, subcontracts, daily logs, supplier contracts, subcontract billings, bid takeoffs, equipment rental invoices, ledgers,journals, daily reports,job diaries, and any documentation related to the requirements of Section 2.25 - CHANGES TO THE WORK. In the case of a continuing delay, only one (1)claim is necessary. If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, such claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities on the construction schedule. The Contractor shall certify, at the time of submission of a claim, as follows: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -42 being the (MUST BE AN OFFICER) of (GENERAL CONTRACTOR), declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California, and do personally certify and attest that: I have thoroughly reviewed the attached claim for additional compensation and/or extension of time, and know its contents, and said claim is made in good faith; he supporting data is truthful and accurate; the amount requested accurately reflects the contract adjustment for which the Contractor believes the Owner is liable; and, further, that I am familiar with California Penal Code Section 72 and California Government Code Section 12560, et seq, pertaining to false claims, and further know and understand that submission or certification of a false claim may lead to fines, imprisonment and/or other severe legal consequences. By: (Contractor's signature) (Date) D. Nothing in this Article is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by this contract or by applicable law for the filing of claims. Any formal claim shall be processed in accordance with the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 9204 and Section 20104 et. seq., each of which establishes a process for resolution of claims, the provisions of which are consistent with and effectively summarized by the following 1. The Owner (or his/her designee), shall review the facts pertinent to the claim, obtain additional information deemed necessary for a decision (if any), review recommendations of the Resident Engineer, coordinate with the contract administrator(if any)and secure assistance from legal and other advisors, and render a written decision on the claim within forty-five (45) days of receipt of the claim. If additional information or documentation is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the Owner (or his/her designee) and claimant. The Owner's (or his/her designee's) written response to the claim, as supplemented by any additional information and/or documentation provided by claimant, shall be submitted to the claimant within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the further information and/or documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater. a. For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the Owner (or his/her designee), shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the Owner (or his/her designees) may have against the claimant. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -43 2. If the claimant disputes the written response of Owner (or his/her designee), or Owner fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the Owner(or his/her designee), in writing, either within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Owner (or his/her designee's) response or within fifteen (15)days of the Owner(or his/her designee's) failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the Owner (or his/her designee) shall schedule a meet and confer conference within thirty (30) days for settlement of the dispute. 3. Within ten (10) business days following conclusion of the meet and confer conference, any unpaid portion of the claim remaining in dispute shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, as that term is defined by Public Contract Code Section 9204(d)(2)(C). 4. If following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference and mediation process, the claim or any portion thereof remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim pursuant to Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his/her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time the claim is denied, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer conference and mediation process as described in the immediately preceding Paragraphs 2 and 3 of this Section D. 5. In the event of any perceived conflict between the summary of the procedure set forth in this Article and the actual provisions of the Public Contract Code Section 9204 and Section 20104, et seq., the statutory provisions shall control; and in the event of any perceived conflict between the provisions of Section 9204 and Section 20104, et seq., the provisions of Section 9204 shall control. E. Procedures for Civil Actions to Resolve Disputed Claims: Non-binding Mediation: Within sixty(60) days, but no earlier than thirty (30)days, following the filing of a responsive pleading, the court shall submit the matter to non-binding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation by both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within fifteen (15) days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within thirty (30) days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within fifteen (15)days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause shown to the court. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. Judicial Arbitration: If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141.11 of the code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -44 subsection consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. Arbitrators shall be experienced in construction law. Appeals: As provided by statute (specifically Public Contract Code section 20104.4(b)(3) and Code of Civil Procedure section 1141.21), any party appealing an arbitration award who does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees, also pay the attorneys' fees on appeal of the other party. F. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES EXEMPT FROM FILING REQUIREMENTS. The requirements and procedures imposed by this Article do not apply to: 1. Any claims by the Owner; or 2. Any claim for or respecting personal injury or death or reimbursement or other compensation arising out of or resulting from liability for personal injury or death; or 3. Any claim or dispute relating to stop payment requests or stop notices; or 4. Any claim or dispute related to the approval, refusal to approve, or substitution of Subcontractors, regardless of tier, and suppliers. G. PAYMENT OF UNDISPUTED PORTION OF CLAIM. Owner shall pay claimant such portion of a claim that is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract. H. CONTINUE WORK DURING DISPUTE. In the event of any disputed claim or other dispute between the Owner and the Contractor, the Contractor will not stop work but will prosecute the work diligently to completion in his/her manner directed by the Owner, and the dispute shall be resolved by a court of law after completion of the Work. However, Contractor must submit all disputes in accordance with the provisions of this Section 2.35. I. SUIT IN FRESNO COUNTY ONLY. Any litigation arising out of this Contract shall be brought in Fresno County and Contractor hereby waives the removal provisions of California Code of Civil Procedure Section 394. 2.36 PERFORMANCE BOND, LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND AND WARRANTY BOND A. The Contractor shall furnish Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, and Payment Bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum and One Year Warranty Bond in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Final Contract Sum, which is the cumulative amount that will have been paid to Contractor for all of the Work performed under the Contract once the Project has been completed and the Work has been accepted by the County.] CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -45 B. All bonds required, whether Bid bonds, Performance, Payment, Warranty or other bonds, shall be issued by an admitted surety insurer authorized by the California Insurance Commissioner to transact surety insurance in the state. The same admitted surety insurer must issue the Bid Bond, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and Warranty Bond. The payment, performance and warranty bonds required by these specifications will neither be accepted nor approved by the Owner unless the bonds are underwritten by an admitted surety and the requirements of California Code of Civil Procedure section 995.630 are met. The bonds must include a physical mailing address, phone number, FAX number, and contract person for the admitted surety insurer. The Owner further reserves the right to satisfy itself as to the acceptability of the surety and the form of bond. Upon request of the Owner, the bidder must submit the following documents: 1. The original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, bylaws, or other instrument authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 2. A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the California Insurance Commissioner. 3. A certificate from the county clerk that the certificate of authority has not been surrendered, revoked, canceled, annulled, or suspended, or in the event that it has, that renewed authority has been granted. 4. A financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the insurer to the end of the quarter calendar year prior to thirty (30) days next preceding the date of the execution of the bond, in the form of an officers' certificate as defined in Corporations Code section 173. 2.37 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES A. The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available hereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. B. No action or failure to act by the Owner, or by the Resident Engineer or Engineer of record, regarding any deficiency, breach or default in performance by the Contractor under the Contract Documents, shall be deemed or construed to constitute acquiescence of the Owner in connection therewith or with regard to any subsequent deficiency, breach or default in performance by the Contractor; nor shall any such prior act of failure to act by or on behalf of Owner be deemed or construed as a waiver of any rights in favor of Owner regarding any such deficiency, breach or default in performance by the Contractor, regardless of the similarity to the prior incident or circumstance when no action was taken regarding any alleged deficiency, breach or default in performance by the Contractor. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -46 2.38 TIME, DELAYS AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. DEFINITIONS 1. Unless otherwise provided, the contract time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work, including authorized adjustments thereto. 2. The Date of Commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. 3. The Date of Completion of the Work is the date on which the work is certified as complete by the Resident Engineer as specified in the Notice of Completion. 4. The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless specifically designated otherwise. B. PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 1. Time is of the essence regarding all time limits stated in the Contract Documents. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the contract time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 2. The Contractor shall begin the Work on the Date of Commencement. The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required herein to be furnished by the Contractor. The Date of Commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. 3. The Contractor shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Completion of the Work within the contract time. C. DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 1. Delays in prosecution of parts or classes of the Work that are not demonstrated to prevent or delay completion of the entire Project or specific milestones within the contract time are not "unavoidable delays" for purposes of this section. 2. In all cases, the time authorized for extension of the contract time shall be no greater than the number of days directly attributable to the event or circumstances which causes unavoidable delay in the completion of the Project. Contractor shall be entitled, in the case of unavoidable delays, to an extension in the contract time, but not to any increase to the Contract Sum. "Unavoidable delay"for this purpose shall be defined as follows: CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -47 a. Unavailable Materials. That materials or articles called for in the Contract Documents are not obtainable within the time required for timely completion; provided that such materials or articles were listed by the Contractor in the schedule required by Section 2.17 - CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE; that the Contractor demonstrates that the unavailability of the materials is in fact the cause for the delay, and could not have been avoided by an appropriate adjustment in the Construction Schedule; and that the unavailability of such materials is due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. If good cause for delay is demonstrated pursuant to this subsection, the Owner, at its sole discretion, may grant a time extension. b. Force Maleure. That delays in construction have resulted from circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor and which the Contractor could not have provided against by the exercise of reasonable care, prudence, foresight, and diligence. Unavoidable delays within the meaning of this subparagraph shall be those caused by acts of God, war, insurrection, civil disorder, fire, floods, epidemic, or strikes. C. Unseasonable Weather. An extension of contract time may be granted due to weather which is unsuitable for the Work currently in progress, upon the determination of the Owner that the weather conditions in fact caused the delay in completion of the Project and that such weather conditions were not, and could not in the exercise of reasonable diligence, have been foreseen by the Contractor. Seasonable weather that, in the exercise of reasonable foresight and diligence, should be expected in the area at the time of year in question is not cause for an extension of time. d. Time Extensions Due to Contract Change Orders or Work Authorizations. A time extension may be granted due to additional work that results in a delay in the Project caused by the approval by the Owner of a Contract Change Order or Work Authorization. The Contractor shall be entitled to a contract time extension Change Order only when the extra Work is demonstrated by the Contractor to have caused a delay in the Project. e. Owner Caused Delays. In the event that the Project is delayed by acts of the Owner not authorized by the Contract Documents which the Contractor demonstrates will or have caused an unavoidable delay, the Contractor shall be entitled to a contract time Change Order to offset the extra time incurred by the Contractor. The Contractor will not be entitled to adjustments in the Contract Sum. Extra time shall be limited to that which is directly identified as critical by the delay. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -48 4. The Contractor specifically agrees that a time extension as provided herein is its sole remedy for Owner-caused delays, and agrees to make no claim or demand for additional damages, nor claim an acceleration of the time for performance. 5. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any contract time extension nor Contract Sum adjustment for alleged Owner delays if the Owner has acted within the time limits specified by the Contract Documents. D. NOTICE OF DELAYS 1. Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer promptly whenever the Contractor foresees any event or circumstance that may delay the prosecution of the Work and in Contractor's opinion may provide grounds for an extension, and shall in any event notify the Resident Engineer immediately upon the occurrence of any such delay. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to prevent, if possible, the occurrence or continuance of the delay. If this cannot be done, the Resident Engineer shall determine how long the delay shall continue and to what extent the prosecution and completion of the Work are being delayed thereby. Such notification shall specify with detail the cause asserted by the Contractor to constitute grounds for an extension. Failure of the Contractor to submit such a notice within ten (10)days after the initial occurrence of the event-giving rise to the delay shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any request for a time extension, and no extension shall be granted as a consequence of such delay. 2. If the Contractor believes that the delay in prosecution in the Work will result in an unavoidable delay in completion of the entire Project, the Contractor shall submit evidence to support that belief, together with its request for a time extension. Such evidence shall include a demonstration that the delayed portion of the Work will affect the Critical Path Scheduling of the entire Project. The Contractor shall also submit a proposed revised Construction Schedule, which accounts for the delay in completion of the entire Project caused by the delay in prosecution of part of the Project, and includes a revised Critical Path demonstrating how the Project will be completed within the proposed revised contract time. E. INVESTIGATION; PROCEDURE. 1. Upon receipt of a request for Time extension, the Resident Engineer shall conduct an investigation of the facts asserted by the Contractor to constitute grounds for an extension. The results of this investigation shall be reported by the Resident Engineer to the Contractor and shall indicate whether he/she will recommend for or against such extension to the Owner. The performance of this investigation by the Resident Engineer shall not be construed as direction or recommendation to the Contractor regarding scheduling of the work. Scheduling this work is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 -49 2. The Resident Engineer may, in his/her sole discretion, defer this recommendation to allow the accumulation of time extensions due to Work Authorizations into a periodic or final Contract Change Order request. 3. Upon receiving the Resident Engineer's recommendation to the Owner regarding the Contractor's request for a time extension, the Contractor may either withdraw its application for extension or request that it be scheduled for action by the Owner. If the Owner disallows the request, there shall be no allowance made for the time during which the request was pending, and the Contractor shall remain obligated to complete the Work in the time specified. 4. If the Owner approves the time extension Contract Change Order, the new Construction Schedule submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner shall be deemed to amend the original Construction Schedule approved by the Owner; thereafter, the amended Construction Schedule shall have the same force and effect as the originally approved Progress Schedule. 5. The revised Construction Schedule must be submitted within seven (7) calendar days of the date on which the Owner approves the change. 6. The Contractor agrees that the Owner's determination as to the existence of grounds for an extension and, the duration of any such extension, shall be final and binding upon both Owner and Contractor. F. DISCRETIONARY TIME EXTENSION FOR BEST INTEREST OF OWNER 1. The Owner reserves the right to extend the contract time for completion of the Work if the Director of Public Works and Planning or designee determines that such extension is in the best interest of the Owner. 2. In the event that such discretionary extension is made at the request of the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to charge to the Contractor all or any part, as the Board may deem proper, of the actual cost to the Owner for engineering, inspection, supervision, contract administration, incidental and other overhead expenses that accrue during the period of such extension, and to deduct all or any portion of such amounts from the final payment for the Work. 3. In the event such extension is ordered over the objection of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to a Contract Change Order adjusting the price paid to reflect the actual costs incurred by the Contractor as a direct and proximate result of the delay, upon his/her written application therefor, accompanied by such verification of costs as the Resident Engineer requires. Only additional direct costs incurred at the site will be reimbursable by Contract Change Order. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 50 G. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 1. If the Work is not completed by Contractor in the time specified in the Work Order or within any period of extension authorized pursuant to this Article, the Contractor acknowledges and admits that the Owner will suffer damage, and that it is impracticable and infeasible to fix the amount of actual damages. Therefore, it is agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner that the Contractor shall pay to the Owner as fixed and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum specified in Section 005213, Agreement, Article III for each calendar day of delay until the Work is completed and accepted, and that both the Contractor and the Contractor's surety shall be liable for the total amount thereof, and that the Owner may deduct said sums from any monies due or that may become due to the Contractor. 2. This liquidated damages provision shall apply to all delays of any nature whatsoever, save and except only unavoidable delays approved by the Owner pursuant to the provisions of Article 2.38.C.2 hereinabove, or discretionary time extensions approved by the Board of Supervisors pursuant to the provisions of Article 2.38.F hereinabove. H. EXTENSION OF TIME NOT A WAIVER. 1. Any extension of contract time granted pursuant to this Article shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner, nor a release of the Contractor, from his/her obligations to perform the Work within the allotted contract time. 2. Granting of a time extension due to one (1) circumstance on one (1) request therefore shall not constitute a granting by the Owner of an extension of time for any other circumstance or the same circumstance occurring at some other time, and shall not be interpreted as a precedent for any other request for extension. 2.39 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 51 B. SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. All employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; 2. All the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage or off the site, and that is under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; 3. Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and 4. The work of the Owner or other separate contractors. C. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. D. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and the progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent facilities. E. When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. F. The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to above caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or any one for whose acts any of them may be liable, and for which the Contractor is responsible under the above noted clauses, except damage or loss attributable solely to the acts or omissions of the Owner, the Resident Engineer, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable in any degree to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under the Indemnification provisions provided herein. G. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Resident Engineer. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 52 H. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded in a manner that could endanger its safety or pose a risk to anyone working at the Project site. I. EMERGENCIES In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in the provisions herein for Changes in the Work. 2.40 INSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 1. Bidders' attention is directed to the insurance requirements below. It is highly recommended that Bidders confer with their respective insurance carriers or brokers to determine in advance of bid submission the availability of the insurance certificates and endorsements required below. A bidder who is awarded a contract and thereafter fails to comply strictly with the insurance requirements, will be deemed to be in default of its obligations. 2. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract, and for 3 years thereafter, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees, or subcontractors. The cost of such insurance shall be included in the Contractor's bid. 3. No later than ten (10) calendar days following the Award of the Contract, and prior to execution of the Agreement for Construction by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit certificates of insurance, signed by an authorized agent of the insurer, attesting to insurance coverage of the Contractor as required by this Article. B. MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE Coverage shall be at least as broad as: 1. Commercial General Liability (CGL): Insurance Services Office (ISO) Form CG 00 01 covering CGL on an "occurrence" basis, including products and completed operations, property damage, bodily injury and personal & advertising injury with limits no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence and an annual aggregate of two million dollars ($2,000,000). If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location (ISO CG 25 03 or 25 04) or the general aggregate limit shall be no less than two million dollars ($2,000,000). The umbrella or excess policy of ten million dollars ($10,000,000) must contain a clause stating that it takes effect (drops down) in the event the primary limits are impaired or exhausted. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 53 2. Automobile Liability: Insurance Services Office (ISO) Form CA 0001 covering Code 1 (any auto), with limits no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per accident for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage should include owned and non-owned vehicles used in connection with this Agreement and all applicable endorsements. 3. Workers' Compensation insurance as required by the State of California, with Statutory Limits, and Employers' Liability insurance with a limit of no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per accident for bodily injury or disease. 4. If Contractor is a licensed professional or employs professional staff, (e.g., Engineer of record, Resident Engineer, Surveyor, etc.) in providing services, Professional Liability with limits no less than $1,000,000 per occurrence or claim, and $3,000,000 annual aggregate. 5. Builder's Risk (Course of Construction) insurance utilizing an "All Risk" (Special Perils) coverage form, with limits equal to the completed value of the project and no coinsurance penalty provisions. If Contractor maintains broader coverage and/or higher limits than the minimums shown above, the Owner requires and shall be entitled to the broader coverage and/or the higher limits maintained by the Contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the Owner. Self-Insured Retentions Self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by the Owner. At the option of the Owner, either: the Contractor shall obtain coverage to reduce or eliminate such self- insured retentions as respects the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers; or the Contractor shall provide a financial guarantee satisfactory to the Owner guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration, and defense expenses. The policy language shall provide, or be endorsed to provide, that the self-insured retention may be satisfied by either the named insured or Owner. C. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Contractor's insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: 1. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 54 2. The County of Fresno, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers are to be named individually and collectively, as additional insureds on the CGL policy with respect to liability arising out of work or operations performed by or on behalf of the Contractor including materials, parts, or equipment furnished in connection with such work or operations and automobiles owned, leased, hired, or borrowed by or on behalf of the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees or volunteers. 3. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers for losses arising from work performed by the Contractor for the Owner 4. For any claims related to this project, the Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance coverage at least as broad as ISO CG 20 01 04 13 as respects the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, or volunteers shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. 5. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect Coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, agents, Engineers, Consulting Engineers, or volunteers. 6. The Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. 7. All Contractor's insurance policies for coverage required under this agreement shall not be cancelled or changed without a minimum of thirty (30) days advance written notice given to Owner. 8. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against the Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers for losses arising from work performed by the Contractor for the Owner. 9. The Builder's Risk (Course of Construction) policy shall be an "All Risk" (Special Perils) coverage form, with limits equal to the completed value of the project and no coinsurance penalty provisions. All subcontractors shall be insured to the extent of their portion of the work under the Contractor. The Contractor shall request, and is responsible to confirm with its insurer, that the County of Fresno and all subcontractors are named, both as additional insured and as additional loss payees, on the Builder's Risk insurance policy. The Contractor and all subcontractors waive all rights, each against the others, for damages arising from perils covered by the insurance required under the terms of this article, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of the Builder's Risk insurance obtained and maintained by the Contractor. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 55 D. ACCEPTABILITY OF INSURERS Contractor shall obtain the policies and coverages specified herein from an admitted insurer in good standing with and authorized to transact business in this state by the California Department of Insurance, and having a Best's rating of no less than A FSC Vill. E. SUBCONTRACTORS Contractor shall include all Subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each Subcontractor. F. EVIDENCE OF COVERAGE Within ten (10) days of bid award, Contractor shall furnish the Owner with original Certificates of Insurance including all required amendatory endorsements (or copies of the applicable policy language effecting coverage required by this Article 2.40) and a copy of the Declarations and Endorsement Page of the CGL policy listing all policy endorsements to Owner. However, failure to obtain the required documents prior to the work beginning shall not waive the Contractor's obligation to provide them. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, including endorsements, required by these specifications, at any time. Certificates of Insurance and Endorsements for all policies must be signed by a person authorized by the insurer to bind coverage on its behalf, indicate the name and address of the official who will administer this contract, state that such insurance coverages have been obtained and are in full force and effect, and clearly indicate that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled by either party, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. Commercial General Liability Endorsements must name the County of Fresno, its officers, agents and employees, individually and collectively, as additional insured, but only insofar as the operations under this Agreement are concerned; that such coverage for additional insured shall apply as primary insurance and any other insurance, or self-insurance, maintained by Owner, its officers, agents and employees, shall be excess only and not contributing with insurance provided under Contractor's policies herein. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 56 2.41 UNCOVERING WORK A. This Section shall apply to any Work installed and covered up by the Contractor that is required by the Building Code or other statutory or regulatory requirement to undergo inspection or special inspection and/or testing approval by an appropriate official representing the Owner or other public authority having jurisdiction to conduct such inspection and/or testing. Work covered up by the Contractor, Contractor's Subcontractor's or Suppliers prior to inspection/special inspection and/or testing approval shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced after inspection approval at the sole expense of the Contractor. This shall apply to all labor and material needed to complete both physical and cosmetic repairs, and any additional inspection costs associated with restoring the Work. B. This Section also shall apply to any Work installed and covered up by the Contractor, Contractor's Subcontractor's or Suppliers that is determined by the Owner or its Resident Engineer, during construction or within the Warranty period, to be defective, broken or inoperative. Work covered up by the Contractor, Contractor's Subcontractor's or Suppliers that is found to be defective, broken or inoperative shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced at the sole expense of the Contractor. This shall apply to all labor and material needed to complete both physical and cosmetic repairs, and any additional inspection costs associated with restoring the Work. 2.42 CORRECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Resident Engineer as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall submit a plan of action, within twenty-four(24) hours of notification of the rejected work by the Resident Engineer,for correcting the rejected work. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including compensation for the additional architectural and/or engineering services made necessary thereby. B. If, within 365 Calendar Days after the date of acceptance of the Work as specified in the Notice of Completion, or designated portion thereof, or within 365 Calendar Days after acceptance by the Owner of designated equipment, or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found by Owner to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive both final payment for the Work or designated portion thereof and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. C. The Contractor shall, at his/her sole expense, remove from the site all portions of the Work that are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected under Articles 2.32, 2.42.A, and 2.42.13, unless the Owner waives removal. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 57 D. If the Contractor fails to submit a plan of action, within twenty-four (24) hours of notification of the rejected work by the Resident Engineer, for correcting the rejected work, or fails to correct defective or nonconforming Work as provided herein in Articles 2.32, 2.42.A, and 2.42.13, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Article 2.08.C. E. If the Contractor does not take action under the plan to initiate such correction of such defective or nonconforming Work within ten (10) days of written notice from the Resident Engineer, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) days thereafter, the Owner may, upon ten (10) additional days' written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Resident Engineer, Engineer of record, or other Professional's additional services made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Supplemental Work Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. F. The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. G. Nothing contained in this Section 2.42 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including Section 2.32 hereof. The establishment of the time periods noted in this Section 2.42, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the defective or nonconforming Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the defective or nonconforming Work. 2.43 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept defective or nonconforming Work, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Contract Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be given effect whether or not final payment has been made. The Resident Engineer shall determine the amount of reduction in the Contract Sum. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 58 2.44 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER A. If the Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency, or stop notices are served upon the Owner, or if the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, and fails after written notice to commence and continue correction of such default, neglect or violation with diligence and promptness, the Owner upon certification by the Resident Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, after an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, terminate the Contract and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever methods the Owner may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. B. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Resident Engineer's and Engineer of record's additional services made necessary thereby, Contractor will only be paid for his/her actual unpaid costs from such excess. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Resident Engineer, upon application, in the manner provided in Section 2.24 and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract. 2.45 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. When a specific manufacturer,trade name or material is specified, or indicated, it is to establish a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The intent of the Contract Documents is to specify high-grade standard material and equipment, and it is not the intent of these Contract Documents to exclude or omit the products of any responsible manufacturer, if such products are equally acceptable in terms of quality, finish, performance, durability, and serviceability, in the judgment of the Owner and the Engineer of record, to those specified herein. Wherever an article, or any class of materials, is specified by the trade name or by the name of any particular patentee, manufacturer or dealer, it shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the article of material described or any other equal thereto in quality, finish, performance, durability, and serviceability, in the judgment of the Owner and the Engineer of record, for the purpose for which it is or they are intended. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 59 B. If the Contractor desires to use material or equipment other than that specified, he/she shall submit a request for approval of such substitution, in writing, to the Resident Engineer by no later than 10 days prior to bid opening. Substitution requests will not be considered if received after the time stipulated. C. The Owner does not guarantee that alternative articles, components, materials or equipment other than the item specified by trade name or other specific identification, will fit within the design parameters of the Project without alteration of the Project design by the Contractor. D. The Owner has the right to reject any proposed alternative material which requires alteration of the project design which impacts the safety of the public or the user of a completed facility. If the proposed alternative material requires alteration of the design of the Project or any aspect thereof and said alterations are acceptable to the Owner,the Contractor shall be responsible for performing said alterations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Submittals for approval of substitute materials shall contain sufficient detailed information, descriptive brochures, drawings, samples or other data as is necessary to provide a detailed side-by-side comparison to the specified materials. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit complete descriptive and technical information so the Resident Engineer can make proper appraisal. Lack of either proper or sufficient information shall constitute cause for rejection. Reference to product data will not be acceptable. F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm and correlate all quantities and dimensions and coordinate with all trades whose work may be affected by the requested substitution. 2.46 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS A. Reference to known standards shall mean and intend the latest edition or amendment published prior to date of these Specifications, unless specifically indicated otherwise, and to such portions of it that relate and apply directly to the material or installation called for on the Project. B. Where material is specified solely by reference to standard specifications, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Resident Engineer, submit to the Resident Engineer for his/her approval, data on all such material proposed to be incorporated into the Work of the Contractor, listing the name and address of the vendor, the manufacturer or producer, and the trade or brand names of such materials. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 60 2.47 SPECIFICATIONS A. The Specifications are organized into Divisions, Sections, and Trade headings based on the Construction Specifications Institute's Master format and the Master format numbering system. This organization shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be responsible for examining all Sections of the Specifications for inter-related items of the Work, and for furnishing each item identified or specified. B. No responsibility will be assumed by the Owner, Engineer of record or the Resident Engineer for omissions or duplications by the Contractor in the completion of the Contract due to any alleged discrepancy in the arrangement of the material in these Specifications, nor shall any such segregation of work and materials operate to make the Resident Engineer an arbiter in defining the limits to the agreements between the Contractor and his/her Subcontractors or suppliers. C. The misplacement, addition or omission of any letter,word or punctuation mark shall in no way damage the true spirit, intent or meaning of these Specifications. D. The words "shown", "indicated", "noted", "scheduled" or words of that effect shall be understood to mean that reference is made to Drawings accompanying these Specifications. E. Where reference herein is made to colors or finishes "as selected", the reference is to the Engineer of record with concurrence by the Owner. 2.48 APPROVED APPLICATORS A. Where specific instructions in these Specifications require that a particular product and/or materials be installed and/or applied by an "approved applicator" of the manufacturer, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that any Subcontractors used for such work be approved applicators. B. Contractor accordingly shall bear any and all costs, and shall reimburse Owner for any such costs incurred by Owner, resulting from Contractor's failure to insure the use of an "approved applicator". 2.49 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Deliver all manufactured materials in the original packages, containers or bundles (with the seals intact), bearing the name or identification mark of all manufacturers. B. Deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable and where specified to be shop-primed or shop-finished; they shall be packaged or crated as required to preserve such priming or finish intact and free from abrasion. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 61 C. Store all materials in such manner as necessary to properly protect same from damage, as materials or equipment damaged by handling, weather, dirt or from any other cause will not be acceptable. D. Store materials so as to cause no obstructions (i.e. stored off all sidewalks and other walkways, roadways, and underground services). The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting from damage all material and equipment furnished under the Contract. 2.50 QUALITY OF WORK A. Where not more specifically described in any of the various Sections of these Specifications, the quality of work shall conform to all of the methods and operations of best standards and accepted practices of the trade or trades involved, and shall include all items of fabrication, construction, or installation regularly furnished or required for completion of the work(including any finish), and for successful operation as intended of the Project and the component thereof corresponding to that work. B. All Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective lines of work. C. When completed, all parts shall have been durably and substantially built and shall present a neat, finished appearance. 2.51 HOURS OF WORK A. Eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's work upon all work done hereunder, and it is expressly stipulated that no worker employed at any time by the Contractor, or by a Subcontractor under this Contract, upon the Work, shall be required or permitted to work thereon more than eight (8) hours in any one (1) calendar day and forty(40) hours in any one (1) calendar week, except as provided in Sections 1810-1815 inclusive, of the Labor Code of the State of California, all the provisions of which are deemed to be incorporated herein as if set forth in full; and it is further expressly stipulated that for each and every violation of said last named stipulation, said Contractor shall forfeit, as a penalty to the Owner, fifty dollars ($50.00) for each worker employed by the Contractor in the execution of this Contract, for each calendar day during which said worker is required or permitted to labor more than eight (8) hours in any one (1) calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one (1) calendar week in violation of any of said provisions of the Labor Code. B. Notwithstanding the above stipulations, pursuant to Section 1815 of the Labor Code, work performed by employees of contractors in excess of eight(8) hours per day and forty (40) hours during any one (1)week shall be permitted on the Project upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day at not less than one and a half(1 1/2) times the basic rate of pay. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 62 2.52 WAGE RATES AND RELATED LABOR COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS A. This Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR), including the obligation to submit certified payroll records directly to the DIR Compliance Monitoring Unit (CMU) at least monthly using the CMU's eCPR system. Detailed information may be obtained on the State of California's Department of Industrial Relations website, www.dir.ca.gov/dlse/cmu/CMU. The Contractor shall also submit certified payroll records of the Contractor, Subcontractors and all Sub-subcontractors of any tier to the Inspector of Record at least monthly. B. Contractor shall, and shall cause each of its Subcontractors (as defined in Labor Code section 1722.1) to provide written proof that they are currently registered with the California Department of Industrial Relations at the time of bid submittal, and have paid the applicable annual fee and are thereby qualified to submit a bid and to perform public work pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5, prior to award of this Contract or any subcontract hereunder. No bid shall be accepted, nor shall this Contract or any subcontract hereunder, be entered into without such proof. C. Pursuant to Section 1770-1780 of the Labor Code of the State of California, the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rates of wages and rates for legal holidays and overtime in the locality in which this work is to be performed, which under Labor Code Section 1773.1 are deemed to include employer payments for health and welfare, pension, vacation, travel time and subsistence pay, and apprenticeship or other authorized training programs, for each craft or type of worker or mechanic needed to perform this contract. Said wage rates are available only at the Fresno County Department of Public Works and Planning, Design Division, and will be made available to any interested person upon request. Minimum wage rates for this Project, as predetermined by the Secretary of Labor, are set forth in the Special Provisions. If there is a difference between the minimum wage rates predetermined by the Secretary of Labor and the Prevailing Wage Rates predetermined by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California for similar classifications of labor, the contractor and his subcontractors shall pay not less than the higher wage rate. D. It shall be mandatory upon the Contractor to whom the Contract is awarded, and upon any Subcontractor under him/her to pay not less than the said specified rates to all laborers, workers, and mechanics employed by them in the execution of the Contract, and to pay all laborers, workers and mechanics not less often than once weekly. The Contractor to whom the Contract is awarded shall post a copy of the determination of prevailing wages at the job site. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to comply with Sections 1770-1780 of the Labor Code of the State of California and shall insert into every subcontract the requirements contained therein. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 63 E. The Contractor shall comply with Labor Code Section 1775. In accordance with said Section 1775, it is hereby further agreed that the Contractor shall forfeit to the Owner, as a penalty, fifty dollars ($50.00)for each laborer, worker, or mechanic employed for each calendar day or portion thereof, who is paid less than the said stipulated rates for any work done under the Contract, by him/her or by any Subcontractor under him/her. The difference between said stipulated rates and the amount paid to each worker for each calendar day or portion thereof for which each worker was paid less than said stipulated rate shall be paid to each worker by the Contractor. The Contractor, and each Subcontractor, shall keep or cause to be kept an accurate record showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker or other employee employed by him/her or her in connection with the public work. The records shall be open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of the Owner, to its officers and agents, and to the Division of Labor Law Enforcement of the State Department of Industrial Relations, its deputies and agents, or as otherwise provided by applicable law (including but not limited to Labor Code 1776). F. In case it becomes necessary for the Contractor or any Subcontractor to employ on the Work under this Contract any person in a trade or occupation (except executive, supervisory, administrative, clerical or other non-manual workers as such) for which no minimum wage rate is specified, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner who shall promptly thereafter determine the prevailing rate for such additional trade or occupation from the time of the initial employment of the person affected and during the continuance of such employment. 2.53 APPLICATION OF HIGHEST STANDARDS AND REQUIREMENTS Whenever two (2) or more standards or requirements appear in these General Conditions or in any other part of the Contract Documents that form the Contract, the highest standard or requirement shall be applied and followed in the performance under this Contract. 2.54 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws prohibiting discrimination in employment, including the following: A. California Labor Code Section 1735, which prohibits discrimination in employment on any basis listed in subdivision (a) of Section 12940 of the Government Code, as those bases are defined in Sections 12926 and 12926.1 of the Government Code, except as otherwise provided in Section 12940 of the Government Code, and applies to all employers, employment agencies and labor organizations. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 64 B. Title VII of the Federal 1964 Civil Rights Act (42 U.S.C. Section 2000e - 2000e- 17)which prohibits employment discrimination on the basis of race, color, sex, religion, or national origin, and applies to all employers that employ at least fifteen (15)workers during each working day in each of twenty (20) or more calendar weeks in the current or preceding year. C. In addition to these two (2) laws of general application listed in the immediately preceding paragraphs A and B, there are other Federal and State laws that prohibit employment discrimination in particular cases. D. The Owner is an Affirmative Action Employer and expects all of its contractors and suppliers to familiarize themselves with, and comply with, all applicable laws relating to employment discrimination. E. To the extent required by law, the Contractor shall meet all requirements of law relating to the participation of minority, women, and disabled veteran business enterprise contracting goals, and shall comply with Public Contract Code 10115 et seq. and all applicable regulations. Contractor further agrees that, when required, Contractor shall ensure compliance by all Subcontractors and shall complete all forms required by all agencies exercising jurisdiction over the Project. 2.55 APPRENTICES A. Pursuant to Sections 1770-1780 of the Labor Code of the State of California, the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of wages in the locality for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the work. Said wage rates pursuant to Section 1773.2 of the Labor Code are on file with the Clerk of the Fresno County Board of Supervisors, and will be made available to any interested person on request. A copy of this wage scale may also be obtained at the following Web Site: www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. B. Pursuant to Section 1775 of the Labor Code of the State of California, nothing in this Article shall prevent the employment of properly registered apprentices upon public works. Every such apprentice shall be paid the standard wage paid to apprentices under the regulations of the craft or trade at which he/she is employed, and shall be employed only at the work of the craft or trade to which he/she is registered. C. Only apprentices, as defined in Section 3077, who are in training under apprenticeship standards and written apprentice agreements under Chapter 4 (commencing at Section 3070), Division 3, of the Labor Code, are eligible to be employed on public works. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship standards and apprentice agreements under which he/she is training. CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 65 D. Fresno County is committed to increasing the availability of employment and training opportunities, with particular attention to the plight of those who are most economically disadvantaged. In an effort to advance that purpose, the County will require that the Contractor and each subcontractor employed on this Project shall use their best efforts to ensure that thirty-three percent (33%) of apprentice hours, as determined by California Labor Code Section 1777.5 for each contractor and subcontractor of any tier on this Project, are performed by qualified participants in state approved apprenticeship programs who also are current or former "Welfare-to-Work" participants in the CaIWORKs program. Provided, that nothing contained in this Paragraph D shall be interpreted to relieve or in any way diminish the obligation of the Contractor and each subcontractor to comply fully with all applicable apprenticeship laws in accordance with the California Labor Code and the California Code of Regulations; and accordingly such requirements as are contractually imposed by this Paragraph D shall be in addition to such legally mandated requirements, and applicable only to the extent fully consistent therewith. E. Incentives whereby the Contractor or Subcontractor receives partial reimbursement for the wages paid to apprentices who qualify may be available. The incentive program is administered by the County of Fresno, Department of Social Services. For questions regarding the incentive program, contact the Department of Social Services at (559) 230-4008. 2.56 PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED Every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this contract shall be deemed to be inserted, and this contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included, and if through mistake or otherwise any provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, upon application of either party the contract shall be amended to make the insertion or correction. 2.57 DRUG FREE WORKPLACE CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall comply with Government Code Section 8355 in matters relating to providing a drug-free workplace. B. The Contractor shall publish a statement notifying employees that unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of controlled substance is prohibited and specifying actions to be taken against employees for violations, as required by Government Code Section 8355(a). CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL CONDITIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 007200 - 66 C. The Contractor shall establish a Drug-Free Awareness Program as required by Government Code 8355(a)(2), to inform employees about all of the following: 1. The dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, 2. The Contractor's policy for maintaining a drug-free workplace, 3. Any available counseling, rehabilitation and employee assistance programs, 4. Penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. D. Provide as required by Government Code 8355(c), that everyone who provides work under the Agreement. 1. Will receive a copy of the company's drug-free policy statement, and 2. Will agree to abide by the terms of the Contractor's statement as a condition of employment on the contract. 2.58 BUILDING PERMIT AND OTHER PERMITS The Building permit shall be obtained and paid for by the Owner. All other required permits are the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain. Fees for all other required permits shall be reimbursed to the Contractor at actual cost when the County is presented with a valid receipt. 2.59 CODES AND REGULATIONS All work, materials and equipment shall be in full compliance with the California Building Code; California Plumbing Code; California Electrical Code; California Mechanical Code; California Fire Code; California Energy Code; as those codes may be amended from time to time; Cal/OSHA Safety Regulations; and all Federal, State and Local laws, ordinances, regulations and Fresno County Charter provisions in effect and applicable in the performance of the work. END OF SECTION CONTRACT# 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Access to site. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Design, site preparation, and construction of a 250-foot tall, 3-sided self- supporting microwave tower and its corresponding equipment 2. Construction of a 1,011 sqft. equipment shelter per the plans and specifications and all associated site work including fencing. 3. The project also includes, but is not limited to, the installation of the Owner supplied electrical back-up generator as well as Contractor supplied and installed communication equipment as specified in the plans and specifications. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION A. The Work shall be conducted in 4 phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated: 1. Phase 1: Submittals Work in this phase shall commence no later than 14 business days after the pre- construction conference. Complete this phase thirty (30) working days from the day the Notice to Proceed is issued. The Engineer shall have a maximum of ten (10) working days in which to review and approve or reject each submittal from the Contractor. In the event that the Engineer rejects any of the Contractor's initial submittals, the Engineer shall have a maximum of ten (10) working days in which to review and approve or reject each re-submittal from the Contractor. The ten (10) working day time period for the Engineer's review shall commence on the day upon which the Engineer re- ceives the submittal or re-submittal in question. In the event that the Engineer's review of a submittal or re-submittal requires in excess of ten (10)working days, the Engineer shall extend the number of work- ing days allowed for the completion of the first order of work by one working day for each working day of delay in the Engineer's completion of the review. Pay the County of Fresno the sum of Three (3,000) dollars per day each and every calendar days delay in excess of the number of working days prescribed. 2. Phase 2: Construction of the Equipment Shelter, Tower foundations and all underground utilities. Complete this phase eighty (80) working days from the date of the Notice to Proceed is issued. The Engineer, in their sole discretion, may issue the Notice to Proceed for Phase 2 immediately upon delivery to the Contractor of the materials and equipment necessary to construct the project. Alternatively, the Engineer may defer issuance of the Notice to Proceed for Phase 2 to the extent the Engineer, in their sole discretion, deems appropriate. Begin work on the date shown on the Phase 2 Notice to Proceed. Do not begin work prior to the date shown on the Phase 2 Notice to Proceed . The date shown on the Notice to Proceed Phase will be the first working day charged against the allotted number of working days for the second order of work. Pay the County of Fresno the sum of Three (3,000) dollars per day each and every calendar days delay in excess of the number of working days prescribed. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 3. Phase 3: Erection of the Tower and its Accessories Complete this phase thirty (30) working days from the date of the Notice to Proceed is issued. The Engineer, in their sole discretion, may issue the Notice to Proceed for Phase 3 immediately while Phase 2 is still on going. Alternatively, the Engineer may defer issuance of the Notice to Proceed for Phase 3 to the extent the Engineer, in their sole discretion, deems appropriate. Begin work on the date shown on the Notice to Proceed — Phase 3. Do not begin work prior to the date shown on the Notice to Proceed — Phase 3. The date shown on the Notice to Proceed —Phase 3 will be the first working day charged against the allotted number of working days for the second order of work. Pay the County of Fresno the sum of Three (3,000) dollars per day each and every calendar days delay in excess of the number of working days prescribed. 4. Phase 4: Installation of Equipment Complete this phase thirty (20) working days from the date of the Notice to Proceed is issued. The Engineer, in their sole discretion, may issue the Notice to Proceed — Phase 4 immediately while Phase 2 and 3 is still on going. Alternatively, the Engineer may defer issuance of the Notice to Proceed — Phase 4 to the extent the Engi- neer, in their sole discretion, deems appropriate. Begin work on the date shown on the Notice to Proceed — Phase 4. Do not begin work prior to the date shown on the Notice to Proceed — Phase 4. The date shown on the Notice to Proceed —Phase 4 will be the first working day charged against the allotted number of working days for the second order of work. Pay the County of Fresno the sum of Three (3,000) dollars per day each and every calendar days delay in excess of the number of working days prescribed. B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, for all phases of the Work. 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Contractor scope of work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. B. Owner-Furnished Products: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 1. Back-up Generator 1.6 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption with Owner. 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Construction Manager's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances ] [on Project site is not permitted. E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 1.9 CONSTRUCTION FUNDING SIGNS A. GENERAL 1. Details of the construction funding sign is in the Supplemental Information. 2. Do not add information to a construction project funding identification sign unless authorized. 3. Always keep construction project funding signs clean and in good repair. B. MATERIALS 1. Construction project funding sign posts, foundation, back braces and mounting shall be constructed to hold signs in a proper and permanent position, and to resist swaying in the wind. Signs will be supported by two (2) posts of appropriate size. 2. Sign panels shall be fabricated of 0.081 inch minimum extruded aluminum panels. 3. The background on construction project funding signs must be Type II retroreflective sheeting (white) and the text color will be as per detail shown on plans. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SUMMARY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 011000 C. CONSTRUCTION 1. Provide and install the construction project funding signs as shown on the plans or at the location designated by the Engineer before starting major work activi- ties. 2. Signs should be maintained throughout the contract performance period. Dam- aged or stolen signs shall be replaced as soon as possible. 3. Upon completion and acceptance of the work, the signs shall be removed and become the property of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 011000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 - 2 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. 1. Construction Waste: a. Masonry and CMU. b. Lumber. C. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. g. Insulation. h. Gypsum board. i. Piping. j. Electrical conduit. k. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons . 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons . CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 - 3 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incineratorinclude points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 -4 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 - 5 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONST. WASTE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017419 - 6 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. D. Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. E. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 1 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 2 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 5. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 3 inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Resident Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Payment Procedures. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Resident engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 5 h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. M. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 017700 - 6 a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE REINFORCING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 032000 - 1 SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel reinforcement bars. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Review the following: a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control. b. Construction contraction and isolation joints. C. Steel-reinforcement installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of steel reinforcement. 2. Bar supports. B. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. B. Minutes of preinstallation conference. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE REINFORCING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 032000 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 , deformed. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports. B. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter. 1. Finish: Plain . 2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. 2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE REINFORCING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 032000 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. 2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater. D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318. E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings. 1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than 36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater. 2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with ACI 117. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE REINFORCING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 032000 - 4 1. Steel-reinforcement placement. END OF SECTION 032000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Concrete Subcontractor. C. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 2 B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer. E. Samples: For vapor retarder. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials. D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 3 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI- certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 . CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 4 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301 2. ACI 117 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. C. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch , minimum. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 5 D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615, Grade 60 ASTM A 706, deformed bars, assembled with clips. C. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. C. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer- coated wire bar supports. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 6 3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non- set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. H. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 7 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 8 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 9 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio:0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio:0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixtur, plus or minus 1 inch . 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. 4. Slump Limit:4 inches. 5. Air Content:6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 7. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd. . 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 10 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch, Class C, 1/2 inch, Class D, 1 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 11 I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 12 3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 13 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam- girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 14 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 . 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 15 B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid- applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 , for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 16 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6" high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength:4000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 17 E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. C. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 18 B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 19 according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4- inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 20 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete.one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory- cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi . 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 033000 - 21 Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28- day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Engineer. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. 3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 033000 CONTRACT # 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 1 SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Masonry-cell fill. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry anchors. 2. Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. 3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties, material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellant used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. 9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91 M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 3 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 -4 D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface]. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 5 2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where indicated. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi.. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions. 2.5 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 6 D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. I. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for glazed or pre-faced masonry units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors. J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer. L. Water: Potable. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 . B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: Ladder type complying with ASTM A 951/A 951 M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 7 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into masonry but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 3. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet . Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from with ribs at 3- inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 6. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches into wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam sheds water. 7. Solder metal items at corners. B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 8 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge unless noted otherwise. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.11 MASONRY-CELL FILL A. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or [mortar cement] mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 9 B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. a. Cast-stone trim units. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi . 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 10 C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch . B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet , or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feetm. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet . 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch . C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch , with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 11 and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern as indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less-than- nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches . Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping." 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 12 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. 2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 3. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant. D. Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. F. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. G. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches . 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,] returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 13 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods or as indicated in the plans: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. 3.9 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 14 flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 15 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft of wall area or portion thereof. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 042200 - 16 C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling. D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042200 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 1 SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Roof rafter framing. 5. Ceiling joist framing. 6. Soffit framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold-formed metal framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cold-formed steel framing materials. 2. Load-bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Interior non-load-bearing wall framing. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Single deflection track. 7. Drift clips. 8. Roof-rafter framing. 9. Ceiling joist framing. 10. Soffit framing. 11. Post-installed anchors. 12. Power-actuated anchors. 13. Sill sealer gasket. 14. Sill sealer gasket/termite barrier. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 2 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency . 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. E. Research Reports: 1. For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power- actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. For sill sealer gasket/termite barrier, showing compliance with ICC-ES AC380. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." E. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H . 2. Coating: G60 , A60 , AZ50 , or GF30 . B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 33 . 2. Coating: G60 . 2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch . 2. Flange Width: 2 inches . 3. Section Properties: As Indicated on Drawings . B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch . 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches . C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch . 2. Flange Width: 2 inches . 3. Section Properties: As Indicated on Drawings . 2.3 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated . 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches . B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 4 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated, minimum matching steel stud thickness . 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches . C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated . 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures . E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.4 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated on Drawings . 2. Flange Width: As Indicated on Drawings , minimum. 3. Section Properties: As Indicated on Drawings . 2.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated . 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches , minimum. 2.6 SOFFIT FRAMING A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As Indicated . 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches , minimum. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 5 2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole-reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 , threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, carbon- steel nuts, and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C . C. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 ICC-ES AC193 ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor or adhesive anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self- tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 6 F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M MIL-P-21035B or SSPC-Paint 20. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims. E. Sill Sealer Gasket: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 7 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out- of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire- resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sill sealer gasket at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. E. Install sill sealer gasket/termite barrier in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 8 D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: As Indicated on Drawings . B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks, with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall-framing member and the web of track. 1. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 2. Space studs as follows: a. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings . C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 9 F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim,furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically 48 inches . Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges, and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges; terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR NONLOADBEARING WALL FRAMING A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings . CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 10 C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers . G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF JOIST FRAMING A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections. C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows: 1. Joist Spacing: As indicated on Drawings . D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers, consisting of joist and joist track or another combination of connected joists if indicated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 11 E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement. 1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. F. Install bridging at smaller intervals of those indicated on drawings or on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. Joist-Track Solid Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.8 REPAIR A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 054000 - 12 3.10 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEATHING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 061600 - 1 SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 20/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEATHING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 061600 - 2 1. Span Rating: Not less than 20/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: 5/8 inch 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. E. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954. F. Screws for Fastening Composite Nail Base Insulated Roof Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion- protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEATHING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 061600 - 3 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate parapet and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEATHING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 061600 - 4 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 061600 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 1 SECTION 071900 -WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1. Cast-in-place concrete. 2. Concrete unit masonry. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry assemblies. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. 2. Include manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Include manufacturer's recommended number of coats for each type of substrate and spreading rate for each separate coat. 4. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2 that specifies water repellents approved by MPI, with the proposed product highlighted. B. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated, 12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 2 B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For water-repellent-treated substrates. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide water repellents listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing of water repellents on field mockups. 1. In addition to verifying performance requirements, use mockups to verify manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure and optimum rates of product application to substrates. 2. Propose changes to materials and methods to suit Project. 3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be tested. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days. 2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. 3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24 hours. 4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F. 5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 6. Not less than 24 hour have passed since surfaces were last wet. 7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 3 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance: Water repellents shall meet the following performance requirements as determined by preconstruction testing on manufacturer's standard substrates representing those indicated for this Project. B. Water Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for treated compared to untreated specimens when tested according to the following: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140. C. Water-Vapor Transmission: Comply with one or both of the following: 1. Maximum 10 percent reduction water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 96/E 96M. 2. Minimum 80 percent water-vapor transmission of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM D 1653. D. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum [90] <Insert number> percent reduction in leakage rate of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514/E 514M. E. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water-repellent performance after 2500 hours of weathering according to ASTM G 154 compared to water-repellent-treated specimens before weathering. F. Chloride-Ion Intrusion in Concrete: NCHRP Report 244, Series II tests. 1. Reduction of Water Absorption: 80 percent. 2. Reduction in Chloride Content: 80 percent. 2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 4 B. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 10 percent or more solids of oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. C. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. D. Proprietary-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of one or several different resins (silanes or siloxanes), polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 2.3 FILM-FORMING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silicone-Resin Sealer, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, polymerized, silicone- resin water repellent for dense substrates; in a solvent- or waterborne solution containing not less than 3 and up to 7 percent solids by weight; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. B. Proprietary-Blend, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of one or several different resins, acrylics, polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. C. Acrylic, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, breathing coating of acrylic resin, which may be enhanced with silane and siloxane resins; in a waterborne, solvent-borne, or acrylic emulsion solution containing less than 15 percent solids by volume; and with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. B. Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age before application of water repellent, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857 . C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation. D. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured. E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle, roller or brush to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER WATER REPELLENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 071900 - 6 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample water- repellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Engineer. . B. Coverage Test: In the presence of Engineer, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1. Notify the Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Engineer. B. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 071900 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER THERMAL INSULATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 072100 - 1 SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 2. Molded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 3. Mineral-wool blanket. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in masonry cells. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing installed directly over wood or steel framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER THERMAL INSULATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 072100 - 2 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYISOCYAN U RATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2. 1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced : ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced : ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil- scrim polyethylene. 2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER THERMAL INSULATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 072100 - 3 C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Crawl spaces. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Attic spaces. D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Asphalt Coating for Cellular-Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation. D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER THERMAL INSULATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 072100 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R- value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches , support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 1 SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review structural loading limitations of rafters during and after roofing. 6. Review fleshings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation. 9. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 2 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory- applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 3 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. E. Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 4 B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the EPA/DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Product List" for low-slope roof products. B. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels according to one of the following when tested according to CRRC-1: 1. Three-year, aged solar reflectance of not less than 0.55 and emissivity of not less than 0.75. 2. Three-year, aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 64 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980. C. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. D. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 1680 or ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 5 E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646[ or ASTM E 331] at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference:2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. . F. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 30. H. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A 60. 2. Hail Resistance: MH. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. 2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637. B. Vertical-Rib, Snap-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and snapping panels together. 1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 6 designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch . b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer C. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations 2. Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: 0.028-inch nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. 3. Panel Coverage: 12 inches. 4. Panel Height: 1.0 inch 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F ; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226/D 22M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic- coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 ) coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 7 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin- foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels. E. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to match gutters. F. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, 0.048-inch nominal thickness; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles and with welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of 0.060-inch- nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. 1. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch- thick, rigid insulation. G. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. H. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 8 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory- formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 9 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light- colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 10 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1. Apply over the entire roof surface. 2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap over edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Flashings: Install fleshings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed. 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 2. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 3. Copper Panels: Use copper, stainless-steel, or hardware-bronze fasteners. 4. Stainless-Steel Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners. C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 11 D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 5. Watertight Installation: a. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. b. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. C. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. F. Clipless Metal Panel Installation: Fasten metal panels to supports with screw fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. G. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. H. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 12 within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). I. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. J. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. K. Roof Curbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. L. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER STANDING-STEAM METAL ROOF REEDLEY, CA. PANELS SECTION 074113.16 - 13 recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113.16 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 1 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Formed roof drainage system. 2. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim where not part of Section 07 41 13. 3. Formed wall flashing and trim (typical at perimeter of all wall openings). 4. Self-adhering flexible membrane used in conjunction with sheet metal flashing where not part of Section 07 13 13 or 07 41 31. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for metal roofing and flashing, trim and accessories, and Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for flexible flashing at wall openings. 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing" for roof drains & pipe fittings that attach to sheet metal gutters. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting. B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads, suitable for galvanized steel, galvanized or cadmium plated. 1. Nails for Stainless Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel, 0.109 inch minimum and not less than 7/8 inch long, barbed with large head. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 3 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: Rivets High-strength aluminum, stainless-steel or as recommended for the particular use. 4. Washers: As required, neoprene faced where water-tight condition is required. 5. Bolts and Nuts: FF-B-578 C, FF-B-588C. C. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. D. Solder for Zinc: ASTM B 32, 60 percent lead and 40 percent tin with low antimony, as recommended by manufacturer. E. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape, suitable for high temperature conditions. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. J. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. 1. Available Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; "CCW WIP 300HT." b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; "Ultra." C. Owens Corning; "WeatherLock." d. Protecto Wrap Company; "Rainproof 40." K. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 Ib/100 sq. ft., rosin sized. L. Underlayment Felt: Asphalt saturated organic felt per CBC Standard 32-1, 15 lb. minimum. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 4 B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate from materials as indicated by the drawings (match siding when exposed) to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces and accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness at a minimum of 36"o.c. or as indicated by the drawings and/or SMACNA. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: As indicated by drawings. 2. Expansion Joints: Butt type. 3. Accessories: Stainless steel wire ball downspout strainer. B. Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Manufactured Hanger Style: 1-35A for rectangular downspouts and 1-35J for round downspouts. 2. Provide sheet metal terminal head in shapes indicated or as approved by Architect. 3. Coordinate with plumbing contractor for water-tight installation of horizontal and vertical roof drains in sheet gutters as indicated in drawings. 2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 5 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch, 22 gage, thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. B. Counter lashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch, 24 gage, thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch, 24 gage, thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. E. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2- inch- high end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch, 24 gage, thick. F. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide concealed backup plate. a. Stainless Steel: .031 inch, 22 gage, thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch, 24 gage thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. G. Copings/Parapet Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch-wide concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: .031 inch, 22 gage, thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.0396 inch, 24 gage thick, unless indicated otherwise by drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 6 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. C. Self-Adhering membrane underlayment: Install similar to underlayment at parapet caps and all wall and roof openings including door, window, lower opening perimeters and other wall/roof penetrations to seal substrate from moisture and shed water. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Form sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely. 2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, turn exposed edges back 1/2". 3. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 2. Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 3. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3". 4. Make flat and lap seams in the direction of flow. C. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. D. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 7 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. G. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 40'-0", except where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper in- stallation. H. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing through the exterior metal. 2. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where exposed to the weather, use lead washers. 3. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4" long by 11 gage. 4. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs. 5. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners unless noted otherwise. 6. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. I. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. Install sealant tape where indicated. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre- tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the seams thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder. a. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. b. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. C. Fill joints completely. d. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 2. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use. a. Pre-tinning is not required for lead. 3. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth. 4. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 8 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION (Where not included as part of Metal Panel Roofing System) A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. 1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS (if not detailed on the drawings) A. Sheet metal copings: 1. Follow standards shown in SMACNA manual, CHAPTER 3 2. Use 22 gage MIN. galvanized sheet metal, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 3. Slope surface toward roof side of wall with a minimum of 1/2":12" slope. 4. Angle and return bottom edges for rigidity. 5. Turn down a minimum of 4" at inside edges, or as otherwise detailed. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 9 6. Turn down outside a minimum of 4", or as otherwise indicated. B. Pitch pans (if applicable): 1. Where unflashed projections extend through or rest upon the roof surface, and cannot be flashed with a prefabricated lead boot or SBS-modified bitumen, provide a primed pitch pan in accordance with SMACNA Manual, Plate 68, Figure E, with minimum 4" high collar and 6" flange, except where otherwise indicated. 2. Pitch pan shall be spot welded and hot soldered to prevent bitumen loss. 3. Set flange on last layer of SIBS modified bitumen roofing membrane, and nail at 6" on centers. 4. Cover flange with one layer of SIBS-modified bitumen, extending onto roof 4", 8", and 12". 5. Fill inside of pan with minimum 1-1/2" of modified elastomeric asphalt mastic over grout. C. Cold pipe flashing: 1. Provide 4 lb lead manufactured flashings in accordance with SMACNA , Figure 4- 14b. 2. Integrate flanges within roofing plies. D. Provide custom hooded flashings at all ganged vertical pipes/penetrations, using curbed type flashings in accordance with SMACNA Manual, Figure 4-14A. E. Surface mounted counterflashings: 1. At concrete or masonry walls, provide a two-piece surface-mounted counterflashing system of galvanized steel (Fry or approved equal). 2. Seal receiver to wall surface with a thermoplastic rubber sealant approved in advance by the Architect. 3. Fasten the receiver into the wall at 12" on centers; snap in the second piece after base flashing has been installed. 4. At concrete masonry units, provide a thermoplastic rubber sealant approved in advance by the Architect. F. Drains: SMACNA Figure 1-37 1. Provide 4 lb lead drain pan in drains and overflows. 2. Do not cut lead to fit corners. 3. Install roof around the sump area as specified and cut roofing ply assembly flush with drain assembly at drain opening. 4. Provide asphalt primed lead flashing on top of roofing felts; size the lead flashing to extend uninterrupted up cants or tapered edge strips, and to terminate just below deck line. 5. Immediately install and tighten clamping ring into lead only, using caution not to break lead sheet. 6. Hand nail perimeter 4" on centers with one row of 1" head ringshanked nails. 7. Cover with roofing cap sheet. 8. All edges shall exhibit minimum 1/4" bead of asphalt. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8- inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 076200 - 10 3.8 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATIONS A. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. 2. interlock interior leg of coping with continuous cleats anchored at 24-inch centers. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drain line. 3.10 TESTS A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are completely watertight. 3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 1 SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Gravity ventilators. 4. Preformed flashing sleeves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. 1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant-and field- assembled work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 2 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For roof curbs, equipment supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 2. Wind-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind restraints. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. 4. Required clearances. B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulationJand integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom. B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. C. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. D. Construction: 1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system. 2. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 3. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated. 4. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck- mounting flange. 5. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow. 6. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 7. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer along top flange of curb, continuous around curb perimeter. 8. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb, of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements. 9. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 4 10. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as curb. 2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced perimeter metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads between structural supports, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, spanning between structural supports; capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed structure- mounting flange at bottom. B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. C. Material: Zinc-coated galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range D. Construction: 1. Curb Profile: Profile as indicated on Drawings compatible with roofing system. 2. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick glass-fiber board insulation. 3. Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 4. Nailer: Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide on top flange of equipment supports, continuous around support perimeter. 5. Wind Restraint Straps and Base Flange Attachment: Provide wind restraint straps, welded strap connectors, and base flange attachment to roof structure at perimeter of curb of size and spacing required to meet wind uplift requirements. 6. Platform Cap: Where portion of equipment support is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb. 7. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 9. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated. 10. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow. 2.4 GRAVITY VENTILATORS A. Low-Profile, Cylindrical-Style Gravity Ventilators: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated as indicated, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealed mechanical joints. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 5 1. Construction: Integral base flange, vent cylinder, cylinder bird screen, and rain cap hood. 2. Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Configuration:As indicated on Drawings. 4. Bird Screens: Manufacturer's standard mesh with rewireable frame. 5. Insect Screens: Manufacturer's standard mesh with rewireable frame. 6. Vent Cylinder, Base Flange, and Rain-Cap Hood Material:Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, of manufacturer's standard thickness. 7. Finish: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance. C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ROOF ACCESSORIES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 077200 - 6 D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other. E. Gravity Ventilator Installation: Verify that gravity ventilators operate properly and have unrestricted airflow. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanisms. F. Pipe Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install supports and attachments as required to properly support piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Space supports for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. G. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer. 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Clean off excess sealants. E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 077200 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 1 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 3 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 4 C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 6 B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self- adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under"Firestop Systems." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 078413 - 7 C. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops." END OF SECTION 078413 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 1 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Standard hollow metal doors and frames for doors and windows. B. Related Sections 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for shop drawing, product data and sample submittals. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors and/or frames. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated within 30 days of issuance or Notice to Proceed. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 4. Details of each different wall opening condition. 5. Details of anchorages. 6. Details of accessories. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. D. Coordination with other trades: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 2 1. Submittals shall flag areas of coordination with other trades or where materials that interface with materials specified herein are necessary. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glazing requirements; indicate coordination with finish hardware. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with CBC Section 715.4 and NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or UL 10C. Label all such doors and frames accordingly. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 3 B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized, 18 gage minimum. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. G. Shop Applied Primer For Ferrous Metals: Manufacturer or fabricator's standard, fast- curing, lead free, "universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated. Provide shop primer paint material that is compatible with finish paint systems indicated and is in compliance with the current EPA rules and regulations at the time and place of application. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 14 gage faces. 2. Exterior doors to be galvanized complying with ASTM A 525 (A60). Wipe coat galvanizing is not permitted. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 4 C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 16 gage faces. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 6. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 7. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 8. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch (14 gage) thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for level 3 steel doors 0.053 inch (16 gage) thick sheet steel. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 2. Post installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inchneight adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 5 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush all joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Side Light Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 9. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 10. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. b. Anchor Fasteners: #8 x '/2" zinc coated self tapping hex washer head screws, provide two per strap. 11. Door Silencers: Except on gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silences. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Do not provide holes or silencers at openings receiving weatherstripping. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 6 Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface- mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame molding on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A, Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2. Clean, treat, and paint (primer) exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 3. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease dirt, and other foreign materials before the application of paint. 4. Apply shop primer evenly to provide uniformly finished surfaces ready for finish painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 7 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION D. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. E. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. F. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. C. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Anchor type shall not obstruct filling the frame with grout. 5. When detailed for installation in prepared openings in concrete construction (dimpled frames), provide sealant between frame and concrete in accordance with provisions of"Joint Sealers" Section of these Specifications. 6. Windows shall have strap anchors within 12" of each corner and at 24" CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL DOORS, WINDOWS REEDLEY, CA. AND FRAMES SECTION 081113 - 8 o.c. max. Fasten to framing with 8 d nails. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within specified below. Shim as necessary. Comply with SDI-100. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat-or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 1 SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for hollow-metal door and frame assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 2 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: Prepare Samples to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction. Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if applicable. E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each unit to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 3 ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch 3. Construction: Knocked down [Face welded] [Full profile welded]. 4. Exposed Finish: [Prime] [Factory]. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. 3. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL FRAMES A. Construct exterior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch , with minimum A40 coating. 3. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish:Factory. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 4 C. Hollow-Metal Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 860. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum G60A60 coating. 3. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch , and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 5 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 6 b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. C. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 7. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA Al56.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 7 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 8 continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch , measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HOLLOW METAL FRAMES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 081213 - 9 E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081213 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards -A156 Series 2. UL10C — Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 2 B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Engineerural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Engineer, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings"with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s)to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware(including electromechanical hardware)for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 4. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures F. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 -4 C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable)to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual overhead door closer bodies. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the engineer, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1" to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 6 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Field verify and key locks to match Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 7 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 certified. l. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible. B. Narrow Stile Interconnected Locksets: 1. Interconnected locksets designed with a mortise case which contains both a latchbolt and deadbolt and allows simultaneous retraction of both the latchbolt and deadbolt with a single motion turning of the lever handle. 2. Locksets to be non-handed and available with a 1 1/8" or 1 1/2" standard backset. 3. Latchbolt and deadbolt shall be fabricated of wrought brass and bronze with a minimum 3/4" latchbolt throw and 1" deadbolt throw. 2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit standard ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered collars to resist vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA Al56.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA Al56.16. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 8 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: l. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design:As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2" wide stiles. 8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 9 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: l. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL. 4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. 2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 10 2.11 ENGINEERURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing:Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.13 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify engineer of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 2. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 12 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures"for project punch and reporting requirements including compliance with approved submittals and verification door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and engineer. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the engineer with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate selection for the material and application. B. HARDWARE SETS CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DOOR HARDWARE REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 087100 - 13 D1 3 Stainless tamperproof steel ball bearing hinges 1 Heavy Duty Mortise Lockset— Lever handles and Dead Bolt 1 Puck Lock and accessories (if applicable) 1 Door Closer 1 Threshold 1 Rain Guard 1 Sweep 1 Gasket/Weather Stripping 1 Door Stop (if applicable) D2,D3 3 Hinges 1 Heavy Duty Mortise Lockset -Lever handles and Dead Bolt 1 Door Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Threshold 1 Gasket 1 Door Stop (of applicable) END OF SECTION 087100 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for metal framing and backing. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 3. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long lengths for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: 24 inch square size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and environmental conditions are acceptable. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. B. Regular Type (Type "X" Fire Rated): 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. Use Type C (Fire Rated where required for fire assemblies): 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Other types and thicknesses specifically indicated or otherwise required to achieve fire- rated and sound rated wall and ceiling assemblies. 2.03 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control)joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.04 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Reinforced Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 3 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable-type sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: When a level 5 finish is required, for the final coat use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.05 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Gypsum Board Adhesive: 1. DAP Professional Drywall Construction Adhesive. 2. Liquid Nails Drywall Adhesive. D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 2.06 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Finish: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. 1. Texture Finish: Water-based, job- mixed, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 2. Texture: Medium orange peel, smooth sand, light orange peel or match existing adjacent finish. 3. Engineer to approve samples prior to application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Verify that all blocking, backing, strapping and framed openings as required for attachment of accessories, equipment, fixtures and cabinetry has been properly installed. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 4 3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing full height with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. Fully encapsulate interior side of insulated walls with gypsum board panels. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. 4. At fire-resistive wall and ceiling assemblies, install gypsum board panels cut tight to and around rafters, joints, blocking, beams and similar projections to provide full membrane protection to roof or floor deck above and/or to rated membrane applied to underside of roof/floor framing to achieve the fire protection required by referenced CBC UL or W-H assemblies and as indicated in drawings. Seal voids with fire resistant sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood or metal framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 5 acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.04 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 84 in specific locations approved by Engineer for visual effect and as indicated on the drawings. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. Leave 1/4" space for caulk where abutting dissimilar materials. 3.05 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GYPSUM BOARD REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 092900 - 6 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile and vinyl covered tackboard. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on the drawings. 4. Level4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 5. Level 5: Where wall coverings are specified or where indicated for a very smooth/level finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.06 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09290 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER RESINOUS FLOORING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 096723 - 1 SECTION 096723 — RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. High-performance resinous flooring systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Installer Certificates for Qualification: Signed by manufacturer stating that installers comply with specified requirements. C. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer. D. Maintenance Data: For maintenance manuals. E. Samples: Submit two 6" X 6" samples of each resinous flooring system applied to a rigid backing. Provide sample which is a true representation of proposed field applied finish. Provide sample color and texture for approval from Owner in writing or approved by General Contractor prior to installation. F. Product Schedule: For resinous flooring. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of flooring systems required for this Project. 1. Engage an installer who is approved in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. 2. Installer Letter of Qualification: Installer to provide letter stating that they have been in business for at least 5 years and listing 5 projects in the last 2 years of similar scope. For each project provide: project name, location, date of installation, contact information, size of project, and manufacturer of materials with system information. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site before work and mockups begin. D. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Do not cover up mockup area. 1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 16 square foot floor area selected by Architect. 2. Finish surfaces for verification of products, color, texture, and sheen. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 5. Mockup shall demonstrate desired slip resistance for review and approval by Owner's representative in writing. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER RESINOUS FLOORING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 096723 - 2 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. VOC Content of Resinous Flooring: Provide resinous flooring systems, for use inside the weatherproofing system, that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. 1. Resinous Flooring: 100 g/L. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE RESINOUS FLOORING A. Resinous Flooring: Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, high-performance, resin-based, monolithic floor surfacing and cove base system designed to produce a seamless floor B. System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern: As indicated from manufacturers 2. Slip Resistance: Provide slip resistant finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Prior to commencing Work, thoroughly examine all underlying and adjoining work, surfaces and conditions upon which Work is in any way dependent for perfect results. Report all conditions which affect Work. No "waiver of responsibility" for incomplete, inadequate or defective underlaying and adjoining work, surfaces and conditions will be considered, unless notice of such unsatisfactory conditions has been filed and agreed to in writing before Work begins. Commencement of Work constitutes acceptance of surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Remove all surface contamination, loose or weakly adherent particles, laitance, grease, oil, curing compounds, paint, dust and debris by blast track method or approved mechanical means (acid etch not allowed). If surface is CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER RESINOUS FLOORING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 096723 - 3 questionable try a test patch. Create a minimum surface profile for the system specified in accordance with the methods described in ICRI No. 03732 to achieve profile numbers as follows: C. 1. Thin film, to 10 mils CSP-1 to CSP-3 2. Thin and medium films, 10 to 40 mils CSP-3 to CSP-5 3. Self-leveling mortars, to 3/16" CSP-4 to CSP-6 4. Mortars and laminates, to 1/4" or more CSP-5 to CSP-10 D. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests indicated below. a. Calcium Chloride Test: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test per ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft. and perform 3 tests for the first 1000 sq. ft. and one additional test for every additional 1000 sq ft. b. In-Situ Probe Test: Perform relative-humidity test using in-situ probes per ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative-humidity-level measurement. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. All applicators and all other personnel in the area of the RF installation shall take all required and necessary safety precautions. All manufacturers' installation instructions shall be implicitly instructions shall be implicitly followed. B. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. C. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. E. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATIONS A. Install resinous floor over properly prepared concrete surface in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 1. Install the primer and/or base coats over thoroughly cleaned and prepared concrete. 2. Install topcoat over flooring after excess aggregate has been removed. 3. Maintain a slab temperature of 60°F to 80°F for 24 hours minimum before applying floor topping, or as instructed by manufacturer. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER RESINOUS FLOORING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 096723 -4 B. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. C. Sealant: Saw cut resinous floor topping at expansion joints in concrete slab. Fill sawcuts with sealant prior to final seal coat application. Follow manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. E. Slip Resistant Finish: Provide grit for slip resistance. F. Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.4 COMPLETED WORK A. Cleaning: Upon completion of the Work, clean up and remove from the premises surplus materials, tools, appliances, empty cans, cartons and rubbish resulting from the Work. Clean off all spattering and drippings, and all resulting stains. B. Protection: Protect Work in accordance with manufacturer's directions from damage and wear during the remainder of the construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. C. Contractor shall insure that coating is protected from any traffic until it is fully cured to the satisfaction of the coating manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096723 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 1 SECTION 099100— PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces, as indicated on the drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 2. Paint and finish exposed surfaces using the combination of materials listed on Painting Schedule in part 3 of this Section, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Engineer will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish except when specifically noted otherwise. 2. Priming or priming and finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory- performed or installer-performed under pertinent other Sections. Said provisions DO NOT negate the primers required to be applied on-site where finishing is a part of this Section. C. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and services needed in areas of alteration work and new construction to clean and prepare the surfaces, and to paint including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Interiors requiring painting of surfaces including gyp. board walls/ceilings, wood casework, trim, window panels/frames/sash, doors/frames and other similar items in the areas of work. 2. Exterior: a. Trim, window panels/frames/sash, doors/frames and other similar items in the area of work. D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and required labels. 1. Prefinished items include (but not necessarily limited to) the following factory- finished components: a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include (but not necessarily limited to) the following: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 2 a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Sandblasted concrete: Do not paint unless so scheduled. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Product Requirements". 2. Division 8 Section "Hollow Meta Doors and Window Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for surface preparation of gypsum board. F. The Finish Schedules and descriptive notes indicated on the drawings, indicates the location of interior room surfaces to be painted or finished. The Schedule indications are general and do not necessarily define the detail requirements. Include all detailed refinements and further instructions as may be given for the required complete finishing of all spaces and rooms. Interior Elevations, building Sections and Details, Room Finish Schedules and Color Schedules are all to be used in concert to determine requirements of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Green Seal Standard GS-11, Paints, First Edition, May 1993. B. Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti Corrosive Paints, Second Edition, January 1997. C. SCAQMD —South Coast Air Quality Management District 1. SCAQMD-1113— Rule 1113, Engineerural Coatings D. SJVAPCD — San Joaquin Valley Air Pollution Control District 1. SJVAPCD Regulations — Local Regulations E. SSPC — Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: "Paint," as used herein, means coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, epoxy, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 3 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Within 25 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to proceed, submit, for each paint system indicated, (include block fillers and primers) the following: 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. Submit only those products applicable to the project scope for work indicated in the drawings. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. Data proving compliance with the specified requirements and regulations shall be submitted for inclusion with warranty and certification information to be retained by the Owner. B. Samples 1. Following the selection of colors and glosses by the Engineer, submit Samples for the Engineer's review. If selection of colors/glosses has been scheduled, commence immediately with the sample submittal. a. Provide five Samples of each color and each gloss for each material on which the finish is specified to be applied. Submittals will be reviewed for color and texture/finish only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample. b. Except as otherwise directed by the Engineer, make Samples approximately 8" x 10" in size on materials simulating actual finished conditions. C. If so directed by the Engineer, submit Samples during progress of the Work in the form of actual application of the approved materials on actual surfaces to be painted. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface as directed, until required sheen, color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 2. Revise and resubmit each Sample as requested until the required gloss, color, and texture is achieved. Such Samples, when approved, will become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting the work of this Section. 3. Do not commence finish painting until approved Samples are on file at the job site. C. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 4 B. Paint coordination: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. Provide priming, undercoating, coating and finishing products produced by a single manufacturer source. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturers, and use only within recommended limits. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified system of paint finish. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrata. 3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used. 4. Provide barrier coats over noncompatible primers, or remove the primer and reprime as required. 5. Notify the Engineer in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime-coatings supplied under other Sections. C. Intent of the drawings is to have a completed product. Where work of the Contract disturbs existing finishes such that repair is required, said repair work is to be accomplished to logical architectural stopping points. D. Protect finished work from damage by other trades, workers and processes until work is turned over to the Owner. Provide temporary protective barriers and coverings when necessary. E. Protect other work/surfaces from damage, drips or overspray by using appropriate shields, tarps, masks, etc. Clean any errant paint from adjacent materials as required and in accordance with appropriate cleaning methods for both the paint and for the materials being cleaned. F. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with applicable codes and regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including those having jurisdiction over airborne emissions and industrial waste disposal. Where those requirements conflict with this Specification, comply with the more stringent provisions. 2. Regulatory changes may affect the formulation, availability, or use of specified coatings. Confirm availability of coatings to be used prior to job going out to bid and before start of painting project. 3. Comply with the current applicable regulations of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 4. Conform to SJVAPCD Regulations for maximum VOC limits. G. Quality verification requirements: These specifications call for a per-coat dry film thickness. The Contractor shall have available upon 48 hours notice a spectrographic measuring device (or other appropriate device) able to measure total thickness should there be a question as to the number of coats or compliance with the overall film thickness requirements. H. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 5 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. IF APPLICABLE: Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are below 45' F, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather only if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated (or cooled) within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 2. Applications may also continue during inclement weather only within the temperature and humidity limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable for use during application and drying periods. D. Avoid painting surfaces when exposed to direct sunlight. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents and location where used. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 4 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color and gloss applied. PART 2 — PRODUCTS CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 6 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS A. Paints: Provide Ready-Mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Pigments shall be fully ground maintaining soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to complete homogeneous mixture. Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks and sags. B. Acceptable materials: Provide the best professional quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers that comply with the current EPA rules and regulations in place where the project is located. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best professional line product, and not complying with the EPA rules and regulations, will not be acceptable. The quantity of titanium dioxide, the use of clays, aluminum silicate, talc and the purity of acrylic materials are a few of the criteria which will be used by the Engineer in determining equivalency of materials. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, solvents, and other materials not specified but required to achieve required finishes shall be of high quality and approved by manufacturer. D. Proprietary names used to designate colors, materials or finishes are not intended to imply that products of above-named manufacturers are unacceptable or excluded where equivalent products are available. E. Paint Pigments shall be pure, unfading, applicable types suited to the substrates and services to which they are to be applied. 2.4 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of the approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as allowed by the rules and regulations (i.e. EPA) in place at the project location. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment. 2.5 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. If materials are not listed for items such as patching, provide quality patching materials specifically developed for the use, applied as per the manufacturer's recommendations. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Engineer about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. C. Do not paint over dirt, dust, rust scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint finish. D. Beware of a condition known as "critical lighting". This condition causes shadows that accentuate even the slightest surface variations. A pigmented sealer will provide tooth for succeeding decorative coating, but "does not" equalize smoothness or surface texture. Any corrective action to drywall must be done by the drywall contractor prior to decorating. E. Follow all applicable procedures and requirements in the Lead Based Paint & Coating Removal Guidelines furnished by FUSD prior to applying new paint coatings. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect previously installed work and materials which may be affected by Work of this Section. 1. Protect prefinished surfaces, lawns, shrubbery and adjacent surfaces against paint and damage. 2. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or splatter from fouling surfaces to being painted. 3. Protect surfaces, equipment, and fixtures from damage resulting from use of fixed, movable and hanging scaffolding, planking, and staging. 3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION A.General: 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. 2. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing, and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. B. Stirring: 1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. 2. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 8 C. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers' recommendations and instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. a. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting each space or area, reinstall removed items without damaging treated surfaces by using workmen who are skilled in the necessary trades. b. Clean each surface to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Follow all applicable procedures and requirements in the Lead Based Paint& Coating Removal Guidelines furnished by FUSD prior to and during all preparation work. 3.5 PAINT APPLICATION A.General: 1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions and in strict compliance with all current EPA Standards, Rules and Regulations, and other governing regulations applicable at the time of application. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of material being applied. 2. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the Contract Documents. 3. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surface areas. 5. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless indicated otherwise. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 9 4. Touch up shop-applied prime coats which have been damaged, and touchup bare areas prior to start of finish coats application. 5. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved. b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of coats applied. 6. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of five feet. B. Schedule Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Apply prime coat on material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed or sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 2. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to suit adverse weather conditions. 3. Do not apply successive coatings until dry to where the paint feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each coat of materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. D. Brush applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Completely cover to provide opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. E. Spray application: 1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Engineer, and allowed by governing regulations, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. 3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass. F. For completed work, match the approved Samples as to texture, color, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements. G. Interior: Use "stipple" finish where enamel is specified. Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 10 H. Miscellaneous surfaces and procedures: 1. Exposed mechanical/electrical items (not pre-finished): a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers, vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, or as directed. b. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. C. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. d. Paint exposed piping, conduit and fittings, vents and jacks, pipe hangers and supports, electrical trays, piping shrouds, exposed equipment supports and frames. 2. Exposed pipe and duct insulation: a. Apply one coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed under other Sections; apply two coats on such surfaces when unprepared. b. Match color of adjacent surfaces. C. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting. 3. Hardware: a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces; b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the door frame unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 4. Wet areas: b. For oil base paints, use 1% phenolmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol. C. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophnate. 5. Equipment: Unless otherwise noted, paint the following equipment items: a. Mechanical equipment and exposed roof HVAC Units and platforms. b. Electrical Panels and switchgear C. Accessory items 3.6 CLEAN-UP AND FINAL PROTECTION A. During the progress of work, remove paint splatters from window glass and other surfaces. Remove splattering paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finish surfaces. B. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Engineer. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for the protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 2. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3. Remove all rubbish, paint cans, and accumulated materials resulting from work in each space or room. All areas shall be left in a clean, orderly condition. 3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PAINTING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 099100 - 11 A.General: 1. Materials required to complete the painting are herein specified and listed by material number and name for each type of finish and substrate, solely to establish a standard for kind, quality and function. Unlisted manufacturers of equivalent products, upon compliance with these specifications and with the requirements of specification Section"Product Substitutions", may submit their products for approval. 2. Except for specialty items or as otherwise specified, all materials shall be by one manufacturer. 3.8 PAINTING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE A.Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. This list complied with the EPA rules and regulations at last checking. Changes in product compliance after the date listed above should be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 3.9 PAINTING FINISHES A. Apply the following finishes to the surfaces specified and/or as scheduled on the finish and paint schedule on the Drawings. Apply all materials in accord with manufacturer's instructions on properly prepared surfaces and foundations coats. Manufacturers shall verify that the paint type specified is the appropriate product for the location and application depicted on the drawings. 1. If not included in the Drawings, the Engineer will issue a Color Schedule prior to start of painting to designate the various colors and locations required for work. 2. Apply additional primers, sealers and fillers in addition to the listed finish coats as required for the substrate and as recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 099100 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SELF-SUPPORING RADIO TOWER REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 133613 - 1 SECTION 133613 — 250' SELF-SUPPORTING RADIO TOWER 1. DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall furnish and install a 250-foot tall (above grade line) self-supporting tower and all associated site work including fencing. The Contractor shall supply all supervision, labor, materials, equipment and services to construct the tower per the detailed specifications within. Each unit of installation shall be clearly defined and shall be approved by the Engineer before work begins. The Contractor is responsible for the work of all sub-contractors. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations, laws, ordinances, and requirements of all governmental agencies and authorities that have jurisdiction applicable to the project. 2. DESIGN. A. Design Standard The following documents form a part of this specification. a. Grounding Standards: Motorola R-56 or approved equal is required throughout the project. b. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual of Steel Construction c. Electronic Industries Assoc. (TIA/EIA-222-G) Standard or latest issue Structural Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and Antenna Supporting Structures d. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Welding Code e. FAA Advisory Circular#AC 70/7460 Obstruction Marking and Lighting f. National Electric Code (NEC) Tower Lighting Kits (as required) Not required under 200 Feet. g. American Institute of Steel Construction Specification for Structural Joints using h. ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts i. FCC Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations — Part 17 j. American Concrete Institute ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete k. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice I. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)for: 1. A-36 and A572 Structural Steel 2. A-53 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe 3. A-123 Zinc (hot-dipped galvanized coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips) 4. A-153 Zinc Coatings (hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 5. B-695 Coatings of Zinc mechanically deposited on Iron and Steel (minimum thickness 0.0026") 6. A-385 Zinc Coating (hot-dip) on assembled Steel Products 7. A-307 Low-Carbon Steel externally and internally threaded standard fasteners 8. A-325 High Strength Steel Bolts 9. A-500 Steel Tubing 10. A-615 Reinforcing Bars CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SELF-SUPPORING RADIO TOWER REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 133613 - 2 11. A-706 Reinforcing Bars 12. ASTM C-9 Ready-mixed Concrete In the event of a conflict between this specification and the codes, standards, and specifications below, the most stringent requirement shall govern. B. Design Requirements The tower structure shall be designed in compliance with the latest version of TIA/EIA-222-G and all requirements included in the detailed specifications. The tower design shall accommodate the following: a) The Radio Tower shall stand 250 foot in height, must be self-supporting with 3-sided truss configuration. b) Tower legs must be solid rod, diagonals must be angle or solid rod. c) Provide a provision for an antenna system. d) Lighting: Provide a dual lighting for daytime and nighttime operations complying with the current version of the FAA Advisory Circular AC70/7460. e) Provide lightning protection. f) Furnish a climbing ladder, safety climbing cable, fall safety system and fall protection device designed and constructed to meet all applicable OSHA and ANSI standards. Provide g) Tower Grounding including air terminal system, lightning dissipators, down conductor, grounding ring, grounding rods and radio equipment ground conductor. h) Provide X2 36" antenna standoffs to be installed at the 250' mark of the tower. i) Provide X1 Sector Frame Tower Kit to be installed at the 150' mark of the tower. j) Tower will include a full length 12" ladder rack with coaxial hangers. k) Provide 24" wide ice bridge from the tower to building penetration. C. Design calculations and shop drawings 1. Drawings and design calculations shall be approved and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of California. Final and complete tower design, drawings and specifications shall be submitted by the Contractor and accepted by Fresno County building department and Resident Engineer prior to fabrication and construction. 2. Ensure the correctness and completeness of the drawings, and also the shop fit and field connections. 3. Tower designer of contractor shall provide foundation design and while soil investigations are provided for bid purposes, shall provide their own soil analysis and design accordingly signed by a PE registered in the State of California. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SELF-SUPPORING RADIO TOWER REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 133613 - 3 3. MEASUREMENT This item will be measured by the acceptable tower in place of the height specified. 4. TOWER ACCEPTANCE Notify the Fresno County ISD Radio Engineers after the completion of the installation of tower and antenna system. The purpose of this notification is to allow testing of the antenna system by Fresno County ISD Radio Engineers. If a failure is noted, Work with Fresno County ISD Radio Engineers to resolve and correct any and all problems. System acceptance will occur after a minimum of 5 consecutive failure free days of operation following installation. 5. PAYMENT The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under"Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for"250' Self Supporting Radio Tower". This price is full compensation for designing, furnishing, fabricating and installing self supporting radio towers and for materials, tools, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION 133613 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 1 SECTION 200100 — GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The preceding General Conditions shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here. The provisions of this Section shall also apply to the following Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25 of these Specifications and shall be considered a part of those Divisions. 1.2 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. All work and materials shall be in accordance with current rules and regulations of applicable codes. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Should the Drawings or Specifications call for material or methods of construction of a higher quality or standard than required by these codes, the Drawings and Specifications shall govern. Applicable codes and regulations include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: California Building Code CCR Title 24, Part 2 California Electrical Code CCR Title 24, Part 3 California Mechanical Code CCR Title 24, Part 4 California Plumbing Code CCR Title 24, Part 5 California Energy Code CCR Title 24, Part 6 California Fire Code CCR Title 24, Part 9 Local Codes 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Provide: The term "provide" as used in these specifications or on the drawings shall mean furnish and install. B. Piping: The term "piping" as used in these specifications or on the drawings shall mean all pipe, fittings, valves, hangers, insulation, etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system. C. Ductwork: The terms "duct" or"ductwork" as used in these specifications or on the drawings shall mean all ducts, fittings,joints, dampers, hangers, insulation, etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system. D. Wiring: The term "wiring" as used in these specifications or on the drawings shall mean all wiring, conduit, boxes, connections, transformers, relays, switches etc. as may be required for a complete and functional system. 1.4 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall take out all permits and arrange for all tests in connection with his work as required. All charges are to be included in the work. 1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 2 A. Examination: Before starting work, thoroughly examine existing and newly completed underlying and adjoining work and conditions on which the installation of this work depends. Report to the Engineer in writing all conditions which might adversely affect this work. B. Layout: Layout of materials, equipment and systems is generally diagrammatic unless specifically dimensioned. Some work may be shown offset for clarity. The actual locations of all materials, piping, ductwork, fixtures, equipment, supports, etc. shall be carefully planned prior to installation of any work in order to avoid all interference with each other, or with structural, electrical, architectural or other elements. C. Verification: If discrepancies are discovered between drawing and specification requirements, the more stringent requirement shall apply. All conflicts shall be called to the attention of the Engineer prior to the installation of any work or the ordering of any equipment. No work shall be prefabricated or installed prior to this coordination. No costs will be allowed to the Contractor for any prefabrication or installation performed prior to this coordination. Verify the proper voltage and phase of all equipment with the electrical plans. D. Location of Utilities Prior to Trenching or Earthwork: The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of two business days prior to beginning trenching or earthwork. Prior to this notification, the Contractor shall have marked all proposed trenches with paint and shall have contacted a utility locating company and have had this company mark all found underground utilities with paint. The Contractor shall then coordinate and arrange for a site visit with the Owner to review the proposed trenching and/or earthwork areas. Trenching and/or earthwork shall not begin until the Owner agrees. Repair and/or compensation for repair of marked utilities is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner retains the right to either self-perform the repair or require the Contractor to complete the repair, as directed by the Owner. If while performing the work, the Contractor discovers utilities that have not been marked, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner verbally and in writing. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. The Contractor shall repair any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for any resulting damage to other work which appears within the guarantee period. These Specifications may extend the period of the guarantee for certain items. Where such extensions are called for, or where items are normally provided with guarantee periods in excess of that called for in the General Conditions, the certificate of guarantee shall be furnished to the Owner through the Engineer. 1.7 QUIETNESS A. Piping, ductwork and equipment shall be arranged and supported so that vibration is a minimum and is not transmitted to the structure. 1.8 DAMAGES BY LEAKS CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 3 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by leaks in the temporary or permanent piping systems prior to completion of work and during the period of the guarantee, and for damages caused by disconnected pipes or fittings, and the overflow of equipment prior to completion of the work. 1.9 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. The Contractor shall examine the site, compare it with Plans and Specifications, and shall have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for any extra expense to which he may be put due to failure or neglect on his part to make such an examination. 1.10 COMPATIBILITY WITH EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Any work which is done as an addition, expansion or remodel of an existing system shall be compatible with that system. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise noted. Materials and equipment of a given type shall be by the same manufacturer. Materials and equipment shall be free of dents, scratches, marks, shipping tags and all defacing features at time of project acceptance. Materials and equipment shall be covered or otherwise protected during construction as required to maintain the material and equipment in new factory condition until project acceptance. All HVAC equipment and ductwork shall be covered, sealed and protected per CGBSC Section 5.504.3 from delivery on site until final start-up. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Within 30 days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit six copies of shop drawings for all materials, equipment, etc. proposed for use on this project. Material or equipment shall not be ordered or installed until written review is processed by the Engineer. All shop drawings must comply with the following: 1. Shop drawings are required for all material and equipment items and shall include manufacturer's name and catalog numbers, dimensions, capacities, performance curves, and all other characteristics and accessories as listed in the specifications or on the drawings. Descriptive literature shall be current factory brochures and submittal sheets. Capacities shall be certified by the factory. FAX submittals are not acceptable. 2. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time in a neat and orderly fashion in a suitable binder with title sheet including Project, Engineer and Contractor, table of contents, and indexed tabs dividing each group of materials or item of equipment. All items shall be identified by the specification paragraph number for which they are proposed. All equipment CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 -4 shall also be identified by the mark number as indicated on drawings. 3. All capacities, characteristics, and accessories called for in the specifications or on the drawings shall be high-lighted, circled or underlined on the shop drawings. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included for items that are not scheduled. Data must be complete enough to permit detailed comparison of every significant characteristic which is specified, scheduled or detailed. 4. Electronic Submittals: Where allowed by Division 01, electronic submittals are acceptable providing the following requirements are met. Electronic submittals which do not comply with these requirements will be rejected. a. Submittal shall be a single file in PDF format, with bookmarks for table of contents and each tab, and sub-bookmarks for each item. b. All text shall be searchable (except text that is part of a graphic). C. Submittal shall include all items noted in 1 through 3 above, except a binder is not required. d. Electronic submittals shall be processed through normal channels. Do not submit directly to the Engineer unless the Engineer is the prime consultant for the project. e. Contractor shall provide Owner and Owner's Representative with hard copies of the final submittal. Coordinate exact number required with Owner through Architect/Engineer. B. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed in the specifications or on the drawings represent the standard of quality and features desired. Proposed substitutions shall comply with the Owner's General Requirements. Calculations and other detailed data indicating how the item was selected shall be included. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility that substituted items or procedures will meet the specifications and job requirements and shall be responsible for the cost of redesign and modifications to the work caused by these items. At the Engineer's request, furnish locations where equipment similar to the substituted equipment is installed and operating along with the user's phone numbers and contact person. Satisfactory operation and service history will be considered in the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. C. Review: Submittals will be reviewed for general conformance with the design concept, but this review does not guarantee quantity shown, nor does it supersede the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials, equipment and installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall agree that shop drawing submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contractor shall agree that if CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 5 deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawings and design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Engineer, the design drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. If a resubmittal is required, submit a complete copy of the Engineer's review letter requiring such with the resubmittal. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS A. All material, equipment, devices, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular item. The Contractor shall be responsible for all installations contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall make all necessary changes and revisions to achieve such compliance. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be delivered to and maintained at the job site through the construction of the project. 1.14 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. All work shall be scheduled subject to the review of the Engineer and the Owner. No work shall interfere with the operation of the existing facilities on or adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall have at all times, as conditions permit, a sufficient force of workmen and quantity of materials to install the work contracted for as rapidly as possible consistent with good work, and shall cause no delay to other Contractors engaged upon this project or to the Owner. HVAC equipment and functions, whether existing or new, shall be maintained in operating condition whenever the facility is occupied, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 1.15 DEMOLITION A. Existing equipment, ducts, piping, etc. noted for removal shall be removed and delivered to the Owner at a location to be determined by the Owner. Those items determined by the Owner to be of no value shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Existing piping, ducts, services, etc. requiring capping shall be capped below floors, behind walls, above ceilings or above roof unless otherwise noted. Where items are removed, patch the surfaces to match the existing surfaces. 1.16 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL REMOVAL A. All hazardous material removal will be by the Owner. Hazardous material is to be removed before the work is started. If the Contractor discovers hazardous material which has not been removed, the Contractor shall immediately cease work in that area and promptly notify the Owner. 1.17 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The locations and dimensions for openings through walls, floors, ceilings, foundations, footings, etc. required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Except as noted below, the actual openings and the required cutting and patching shall be provided by other Divisions. Coring through existing concrete or masonry walls, floors, ceilings, CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 6 foundations, footings, etc., and saw cutting of concrete floors or asphaltic concrete required to accomplish the work under this Specification Division shall be provided under this Division. Patching of these surfaces shall be provided by other Divisions. Cutting or coring shall not impair the strength of the structure. Any damage resulting from this work shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.18 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. General: Barrel of pipe shall have uniform support on sand bed. Sand shall be free from clay or organic material, suitable for the purpose intended and shall be of such size that 90 percent to 100 percent will pass a No. 4 sieve and not more than 5 percent will pass a No. 200 sieve. Unless otherwise noted, minimum earth cover above top of pipe or tubing outside building walls shall be 24", not including base and paving in paved areas. B. Excavation: Width of trench at top of pipe shall be minimum of 16", plus the outside diameter of the pipe. Provide all shoring required by site conditions. Where over excavation occurs, provide compacted sand backfill to pipe bottom. Where groundwater is encountered, remove to keep excavation dry, using well points and pumps as required. C. Backfill: 1. 6" Below, Around, and to 12"Above Pipe: Material shall be sand. Place carefully around and on top of pipe, taking care not to disturb piping, consolidate with vibrator. 2. One Foot Above Pipe to Grade: Material shall be sandy or silty loam, free of lumps, laid in 6" layers, uniformly mixed to proper moisture and compacted to required density. If backfill is determined to be suitable and required compaction is demonstrated by laboratory test, water compaction in 6" layers may be used, subject to review by Engineer. D. Compaction: Compact to density of 95% within building and under walkways, driveways, traffic areas, paved areas, etc. and to 90% elsewhere. Demonstrate proper compaction by testing at top, bottom and one-half of the trench depth. Perform these tests at three locations per 100' of trench. 1.19 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Existing services and systems shall be maintained except for short intervals when connections are made. The Contractor shall be responsible for interruptions of services and shall repair damage done to any existing service caused by the work. If utilities not indicated on the drawings are uncovered during excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately. 1.20 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING A. All ferrous pipe below grade (except cast iron) shall have a factory applied protective coating of extruded high density polyethylene, 35 to 70 mils total CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 7 thickness, X-Tru-Coat, Scotchkote. All fittings and areas of damaged coating shall be covered with two layer double wrap of 10 mil polyvinyl tape to total thickness of 40 mils. John-Mansville. Protective coating shall be extended 6" above surrounding grade. 1.21 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide access doors as required where equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, etc. are not otherwise accessible. Access doors shall match the wall or ceiling finish and fire rating as indicated on the Architectural drawings. 16-gage steel frame and 14-gage steel door with paintable finish, except in ceramic tile, where door shall be 16-gage stainless steel with satin finish. Continuous hinge. Deliver doors to the General Contractor for installation. Milcor. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum sizes shall be as follows: 1 valve up to 1-1/2" 12" x 12" 1 valve up to 3" 16" x 16" 1.22 HOUSEKEEPING PAD A. Housekeeping pads shall be 6" high concrete, 3000 PSI strength, unless otherwise noted. Pad shall extend 6" beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment, unless otherwise noted. The top edge of the pad shall have a 3/4" chamfer. Unless otherwise noted, the pad shall have#4 reinforcing bars at 12" on center, each way, located at mid-depth of the pad. If not poured at the same time as the slab with pad rebar tied to slab rebar, the pad shall be anchored as follows: Drill 5/8" diameter, 3" deep hole in slab. Install 7" long, #4 rebar with Simpson Set epoxy system. Provide a minimum of 4 of these anchors per pad, but no more than 4 feet apart in either direction. Anchor points shall be 12"from the edge of the pad. 1.23 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Steel bolt with expansion anchor requiring a drilled hole - powder driven anchors, adhesive anchors and concrete screws are not acceptable. Re-use of screw anchor holes shall not be permitted. Minimum concrete embedment shall be 4-1/2 diameters. Minimum spacing shall be 12 diameters center to center and 6 diameters center to edge of concrete. Post-installed anchors in concrete used for component anchorage shall be pre-qualified for seismic application in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC-ES AC193. Post-installed anchors in masonry used for component anchorage shall be pre-qualified for seismic applications in accordance with ICC-ES AC01. Maximum allowable loads for tension and shear shall be as determined by Calculation in compliance with ACI 318-14, Chapter 17, and the anchor's ICC or IAPMO evaluation report. Hilti, Powers, Red Head. 1.24 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING AND OTHER SUPPORTS A. Mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, conduit, etc.) shall be anchored in accordance with the CBC. All systems mounted on concrete shall be secured with a concrete anchor at each mounting point. All air handlers shall be mounted on spring isolators. Secure base plate as indicated above. Attachment of equipment, ductwork, piping, conduit, etc. supported on curbs or platforms shall be CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 8 made to the side of curbs and platforms, where possible. Where screws or lag bolts must be installed through the top of a sheet metal cap, the installation shall be as follows. Pre-drill pilot hole. Fill pilot hole with polyurethane sealant. Install screw or lag bolt with a flat washer and an EPDM washer adjacent to the sheet metal. 1.25 SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Any structural element required to hang or support piping, ducts or equipment provided under this Division and not shown on other drawings shall be provided under this Division. B. Mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, etc.) shall be provided with supports and seismic restraints in accordance with the CBC. Submit anchorage calculations and details stamped and signed by a structural engineer registered in the State of California. Submit shop drawings showing location, type and detail of restraints. Submit manufacturer's data for restraints. Restraint system shall be Mason West, Inc. (OSHPD OPM 0043-13), or other OSHPD preapproved system. 1.26 PAINTING A. Paint all black iron supports, hangers, anchors, etc. with two coats of rust resisting primer. Also paint all uninsulated black iron piping exposed to weather with two coats of rust resisting primer. 1.27 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND PATCHING A. Whenever any part of the mechanical systems penetrates the roof or exterior wall, the openings shall be flashed and counter-flashed water tight with minimum 22 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Flashing shall extend not less than eight inches from the duct, pipe, or supporting member in all directions unless detailed otherwise. All roof penetrations and patching shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the National Roofing Contractor's Association and the Owner's roofing standards. 1.28 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Above Grade Piping: Provide markers on piping which is either exposed or concealed in accessible spaces. For piping systems, other than drain and vent lines, indicate the fluid conveyed or its abbreviation, either by pre-printed markers or stenciled marking, and include arrows to show direction of flow. Pre-printed markers shall be the type that wrap completely around the pipe, requiring no other means of fastening such as tape, adhesive, etc. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. Locate markers at ends of lines, near major branches and other interruptions including equipment in the line, where lines pass through floors, walls or ceilings or otherwise pass into inaccessible spaces, and at 50' maximum intervals along exposed portions of lines. Marking of short branches and repetitive branches for equipment connections is not required. B. Below Grade Piping: Bury a continuous, pre-printed, bright-colored, metallic ribbon marker capable of being located with a metal detector with each underground pipe. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 9 Locate directly over buried pipe, 6" to 8" below finished grade. C. Equipment: All equipment shall be identified with a plastic laminated, engraved nameplate which bears the unit mark number as indicated on the drawings (e.g. AC-4) and identifies the area or space served by the equipment. Provide 1/2" high lettering -white on black background. Nameplates shall be permanently secured to the exterior of the unit. D. Valves: Provide stamped brass valve tags with brass hooks or chains on all valves of each piping system, excluding check valves, valves within equipment, faucets, stops and shut-off valves at fixtures and other repetitive terminal units. Prepare and submit a tagged-valve schedule, listing each valve by tag number, location and piping service. 1.29 CLEANING A. Progressively and at completion of the job, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all of his work, removing all debris, stain and marks resulting from his work. This includes but is not limited to building surfaces, piping, equipment and ductwork, inside and out. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, labels, tags, tape, rust, and all foreign material. B. At the end of each work day, the Contractor shall cover all open ends of piping and ductwork with protective plastic. 1.30 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Printed: Three copies of Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Wiring Diagrams for all equipment and parts list for all faucets, trim, valves, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer. All instructions shall be clearly identified by marking them with the same designation as the equipment item to which they apply (e.g. AC-3). All Wiring Diagrams shall agree with reviewed Shop Drawings and indicate the exact field installation. All instructions shall be submitted at the same time and shall be bound in a suitable binder with tabs dividing each type of equipment (e.g. Pumps, Fans, Motors, etc.). Each binder shall be labeled indicating "Operating and Maintenance Instructions, Project Title, Contractor, Date" and shall have a Table of Contents listing all items included. Electronic O & M's shall comply with the Electronic submittal requirements in this Section. B. Verbal: The Contractor shall verbally instruct the Owner's maintenance staff in the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The controls contractor shall present that portion of the instructions that apply to the control system. The Engineer's office shall be notified 48 hours prior to this meeting. 1.31 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain one set of prints for the project, upon which a record of all construction changes shall be made. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall maintain a record of all deviations in the work from that indicated on the drawings. Final location of all underground work shall be recorded by depth from finished grade and by offset distance from permanent surface structures, i.e. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL MECHANICAL REEDLEY, CA. PROVISIONS SECTION 200100 - 10 building, curbs, walks. In addition, the water, gas, sewer, under floor duct, etc. within the building shall be recorded by offset distances from building walls. An electronic copy of the original drawings will be made available to the Contractor. The Contractor shall transfer the changes, notations, etc. from the marked-up prints to the electronic copy. The record drawings (marked-up prints, electronic drawings disc and a hard copy) shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. 1.32 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. All acceptance testing as required by California Code of Regulations, Title 24, and as noted on the Certificate of Compliance form, (where applicable), shall be performed and documented by an Acceptance Test Technician (ATT). These documents must be provided to the building inspector during construction and must be completed through an Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider (ATTCP). The Contractor shall submit a copy of the documentation to the Engineer for review (hardcopy or electronic), prior to submitting to Administrative Authority. END OF SECTION 20 01 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 1 SECTION 220400 - PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS A. The General Mechanical Provisions, Section 20 01, 00, shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here. 1.2 SCOPE: A. Included: Provide all labor, materials and services necessary for complete, lawful and operating systems as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified here. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Sanitary sewer system. 2. Drain system (including condensate drain). 3. All fixtures as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified. 4. Demolition as indicated on drawings. Where demolition is called for, remove all equipment, piping, braces, housekeeping pads, supports and related items no longer required. B. Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete and reinforcing steel unless specifically called for on the drawings or specifications. 2. Painting unless specifically called for in the drawings or specifications. 3. Carpentry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS: A. Sanitary Sewer: 1. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping (Non-Pressurized): a. Inside Building and Within Five Feet of Building Walls: Standard weight coated cast iron pipe and fittings. Plain end, CISPI 301, ASTM A888, or hub end with rubber gaskets, ASTM A74, ASTM C564. ABI, Tyler, Charlotte. Couplings shall be heavy-duty shielded couplings. Type 304 stainless steel, with neoprene gasket, ASTM C1540. Husky HD 2000, Clamp-All 80, Mission HeavyWeight. MG Couplings are also acceptable. 2" and smaller exposed to view shall be galvanized steel, ASTM A53, with coated cast iron recessed drainage fittings, ANSI B16.12. CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 2 Where required by soil conditions, as determined by the method described in ASTM A74-09, Appendix X2, below grade cast iron pipe and fittings shall have 8 mil (minimum) Polyethylene Encasement (Poly Wrap), Per ANSI/AWWA C 105/A21.5. b. Outside Building: Solid wall Schedule 40 PVC,ASTM D1785, D2665, with solvent weld DWV fittings, ASTM D2665, D3311. Piping with less than 24" of cover outside building walls shall be cast iron. 2. Cleanouts: Comparable models of Josam, Wade, Mifab or Zurn are acceptable. Grease plug prior to installation. Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4023 with nickel bronze top in finished areas; Smith 4223 in utility areas. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4532 with stainless steel cover and screw. Pipe Cleanouts: Iron body with threaded brass plug. Site cleanouts more than 5' outside building may be PVC with PVC plug. 3. Cleanout Box: Precast reinforced concrete. Cast iron lid marked for service. Christy F8 in foot traffic areas; G5 in roadways. Provide with PVC pipe extension down to top of pipe. B. Drain Piping (including Condensate): Hard temper seamless copper, ASTM B88. Wrought copper fittings, ANSI B16.22. Type L with brazed joints (1100F, min.). 1- 1/2" and smaller above grade may be soldered, 95-5 tin-antimony solder. All nipples shall be lead-free red brass (85% copper).. C. Miscellaneous Piping Items: 1. Pipe Support: a. Pipe Hanger: Steel "J" hanger with side bolt for piping 4" and smaller; steel clevis hanger for piping 5" and larger. Load and jam nuts. Size and maximum load per manufacturer's recommendation. Felt liner for copper piping. Hanger and rod shall have galvanized finish. B-Line, Anvil, Unistrut. b. Isolating Shield: Galvanized steel shell and reinforcing ribs. 1/4" non-conducting hair felt pad. Pipe hanger in accordance with paragraph above. Increase hanger size per manufacturer's recommendation. B-Line, Semco, Superstrut. C. Construction Channel: 12-gage, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" galvanized steel channel. Single or multiple section. Self-locking nuts and fittings. B-Line, Anvil, Unistrut. 2. Flashing: Vent flashing shall be 4 Ib/ft2 lead, 16" sq. flange, length sufficient to be turned down 2" into vent. Oatey. Flashing for other piping through roof shall be prefabricated galvanized steel roof jacks with 16" sq. flange. Provide clamp-on storm collar and seal water tight with mastic. For cold process built-up roof, material shall be 4 Ib/ft2 lead instead of galvanized steel. For single-ply roofing, use the roofing manufacturer's recommended flashing material. CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 3 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: A. General: All piping insulation materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under ASTM E-84 and UL 723 not exceeding a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. B. PVC Jacket (for pipe, fittings and valves): Pre-molded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets, 0.020" thickness. Size to match application. Provide solvent weld adhesive and PVC vapor barrier pressure sealing tape by same manufacturer. Zeston. C. Foamed Plastic: Rubber based elastomeric preformed pipe insulation. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu in/hr ft2 OF at a mean temperature of 70°F. 1" thick. Provide adhesive by same manufacturer. Armacell Armaflex. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Piping Layout: Piping shall be concealed in walls, above the ceilings, or below grade unless otherwise noted. Exposed piping shall run parallel to room surfaces; location to be approved by Architect. No structural member shall be weakened by cutting, notching, boring or otherwise, unless specifically allowed by structural drawings and/or specifications. Where such cutting is required, reinforcement shall be provided as specified or detailed. All piping shall be installed in a manner to ensure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets, prevent any unusual noise, and permit complete drainage of the system. All piping shall be installed to permit expansion and contraction without strain on piping or equipment. Vertical lines shall be installed to allow for building settlement without damage to piping. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal sizes unless otherwise noted. 2. Joints: a. Threaded: Pipe shall be cut square and reamed to full size. Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Joint compound or tape suitable for conveyed fluid shall be applied to male thread only. Joints shall be made with three threads exposed. b. Brazed: Filler rod shall be of suitable or the same alloy as pipe. Brazing filler metal shall have a minimum melting point of 1100F. Brazing shall be performed by a Certified Brazer as certified by an organization/institution that uses standards recognized by the American Welding Society (AWS) and meets the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section 9. C. Open Ends: Open ends of piping shall be capped during progress of work to preclude foreign matter. d. Electrical Equipment: Piping shall not be run over electrical panels, CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 4 motor control centers or switchboards. 3. Fittings and Valves: a. Standard Fittings: All joints and changes in direction shall be made with standard fittings. Close nipples shall not be used. b. Reducers: Pipe size reduction shall be made with bell reducer fittings. Bushings shall not be used. C. Unions: A union shall be installed on the leaving side of each valve, at all sides of automatic valves, at equipment connections, and elsewhere as necessary for assembly or disassembly of piping. 4. Pipe Support: a. General: Hangers shall be placed to support piping without strain on joints or fittings. Maximum spacing between supports shall be as specified below. Actual spacing requirements will depend on structural system. Side beam clamps shall be provided with retaining straps to secure the clamp to the opposite side of the beam. Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamp at 20' on center(maximum). Support pipe within 12" of all changes in direction. Support individual pipes with pipe hanger. Copper piping systems which protrude through a surface for connection to a fixture stop or other outlet shall be secured with a drop ell, Nibco 707-3-5, to a Holdrite Model #SB1 bracket; nipple through surface shall be threaded brass. (1) Pressure Pipe: Maximum Spacing* Pipe Size (Inches) Between Supports (ft.) Copper Sch. 40 steel 1/2 6 6 3/4 6 8 1 6 8 1-1/4 6 10 1-1/2 6 10 2 10 10 2-1/2 10 10 3 10 10 4 10 10 6 10 10 *Based on straight lengths of pipe with couplings only. Provide additional supports for equipment, valves or other fittings. Seismic requirements may reduce maximum spacing. (2) Gravity Drain Pipe: Piping shall be supported at each length of pipe or fitting, but in no case at greater spacing than indicated above for pressure pipe. CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 5 b. Trapeze: Trapeze hangers of construction channel and pipe clamps may be used. Submit design to Engineer for review. 5. Miscellaneous: a. Escutcheons: Provide chrome plated metal escutcheons where piping penetrates walls, ceilings, or floors in finished areas. b. Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concrete shall be provided with pipe sleeves. Allow 1" annular clearance between sleeve and pipe for piping 3" and smaller, otherwise 2" annular clearance. Piping through walls and footings below grade shall be sealed with Link-Seal. C. Pipes Passing through Fire Rated Surfaces: Pipes passing through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc. shall have the annular space surrounding the pipe or pipe insulation sealed with fire rated materials in accordance with the requirements of 2022 CBC Section 714. d. Dielectric Couplings: Dielectric couplings shall be installed wherever piping of dissimilar metals are joined, except that bronze valves may be installed in ferrous piping without dielectric couplings. B. Sanitary Sewer Piping: 1. General: Where inverts are not indicated, sanitary sewer piping shall be installed at 1/4" per foot pitch. Piping 4" and larger may be installed at 1/8" per foot pitch where structural or other limitations prevent installation at a greater pitch. Bell and spigot piping shall be installed with barrel on sand bed; excavate hole for bell. 2. Cleanouts: Install cleanouts at ends of lines, at changes of direction greater than 45 degrees, and at not greater than 100 foot intervals. Locate interior cleanouts in accessible locations and bring flush to finished surface. 3. Vents: Vents shall terminate not less than 6" above the roof nor less than 12"from any vertical surface nor within 10' of any outside air intake. Install horizontal vent lines at 1/4" per foot pitch. Offset vents 2' minimum from gutters, parapets, ridges and roof flashing. C. Drain Piping (Including Condensate): Install with constant pitch to receptacle, 1/4" per foot where possible, otherwise 1/8" per foot minimum. Provide TEE with clean-out plug at all changes of direction. Provide trap at each air handling unit to prevent air leakage. Only equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be connected with flexible connection. Piping not concealed in wall structure, above ceilings or below floors shall be chrome plated brass, except in equipment rooms, piping shall be galvanized steel. P&T relief and water heater drain piping shall be galvanized steel. Provide secondary drain piping where required. 3.2 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION: CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER PLUMBING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 220400 - 6 A. Condensate Piping Freeze Protection: All condensate piping above grade or other areas subject to freezing (i.e. ventilated attics, uninsulated exterior soffits, etc.) shall be insulated, 1" thick insulation. Cover with PVC jacketing where exposed to view. Apply at least two coats of protective finish where exposed to weather. 3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION: A. General: It shall be the responsibility of the equipment installer to insure that no work done under other specification sections shall in any way block, or otherwise hinder the equipment. All equipment shall be securely anchored in place. B. Connections to Equipment: Where size changes are required for connections to equipment, they shall be made immediately adjacent to the equipment and, if possible, inside the equipment cabinet. 3.4 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS: A. General: Unless otherwise directed, tests shall be witnessed by a representative of the Architect. Work to be concealed shall not be enclosed until prescribed tests are made. Should any work be enclosed before such tests, the Contractor shall, at his expense, uncover, test and repair all work to original conditions. Leaks and defects shown by tests shall be repaired and entire work retested. Tests may be made in sections, however, all connections between sections previously tested and new section shall be included in the new test. B. Gravity Systems: 1. Sanitary Sewer: All ends of the sanitary sewer system shall be capped and lines filled with water to the top of the highest vent, 10' above grade minimum. This test shall be made before any fixtures are installed. Test shall be maintained until all joints have been inspected, but no less than 2 hours. 2. Drains (Including Condensate): Similar to Sanitary Sewer. END OF SECTION 22 04 00 CONTRACT 24-S-01 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 1 SECTION 230800 — HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS A. The General Mechanical Provisions, Section 20 01 00, shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here. 1.2 SCOPE A. Included: Provide all labor, materials and services necessary for complete, lawful and operating systems as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified here. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Air distribution system. 2. All equipment as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified. 3. Refrigeration system. 4. System energy balance. 5. Coordinate with Section 25 09 00 (Direct Digital Control System) regarding location and installation of system sensors, valves, actuators, etc. and to provide simultaneous start-up. 6. Demolition as indicated on drawings. Where demolition is called for, remove all equipment, piping, ductwork, braces, supports, housekeeping pads, temperature controls and related items no longer required. B. Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Line voltage power wiring to equipment, motor starters in motor control centers, disconnect switches and installation of all starters are included in the Electrical Sections, unless otherwise noted. 2. Connection of condensate drains and domestic water to equipment. 3. Access doors. 4. Concrete and reinforcing steel unless specifically called for in the drawings or specifications. 5. Painting unless specifically called for in the drawings or specifications. 6. Carpentry. 7. Direct Digital Control System. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refrigerant Piping: Hard drawn Type ACR copper, dried and capped, ASTM B280. Wrought copper fittings, silver alloy brazed, 11001F, Silfos. B. Miscellaneous Piping Items: 1. Pipe Support: a. Pipe Hanger: Steel "J" hanger with side bolt for piping 4" and smaller; steel clevis hanger for piping 5" and larger. Load and jam CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 2 nuts. Size and maximum load per manufacturer's recommendations. Felt liner for copper piping. Hanger and rod shall have galvanized finish. B-Line, Unistrut. b. Isolating Shield: Galvanized steel shell and reinforcing ribs. 1/4" non-conducting hair felt pad. Pipe hanger in accordance with paragraph above. Increase hanger size per manufacturer's recommendation. B-Line, Semco. C. Construction Channel: 12-gage, 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" galvanized steel channel. Single or multiple section. Self-locking nuts and fittings. B-Line, Unistrut. 2. Flashing: Flashing for piping through roof shall be prefabricated galvanized steel roof jacks with 16" square flange around pipe. Provide clamp-on storm collar and seal water tight with mastic. Maintain dielectric separation between copper and galvanized materials. For cold process built-up roof, material shall be 4 Ib/ft2 lead instead of galvanized steel. 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS A. General: All piping insulation materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under ASTM E-84 and UL 723 not exceeding a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. B. PVC Jacket (for pipe, fittings and valves): Pre-molded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets, 0.020" thickness. Size to match application. Provide solvent weld adhesive and PVC vapor barrier pressure sealing tape by same manufacturer. Zeston. C. Aluminum Jacketing: Aluminum pipe and fitting jacketing, 0.016" thickness for straight pipe. 0.024" thickness for fittings. Integral moisture barrier. Stucco- Embossed finish. Provide pre-fabricated aluminum strapping and seals by same manufacturer. ITW or RPR. D. Metal Jacketing Sealant: Childers CP-76, Foster 95-44. E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed cell flexible elastomeric preformed pipe insulation. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.27 Btu-in/hr-ft2°F at a mean temperature of 70°F. 1/2" thick. Provide #520 adhesive and Armaflex insulation pipe hangers by same manufacturer. Armacell Armaflex. 2.3 DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. General: All ductwork materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under ASTM E-84 and UL 723 not exceeding a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. Shall comply with 2022 CIVIC. B. Metal Ductwork: Metal ductwork shall be galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality, ASTM A-653, with gage and construction to match SMACNA Standard for pressure required (26 gage minimum). CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 3 C. Duct Sealants: All Joints Exposed to Weather: Sealant shall be water based, Foster 32-19/32-17, Childers CP-146/148, United Duct Sealer WB or G.E. "SilPruf' SCS2000 silicone sealant. Joints Not Exposed to Weather (Except Spiral Wound Exposed to View in Finished Areas): Fiber reinforced. White in color. Foster 32-17, Childers CP-148, Design Polymerics DP1030, Hardcast Versa-Grip 181, Hardcast CCWI-181. Spiral Wound Joints Not Exposed to Weather and Exposed to View in Finished Areas: Non fibrated. Gray in color. Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146, Design Polymerics DP 1010, or United Duct Sealer WB. 2.4 AIR TERMINALS AND DUCT FITTINGS: A. Grilles: (Grilles, Registers, Diffusers and Louvers) 1. Information on Drawings: Refer to Grille Schedule on the drawings for the list of grilles. Manufacturer's model numbers are listed to complete the description Titus. Equivalent models of Anemostat or Krueger are acceptable. Refer to the floor plans for neck size, CFM, air diffusion pattern and fire damper, if required. 2. Performance: Submit complete performance data (throw, pressure drop, noise level, etc.) for all grilles proposed, other than those scheduled. Testing shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 70-1991. If, according to the certified data of the manufacturer of the proposed units, the sizes indicated on the drawings will not perform satisfactorily, the units shall be reselected by the Contractor for the proper diffusion, spread, pressure drop, throw and noise level. 3. Frame and Accessories: Supply, return, and exhaust grilles shall not have an opposed blade volume control damper unless otherwise noted. All surface mounted grilles shall have a perimeter gasket and flanged edge. All grilles shall have frames suitable for mounting in the surfaces designated by the architectural drawings. Key or screwdriver operated, no slide bars. 4. Finish: All ceiling and wall grilles and all louvers shall have a paintable white finish unless otherwise noted. Interior components (everything behind the face plate) shall be flat black. Floor grilles shall have an anodized aluminum finish unless otherwise noted. B. Turning Vanes: Double wall, hollow metal, air foil shape. Spacing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Aero Dyne HEP. 2.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS: A. General: All ductwork insulation materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested under ASTM E-84 and UL 723 not exceeding a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. B. Acoustic Lining: Glass fiber. Installed thermal resistance at a mean temperature of 750F shall meet or exceed indicated value. One side coated to prevent fiber erosion up to 6000 ft/min. Average noise reduction coefficient of 0.80. 1.5 Ib/ft3 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 4 density. 1" thick (R-4.2) where ductwork is within the building thermal insulation envelope. 2" thick (R-8)where ductwork is outside the building thermal insulation envelope and/or above the roof. Certainteed, Knauf, Johns-Manville, Owens-Corning. C. Bonding Adhesive: Design Polymerics DP2501, Foster 85-60. 2.6 EQUIPMENT A. General Requirements: 1. Start-up: All equipment shall be started and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Start-up procedure shall be performed by a factory trained service technician — not the installing contractor. Provide the inspector of record with factory start-up literature for each mechanical equipment item. Demonstrate to inspector that the start-up procedure has been completed. Start-up sheets shall be completed and submitted with O&M manuals. Start-up sheets shall be submitted, certifying that start-up has been completed per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Capacity: Capacities shall be in accordance with schedules shown on drawings. Capacities are to be considered minimum. 3. Dimensions: Equipment must conform to space requirements and limitations as indicated on drawings and as required for operation and maintenance. Where Architectural screening is indicated, equipment shall not extend above or beyond screening. Equipment will not be accepted that does not readily conform to space conditions. Prepare and submit layout drawings for all proposed equipment (different than scheduled units) showing actual job conditions, required clearances for proper operation, maintenance, etc. 4. Ratings: Electrical equipment shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards and UL or ETL listed where applicable standards have been established. 5. Piping: Each item or assembly of items shall be furnished completely piped for connection to services. Control valves and devices shall be provided. For equipment mounted on springs, provide flex connections. Equipment requiring domestic water for non-potable use shall be provided with backflow preventer acceptable for intended use by local governing authorities. 6. Electrical: a. General: Each item or assembly of items shall be furnished completely wired to individual terminal blocks for connection to single branch electrical circuit. All electrical accessories required by equipment shall be furnished. Provide terminal blocks for controls and interlocks not included in equipment package. Manual and magnetic starters shall have ambient compensating CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 5 running overcurrent protection in all ungrounded conductors. Magnetic starters shall be NEMA rated, manual reset, shall have H-O-A switches and auxiliary contacts. Controllers and other devices shall be in NEMA 1 or 3R enclosures as applicable. b. Wiring: Conductors, conduit, and wiring shall be in accordance with Electrical Specifications. Individual items within assembly shall be separately protected with dead front, fused disconnect, fuse block, or circuit breaker for each ungrounded conductor, all accessible on operating side of equipment. Switches, contacts and other devices shall be in ungrounded conductors. C. Motors: Shall be rated, constructed and applied in accordance with NEMA and ANSI Standards without using service factor. Single-phase motor shall be of type to suit application. Three-phase motors shall be NEMA B design on pumps and fans, NEMA C on reciprocating equipment, sealed ball bearing, three-phase induction unless otherwise noted. Motors 1 HP and above shall be NEMA premium efficiency, Class F insulation. Motors in a fan air stream shall be TEFC or TEAO. Vertical motors exposed to weather shall be TEFC and shall have rain caps. Horizontal motors exposed to weather shall be TEFC. Motors for use with VFD's shall be inverter ready. d. Starters: Motor starters shall be furnished for all equipment except where starter is in a motor control center as designated on the electrical drawings. Deliver starter to Electrical Contractor for installation and wiring. e. Control Voltage: Equipment connected to greater than 240 volts shall be provided with 120 volt control circuit from integral protected transformer if separate source is not indicated on plans. 240 volt control is acceptable if confined within control panel. f. Submittals: Included in shop drawings shall be internal wiring diagrams and manufacturer's recommended external wiring. 7. Fan Selection: a. Fan Curves: Performance curves shall be submitted for all units of 3000 CFM or greater. Operating point for forward curved fans shall be from point of maximum efficiency toward increased CFM limited by horsepower scheduled. Operating point for backward inclined fans shall be selected near point of maximum efficiency. Curves shall plot CFM verses static pressure with constant brake horsepower, RPM and efficiency lines. b. Static Pressure: Unless otherwise noted, pressure scheduled as external static pressure (ESP) includes all ductwork and accessory losses external to the unit housing. Unless otherwise noted, pressure scheduled as total static pressure includes all ductwork, filter, coil, cabinet, damper and other accessory losses. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 6 Unless otherwise noted, pressure scheduled as duct static pressure includes all supply and return ductwork and accessory losses external to the unit housing and plenum (as applicable). The allowance for filter losses is 0.3" WC, unless otherwise noted. Submit itemized static pressure losses for all components. 8. Filters: a. General: Tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2 and Title 24, C.C.R. Furnish and install one complete change of all filters after air balance is completed and prior to acceptance. b. Filter Media: 2" media. MERV-13. Clean filter resistance 0.41" water at 500 fpm. Throw-away frame. Class 2. Camfil AP-Thirteen. 9. Screens: All duct or louver openings to the outside shall be covered with 1/2", 16-gage, galvanized wire mesh screen. 10. Mixing Dampers: Opposed blade, 16 gage. Six inch maximum blade width, 48" maximum length. Nylon or oil impregnated bronze bearings. One half inch diameter pin shaft. 16 gage channel frame. One percent maximum leakage at 4" WC in accordance with AMCA 500 for outside air dampers. Actuating rod out of air stream. Arrow. 11. Sound Ratings: Shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 36 - 72. Sound ratings shall not exceed scheduled values. 12. Drives: Unless noted as direct connected, drives shall be V-belt, rated at 150% of motor horsepower. Multiple drive belts shall be matched set. Drive sheaves shall be dynamically balanced, adjustable, range +/- 10%, selected at mid range. Adjustable relative movement shall be lockable to shaft. Belts shall be aligned within 1-1/2 degrees at all times. Open drives shall be provided with OSHA approved open mesh belt guards. Belt guards exposed to weather shall be weatherproof enclosure with louvered face for adequate ventilation. Driving motor shall be mounted on adjustable rails. T.B. Woods, Browning. Submit RPM range of driven machine with drive selection. B. Variable Refrigerant Volume System: Note: All pipe size changes required due to manufacturer equipment revisions or design layout revisions shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost. Provide Factory Start- up and Commissioning of VRF Controls. 1. General: Variable capacity, heat pump heat recovery air conditioning system providing simultaneous cooling and heating. Refer to Paragraph 2.6A for general requirements. The system shall consist of outdoor units, multiple indoor units, and M-NET DDC (Direct Digital Controls). Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be capable of operating in any mode independently of other indoor units or groups. System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to cooling) with no interruption to system operation. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be independently controlled. The sum of connected capacity of all CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 7 indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of outdoor rated capacity. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit. The units shall be covered by the manufacturer's limited warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. In addition the compressor shall have a manufacturer's limited warranty for a period of seven (7) years from date of installation. The mandatory contractor service and install training shall be performed by the manufacturer. Trane-Mitsubishi. 2. Outdoor Units (ODU): a. General: The outdoor unit shall be used specifically with CITY MULTI VRFZ components. The outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit module shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and run tested at the factory. (1) All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field, without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the contractor. (2) Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 60 dB(A) individually or 64 dB(A) twinned. Units shall have a sound rating no higher than 50 dB(A) individually or 53 dB(A) twinned while in night mode operation. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet published sound levels shall be incurred by the contractor. (3) Outdoor unit shall be able to connect to up to 50 indoor units depending upon model. (4) The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls. (5) The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase heater and DC bus protection. (6) The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164 feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of 1804-2625 feet. The greatest length is not to exceed 541 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size changes or traps. (7) The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating mode down to -40F ambient temperature or cooling mode CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 8 down to 230F ambient temperature, without additional low ambient controls. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by the contractor. (8) The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling mode down to -101F with optional manufacturer supplied low ambient kit. (9) Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be provided with predesigned control box rated for outdoor installation and capable of controlling kit operation automatically in all outdoor unit operation modes. (10) Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. (11) Manufacturer supplied low ambient kit shall be factory tested in low ambient temperature chamber to ensure operation. Factory performance testing data shall be available when requested. (12) The outdoor unit shall not cease operation in any mode based solely on outdoor ambient temperature. (13) The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained. (14) Unit must defrost all circuits simultaneously in order to resume full heating more quickly. Partial defrost which may extend "no or reduced heating" periods shall not be allowed. b. Unit Cabinet: The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished. Units cabinets shall be able to withstand 960 hours per ASTM 13117 criteria for seacoast protected models (—BS models) C. Fan: (1) Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG external static pressure, but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24 in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch. (2) All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 9 (3) All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation. (4) All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. (5) The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow. d. Refrigerant: R410A refrigerant shall be required for outdoor unit systems. e. Coil: (1) The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. (2) The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish. (3) The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. (4) Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. (5) The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage. f. Compressor: (1) Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. Non inverter- driven compressors shall not be allowed. (2) A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s). (3) The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 19%-5% of rated capacity, depending upon unit size. (4) The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. (5) The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. (6) Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 10 g. Electrical: (1) The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 or 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 hertz. (2) The outdoor unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz), 207- 253V (230V/60Hz) or 414-506V (460V/60Hz). (3) The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. (4) The control circuit between the indoor units, BC Controller and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2- conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. 3. Indoor Units (IDU-2A,2B): a. General: The TPEFY shall be a ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling with a 2-position, field adjustable return and a fixed horizontal discharge supply and shall have a modulating linear expansion device. The TPEFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y- Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The TPEFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers. b. Indoor Unit. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: (1) The unit shall be, ceiling-concealed, ducted. (2) The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. d. Fan: (1) TPEFY models shall feature external static pressure settings from 0.14 to 0.60 in. WG. (2) The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two Sirocco fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. (3) The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 11 (4) The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds, High, Mid, and Low plus the Auto-Fan function (5) The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system. e. Filter: (1) Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter. (2) Optional return filter box (rear or bottom placement) with high-efficiency filter shall be available for all TPEFY indoor units. f. Coil: (1) The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. (2) The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. (3) All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. (4) The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. (5) A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. (6) The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. (7) Both refrigerant lines to the TPEFY indoor units shall be insulated. g. Electrical: (1) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. (2) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207- 253 volts (230V/60Hz). h. Controls: (1) This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 5 of this guide CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 12 specification for details on controllers and other control options. (2) Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. (3) Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F —9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. (4) Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. (5) Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. (6) Manufacturer to provide drain pan level sensor powered by a 20-year life lithium battery. Sensor shall require no external power for operation and shall have an audible indication of low battery condition. (7) The drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts. 4. Indoor Units (IDU-1,A,1B,3A-3F): a. General: The TPKFY shall be a wall-mounted indoor unit section and shall have a modulating linear expansion device and a flat front. The TPKFY shall be used with the R2-Series outdoor unit and BC Controller, Y-Series outdoor unit, or S-Series outdoor unit. The TPKFY shall support individual control using M-NET DDC controllers. b. Indoor Unit: The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: All casings, regardless of model size, shall have the CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 13 same white finish. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and two (2) directions for draining shall be standard. There shall be a separate back plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall. d. Fan: (1) The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one or two line- flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. (2) The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. (3) A manual adjustable guide vane shall be provided with the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right). (4) A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. e. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter. f. Coil: (1) The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. (2) The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. (3) All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. (4) The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. (5) A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. (6) Both refrigerant lines to the TPKFY indoor units shall be insulated. g. Electrical: (1) The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. (2) The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207- 253 volts (230V/60Hz) h. Controls: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 14 (1) This unit shall use controls provided by Mitsubishi Electric Cooling & Heating to perform functions necessary to operate the system. Please refer to Part 4 of this guide specification for details on controllers and other control options. (2) The unit shall be able to control external backup heat. (3) The unit shall have a factory built in receiver for wireless remote control (4) Indoor unit shall compensate for the higher temperature sensed by the return air sensor compared to the temperature at level of the occupant when in HEAT mode. Disabling of compensation shall be possible for individual units to accommodate instances when compensation is not required. (5) Control board shall include contacts for control of external heat source. External heat may be energized as second stage with 1.8°F —9.0°F adjustable deadband from set point. (6) Indoor unit shall include no less than four (4) digital inputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. (7) Indoor unit shall include no less than three (3) digital outputs capable of being used for customizable control strategies. (8) Manufacturer to provide drain pan level sensor powered by a 20-year life lithium battery. Sensor shall require no external power for operation and shall have an audible indication of low battery condition. (9) The drain pan sensor shall provide protection against drain pan overflow by sensing a high condensate level in the drain pan. Should this occur the control shuts down the indoor unit before an overflow can occur. A thermistor error code will be produced should the sensor activate indicating a fault which must be resolved before the unit re-starts. C. Exhaust Fans: 1. General: All exhaust fans shall be tested according to AMCA Standard 210 in an AMCA registered laboratory. Fans exposed to weather shall have ventilated weatherproof housing over motor and drive assembly. Refer to Paragraph 2.6A for general requirements. All direct drive fans shall be provided with unit mounted speed controllers, unless otherwise noted. All motors 1 horsepower and larger shall be the premium efficiency type. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 15 2. Roof Fan: Spun aluminum, roof mounted, direct driven, downblast centrifugal exhaust ventilator. Fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners and stainless-steel fasteners on cap. Spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16-gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. Aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. Discharge baffle shall have a rolled bead for added strength. An integral conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. Motor shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. An aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone shall be provided for maximum performance and efficiency. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Backdraft damper. Units as scheduled shall have Vari-Green Constant Pressure Control option. Greenheck. PART 2 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Piping Layout: Piping shall be concealed in walls, above the ceilings, or below grade unless otherwise noted. Exposed piping shall run parallel to room surfaces; location to be approved by Engineer. No structural member shall be weakened by cutting, notching, boring or otherwise, unless specifically allowed by structural drawings and/or specifications. Where such cutting is required, reinforcement shall be provided as specified or detailed. All piping shall be installed in a manner to ensure unrestricted flow, eliminate air pockets, prevent any unusual noise, and permit complete drainage of the system. All piping shall be installed to permit expansion and contraction without strain on piping or equipment. Vertical lines shall be installed to allow for building settlement without damage to piping. Lines shall be adequately braced against vertical and lateral movement. For piping connected to equipment mounted on springs, provide flex connections. Pipe sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal sizes unless otherwise noted. Pipe sizes shall not decrease in direction of flow, unless otherwise noted. 2. Joints: a. Threaded: Pipe shall be cut square, and reamed to full size. Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Joint compound or tape suitable for conveyed fluid shall be applied to male thread only. Joints shall be made with three threads exposed. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 16 b. Brazed: Welding and brazing shall conform to American Welding Society (AWS) standards. Filler rod shall be of suitable or the same alloy as pipe. Brazing filler metal shall have a minimum melting point of 11001F. Brazing shall be performed by a Certified Brazer as certified by an organization/institution that uses standards recognized by the AWS and meets the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section 9. The Contractor shall submit welding procedures per AWS for project welds for testing lab review. C. Open Ends: Open ends of piping shall be capped during progress of work to preclude foreign matter. 3. Fittings and Valves: a. Standard Fittings: All joints and changes in direction shall be made with standard fittings. Close nipples shall not be used. b. Reducers: Pipe size reduction shall be made with bell reducer fittings. Bushings shall not be used. 4. Pipe Support: a. General: Hangers shall be placed to support piping without strain on joints or fittings. Maximum spacing between supports shall be as specified below (based on straight lengths of pipe with couplings only). Provide additional supports for equipment, valves or other fittings. Seismic requirements may reduce maximum spacing. Actual spacing requirements will depend on structural system. Refer to drawings for additional requirements and attachment to structure. Side beam clamps shall be provided with retaining straps to secure the clamp to the opposite side of the beam. Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamp at 20' on center (maximum). Support pipe within 12" of all changes in direction. b. Refrigerant Piping: Support insulated refrigerant line with construction channel and sheet metal support saddle or Cooper B- Line Armafix clamps. 5' spacing. Use isolation shield for uninsulated pipe. When using pre-charged tubing, all changes of direction shall be made with bending tools producing neat uniform bends. Free hand bends will not be accepted. C. Trapeze: Trapeze hangers of construction channel and pipe clamps may be used. Submit design to Engineer for review. 5. Miscellaneous: a. Escutcheons: Provide chrome plated metal escutcheons where piping penetrates walls, ceilings, or floors in finished areas. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 17 b. Pipe Sleeves: All piping passing through concrete shall be provided with pipe sleeves. Allow 1" (nominal) clearance between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. C. Pipes Passing through Fire Rated Surfaces: Pipes passing through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc. shall have the annular space surrounding the pipe or pipe insulation sealed with fire rated materials in accordance with the requirements of 2022 CBC Section 714. B. Refrigerant Piping: Pipe shall be cut square. Joint surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, fitted and erected before brazing. After installation, evacuate to 29 inches of mercury, ambient temperature during evacuation shall not be less than 70°F. After evacuation, fill with dry nitrogen to 250 psi and maintain for two hour period without additional charge. After nitrogen test, purge with refrigerant charged through dryer and maintain holding charge in system and equipment. Refrigerant piping below grade shall be run in 4" (min.) PVC conduit with long radius ells. Seal ends of conduit watertight. VRF system fittings shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Installers shall have successfully completed manufacturer's installation training within 6 months of installation. Provide training certificate or letter from manufacturer's rep stating such. 3.2 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Refrigerant Piping: Cover piping with foamed plastic insulation. Longitudinal and end seams shall be thoroughly cemented with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Cover all fittings, unions, valves and connections. Piping exposed to view shall be covered with PVC jacketing. Piping exposed to weather shall be covered with aluminum jacketing, install all joints and seams to prevent water entry, seal with 1/8" bead of gray metal jacketing sealant. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Standards: Unless otherwise noted, all ductwork shall be constructed and installed in accordance with current SMACNA Standards. Ductwork shall be built to a pressure classification equal to or greater than the maximum operating pressure at that point in the ductwork. A copy of these standards shall be maintained at the job site at all times. Duct work and accessories shall be installed in a manner to prevent vibration and rattling. 2. Access: Provide duct access doors as required to adjust equipment and dampers. Provide wall or ceiling access panels, or remote actuators as required where equipment and dampers are not otherwise accessible. Ventlok 666 concealed remote actuator with zinc finish on cover. 3. Flanges and Escutcheon: Where ductwork penetrates walls, ceilings, or floors, furnish and install flange or escutcheon of same material as duct. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 18 B. Low Velocity-Low Pressure (up to 2,000 ft/min and up to 2.0 in water): 1. Sheet Metal Ductwork: a. Ells: Ells with less than standard radius and square ells shall be fitted with turning vanes. b. Tees: Tees in supply ductwork shall be straight tap-in with extractor or 45 degree take-off as shown on drawings. Grilles or branches in supply ductwork shall be a minimum of 8 duct diameters downstream of tees. C. Duct Joints and Seams: All joints and seams which are not exposed to weather shall be sealed airtight with duct sealant. All joints and seams exposed to weather shall be sealed air and water tight with silicone sealant. (See Part 2 of this Specification). All joints on spiral wound metal ductwork not exposed to weather shall be sealed air tight with grey duct sealant. d. Dampers: Install volume control damper and damper regulator in all branch ducts. 3.4 AIR TERMINALS AND DUCT FITTINGS INSTALLATION: A. General: Unless otherwise noted, all air terminals and duct fittings shall be installed in accordance with current SMACNA Standards. Terminals and fittings shall be installed in a manner to prevent vibration and rattling. Metal surfaces exposed to view behind grilles and registers shall be painted flat black. 3.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION INSTALLATION: A. General: Insulate all sheet metal supply, return and outside air intake ductwork except as noted below. Insulation shall be continuous through walls and floors except at fire dampers. B. Where Insulation Is Not Required: Do not insulate factory-insulated ducts or casings, acoustic lined ducts, fibrous glass ducts, underground ductwork, supply or return ductwork exposed to view in the space that it serves, or exhaust ductwork. C. Acoustic Lining: Unless otherwise indicated, all supply and return ductwork in equipment rooms, all ductwork exposed to weather and other ducts as indicated on drawings, shall have acoustic lining. Do not acoustic line outside air intakes. Where acoustic lining is installed, increase each sheet metal dimension to accommodate lining and maintain clear inside duct dimensions shown on drawings. Apply lining with bonding adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and also secure with mechanical fasteners in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Seal exposed edges of lining with bonding adhesive. 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 19 A. General: The equipment installer shall ensure that no work done under other specification sections will in any way block or hinder the equipment. All equipment shall be securely anchored in place. Provide factory start-up for all equipment in the Central Plant. B. Connections to Equipment: Where size changes are required for connections to equipment, they shall be made immediately adjacent to the equipment and, if possible, inside the equipment cabinet. 3.7 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. General: Unless otherwise directed, tests shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer. Work to be concealed shall not be enclosed until prescribed tests are made. Should any work be enclosed before such tests, the Contractor shall, at his expense, uncover, test and repair all work to original conditions. Leaks and defects shown by tests shall be repaired and entire work retested. 3.8 SYSTEM ENERGY BALANCE A. Scope: Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to test, adjust and balance, retest and record performance of the system to obtain design quantities as specified. The agency must prove that they have no affiliation with any equipment manufacturer, design engineer, installing contractor, or any other party which might lead to a conflict of interest, in order to provide an unbiased, third party system balance and report. B. Qualifications: Prior to commencing work, the agency shall be reviewed by the Engineer and shall be certified by the Associated Air Balance Council or National Environmental Balancing Bureau. The agency shall provide documentation of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope. The Contractor must have sufficient personnel to respond to a trouble call at the site within two hours. C. Instruments: All instruments shall be accurately calibrated; calibration histories shall be available for examination. Application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with AABC or NEBB standards. D. Submittals: Include in shop drawings copies of forms to be used for testing and balancing showing all data which is to be recorded. Three copies of completed balance report shall be submitted for review. E. Procedure - General: Procedure shall be in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council's "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation - Total System Balance", Volume Two, No. 12173, or equivalent NEBB standards. System shall be in full, continuous operation during test. Balanced quantities shall be plus 10%, minus 0% of design quantities. All nameplate data, manufacturer, model and serial numbers shall be recorded for each item tested. F. Extended Warranty: The test and balance agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 days after completion of test and balance work, during which time the Engineer, at his discretion, may request a recheck or resetting of any item or CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 20 items in test report. The agency shall provide technicians to assist the Engineer in making any tests he may require during this period of time. G. Air Balance Procedure (For Each Air Handling System): 1. All air filters shall be clean when air balance is performed. 2. Provide a sketch of the equipment showing exactly where all pressure readings were taken. 3. Adjust blower RPM to design requirements. 4. Record motor full load amperes. 5. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. 6. Record system static pressures, inlet and discharge. 7. Record filter quantity, size(s) and pressure drop across filter(s) at each filter bank. 8. Adjust system for design CFM recirculated air. 9. Adjust system for design CFM outside air. 10. Record entering air temperatures. (DB heating, DB and WB cooling.) 11. Record leaving air temperatures. (DB heating, DB and WB cooling.) 12. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to design CFM. 13. Adjust all zones to design CFM, supply and return. 14. Adjust all diffusers, grilles and registers to plus 10%, minus 0% of design requirements. 15. Adjust CFM at all exhaust fans, make-up units, etc. (high and low speed, where applicable). Record applicable data from items 1 through 11 above. 16. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location. 17. Verify proper diffusion pattern for all ceiling grilles and that all sidewall grilles are set for 5 degrees upward deflection unless otherwise noted. Make a notation of any that are not set properly. 18. Size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested items shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer's ratings shall be used to make required calculations on all items. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HVAC REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 230800 - 21 19. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. 20. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified. Testing agency shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. 21. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted for required air patterns and to minimize drafts. 22. As a part of the work of this contract, THE AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTOR shall make any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance as recommended by air balance agency, at no additional cost to Owner. 23. Set, test and adjust packaged heating/cooling unit economizer operation in cooperation with controls contractor. Record minimum and maximum outside and exhaust airflows. END OF SECTION 23 08 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 1 SECTION 250900— DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS A. The General Mechanical Provisions, Section 20 01 00, shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated here. 1.2 SCOPE Included: Provide all labor, materials and services necessary for a complete, lawful and operating direct digital control (DDC) system as shown or noted on the drawings or as specified here. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Control panels, control devices, line and low voltage wiring, conduit and related equipment as required for proper operation of all controlled systems. 2. Power wiring required for control devices such as actuators, controllers, sensors and power supplies. Power wiring for these devices shall be fed from circuits dedicated to the DDC system. B. Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Line voltage dedicated power circuits for stand-alone building controllers are included in the Electrical Divisions unless otherwise noted. 1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. All controls shall be furnished and installed by a Contractor who is licensed, certified or contracted by the controls and VRV manufacturer for design, installation, start-up and service of their product. The Contractor must have factory supplied training and support. The Contractor shall have sufficient personnel to respond to a trouble call at the site within four hours. The Contractor's local manager shall have a minimum of five years' experience in the design, installation, start-up and service of similar systems. The Contractor shall submit a list of at least five projects which are similar in size, scope and contract value to this project. This list shall include the Owner's contact person, phone number and controls contract value. B. Quality Assurance 1. General i. The Building Management System (BMS) Contractor shall be Authorized Building Controls Specialist contractor that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation and service of total integrated Building Management Systems. Bids from wholesalers, distributors or contractors who do not purchase directly from Johnson Controls are not allowed. ii. The BMS Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 25-mile radius of the job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 2 7-day-a-week basis. The BMS Contractor shall have at this facility at least eight (8) factory trained, directly employed and full time technical staff, spare parts inventory, and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. iii. As evidence and assurance of the BMS contractor's ability to support the Owner's system with service and parts, the BMS contractor must have been in the BMS business for at least the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed total projects of at least 10 times the value of this contract in each of the preceding five years. iv. The BMS architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building Management Systems, and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid. 2. Workplace Safety and Hazardous Materials a. Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. The BMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project. c. The BMS Contractor and its employees and subtrades shall comply with federal, state and local safety regulations. d. The BMS Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the training required by the OSHA rules that have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the Safety Certification Manual. e. Hazards created by the BMS Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any further work proceeds. f. Hazards observed but not created by the BMS Contractor or its subcontractors shall be reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. The BMS Contractor shall be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been eliminated. g. The BMS Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being performed, stating that the Contractors' company is in full compliance with the Project safety requirements. h. The BMS Contractor's safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site. i. The BMS Contractor's employees and subcontractor's staff shall have received training as applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly. 3. Quality Management Program CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 3 a. Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BMS Project Management. The designated Project Manager shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the BMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall: 0 Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and other resources are available as needed. 0 Manage the financial aspects of the BMS Contract. 0 Coordinate as necessary with other trades. 0 Be responsible for the work and actions of the BMS workforce on site. 1.4 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The system shall be Johnson Metasys Building Systems, without substitution, to match County of Fresno Standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 20 01 00 and shall include the following: 1. Contractor qualifications. Manufacturer licenses, contracts or certifications for the installer shall be submitted on manufacturer's letterhead. 2. Manufacturer's data for all devices. 3. Manufacturer's data for all software. 4. Diagrams showing control schematics. Diagrams shall include all sensors, terminal strips, panels and control devices. Locations of all devices shall be indicated. 5. Sequence of operation. 6. Site plan showing conduit trench and pullbox locations. This plan shall also show the conduit termination points inside the buildings. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all components. These manuals shall contain full documentation which shall include, without being limited to, the following: 1. General description and specifications. 2. Installation and initial checkout procedures. 3. Complete trouble-shooting procedures and diagrams. 4. Complete alignment and calibration procedures for all components. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 4 5. Preventative maintenance requirements. 6. Detailed schematics and assembly drawings. 1.6 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The direct digital control system shall employ a multi-level distributed processing architecture. A web based front end controller shall act as the host and shall communicate with both the system operator and the stand-alone controllers. The stand-alone controllers shall be microprocessor based and perform the specified data acquisition and control functions. They shall connect to and supervise multiple application specific controllers (ASC). The stand-alone controllers shall perform stand-alone control functions whether in communications with the web based front end controller or not. All independent control loops shall be processed and controlled by the stand-alone controllers. Each stand-alone controller shall store historical data for all connected points for a minimum of 24 hours. Historical data shall include total run-time for each digital point. For analog data, periodic samples shall be stored at the frequency of once per minute. The physical connection and interface with the actual field points shall be accomplished through the ASC's. The ASC's shall be located throughout the data environment, communicate with, and be controlled by the stand-alone controllers. The stand-alone controllers shall be accessible by laptop computer with proper software via cable connection. Access to the system shall also be available through connection at selected space sensors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SENSORS A. Space Temperature Sensor: Room sensor with solid-state electronic, interchangeable with housing appropriate for application occupant and adjustable set point. Occupant adjustable set point shall be limited by software. Wall mounted temperature sensors shall be mounted with bottom of sensor at 48" above finish floor. B. Outside Air Temperature Sensor: Provide one outside air sensor per stand-alone building controller. Install on north wall of building. C. Duct Sensor: Averaging sensor shall be used at ducts with greater than 9 square feet of cross sectional area. Sensor shall extend across 75% of the duct. Sensor shall be housed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with proper extension at insulated ducts. Provide access door. D. Photocell: Wattstopper EM-24 A 2. E. Status Sensor: Current sensing status sensor with sensitivity adjustment. F. Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type, 115 VAC. The detector shall operate at air velocities from 300 FPM to 4000 FPM. The detector head shall not require additional filters or screens. Mounted in a sheet metal housing with a removable cover. A visual indication of alarm and power shall be provided on detector front. Manual test and reset switch on front of detector. Power supervisory relay. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 5 Minimum of two sets of alarm contacts. UL listed. California State Fire Marshal listed. Air Products and Controls, SM-501 Series. 2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Electric Actuators: 1. General: Fully modulating, UL listed. Visual position indicator, manual override, spring return. Factory weatherproof enclosure where exposed to weather. Belimo. 2. Valve Actuators: Provide with factory mounting brackets and linkage to the control valve. Capable of shutting off against a 50 psi differential. 3. Damper Actuators: Actuators shall be direct mounted onto the damper control shaft without linkage. Damper actuators shall be sized to provide a minimum of 5 inch-pounds of torque per square foot of damper face area. B. Lighting Contactors: Contactor with metal enclosure. Square D. Provide low voltage relays to complete the lighting control. For low voltage (120 volt) outside lighting, provide status relay for lighting status. For 277 volt outside lighting, provide current sensor for lighting status. C. Web Based Front End Controller with Graphical Interface: Provide color graphics accessible through the Owner's system (with security protocol) which will allow the user to override on/off and temperature set points directly. Real time data shall be continuously updated. The minimum graphic screens shall include the following: 1. Site lay-out locations of all equipment being controlled, control component locations and spaces served. Provide multiple screens— minimum of one screen per building, plus site and others as needed for clarity. By selecting the desired equipment item, a flow diagram shall be displayed for the related equipment (as described below). By selecting a conditioned space, a graphic display of the zone conditions shall be displayed (as described below). 2. Flow diagrams shall be provided for each HVAC system, such as air- handling system, chilled water system, hot water system, condenser water system, package unit system with all inputs and outputs dynamically displayed. 3. Each temperature control zone shall have a screen providing set points, temperatures, and related HVAC system status data. 4. Scheduling screens allowing on/off times shall be set for all the following: a. Pre-determined individual days b. Pre-determined blocks of days (from/to) c. Schedules for"Routine" days CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 6 d. Schedules for"Special" days D. Enclosures: Hinged, lockable front panel. The panel shall be identified with a label as specified. No conduit or other penetration of any kind shall be made on top of the enclosure. If any such entry is made, a plug is not acceptable; replace the enclosure. Hoffman with metal back panel. NEMA 1 for indoor; NEMA 3R for outdoor, NEMA 12 for hazardous locations. E. Wiring: Sensor and communication cable shall be shielded cable, wire gage and number of wires as recommended by the system manufacturer. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. No splices will be allowed. Identify both ends at terminal blocks. All wiring that is routed below grade shall have a PVC jacket, CL2-0552. All other wiring shall be plenum-rated, CL3P-0552. F. Conduit: Size conduit per the California Electrical Code and then increase by one size, except that the minimum conduit size for low voltage shall be 1" and the minimum conduit size for 120 volt power shall be 114". For underground conduit, provide 100% spare capacity by installing a second conduit (empty) along all conduit routes. G. Labels: All labels, signs, etc. shall be engraved, laminated plastic, white on black background, 1/8" high lettering, minimum. H. Mitsubishi Controller. CITY MULTI Controls Network (CMCN) controller with on- site LCD and internet IP accessibility with Factory BACnet Interface Card. I. Mitsubishi Room Sensor/Controller: Shall be wall mounted "in-room"wired remote controller. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: A dedicated ASC shall be provided for every item of new equipment and for every item of existing equipment. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the California Electrical Code and the Electrical Specification Sections. Wiring shall be concealed in walls, above the ceilings, or below grade unless otherwise noted. Exposed wiring shall run in conduit parallel to room surfaces; location shall be approved by the Engineer. Wiring in walls or in mechanical rooms, janitor rooms, or storage rooms shall be in conduit. Conduit above roofs shall be rigid conduit. Low voltage wiring in accessible attics may be run without conduit. This wiring shall be strapped to structure at 48" on center, and shall not lay on the ceiling. No structural member shall be weakened by cutting, notching, boring or otherwise. Provide power wiring for each device requiring external power. Dedicated circuits shall be provided for devices as required by the manufacturer. Devices or wiring exposed to the weather shall be protected in NEMA 3R enclosures and weatherproof conduit. All conduit shall include a pull wire. Set, test, and adjust the system for proper operation. Provide connection to the Owner's network for web-based access to stand-alone controllers. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 7 B. Programming: The Contractor shall be responsible for programming the system and shall coordinate the scheduling (on/off times) with the Owner. All point lists and programming blocks shall be provided by the Contractor. For upgrades or additions to existing systems, all existing programming and existing sequences of operation shall be incorporated into the new system and equipment. The project will not be considered complete until all programming and graphics have been completed and all systems are operational from the location of the web based front end controller. C. Control Panels/Enclosures: 1. ASC's, transformers, relays, etc. shall be housed in enclosures. Enclosures shall be installed as shown on plans. Wherever practical, do not locate enclosures above ceilings. Maintain access to enclosures that are located above ceilings (e.g. at VAV boxes). 2. For all enclosures, provide a disconnect switch and an in-line fuse. All wiring shall be terminated at terminal strips — no wire nuts. Provide a plastic covered wiring diagram in each enclosure. All wiring (field and inside enclosures) shall be labeled at both ends with machine printed markers — black on white tape. At packaged equipment, locate the enclosure on the side of the unit without obstructing access or service clearance. 3. Separate 120 volt circuits from low voltage circuits horizontally. A physical barrier is not required. Enclose wiring within the enclosure in 2"x2" Panduit. 3.2 TRAINING A. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide operational training to the Owner's personnel. The training sessions shall include a complete demonstration of the system. Dates and times of the training sessions shall be coordinated through the Owner not less than one week prior to session. A total of 40 hours of instruction shall be provided - 20 hours initially, and 20 hours to be spread throughout the first year of operation. The Contractor shall maintain a log of training sessions including dates, times and names/titles of those attending. The Contractor shall submit a copy of this log on request. 3.3 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE A. The Contractor shall verify, in the presence of the Owner, the system accuracy and proper function of each controlled device and sensor. The following items shall be successfully demonstrated prior to acceptance by the Owner: 1. All system outputs including controllers, relays, and other control devices shall be addressed and start/stop functions demonstrated. 2. All inputs shall be displayed and all event-initiated functions shall be demonstrated. 3. Demonstrate program integrity and power restore sequence during and CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 8 after a power failure and restoration. 4. Deliver all record drawings, wiring diagrams, equipment specifications, operation and maintenance manuals and other documentation as required to describe the system. 5. Complete operator training in the use, programming, and operation of the system. 3.4 SERVICE WORK A. Service work shall be performed by service personnel in the direct employ of the controls contractor. The service technicians shall be factory trained and certified by the manufacturer to be competent in all aspects of the installed system. The technician shall have a working knowledge of calibration techniques, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, software diagnostics and microprocessor repair. Precaution shall be taken to minimize disruption of facility operations by service work. 3.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. System Operation Schedule: The systems shall operate at the following schedule (adjustable by Owner) except as noted: Systems shall operate continuously 24 hrs/day. B. Alarm Condition Display: On any alarm, the Central Workstation shall display the equipment mark number and the specific alarm condition. Upon highlighting the alarming equipment, the program shall have a graphic display function that displays the plan of the building floor with the location of the alarming equipment indicated. C. System Report: The DDC/EMS shall prepare a system report on demand. The report shall include the following items in the report: Date and time of the current report. Date and time of the previously reviewed report. List of any alarms that have occurred the since the last report. The list shall include the time of the alarm, unit that had the alarm, and the type of alarm. List of any still active run time notices. The list shall include the time of the initial notice, unit that had the notice, and the type of notice. List of any still active filter change notices. The list shall include the time of the initial notice, unit that had the notice, and the type of notice. List of any off-hours operations that have occurred since the last report. The list shall include the date and time of the off-hours operation, the unit identification number, the physical /service location of the unit, and the duration of the off- hours operation. D. Variable Refrigerant Volume Air Conditioner (ODU / IDU): DDC/EMS Interface: Provide a DDC/EMS panel and connect to the existing WAN DDC/EMS. Connect to the DDC/EMS interface on the VRV Central Controller. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 250900 - 9 Provide programming to allow the DDC/EMS to monitor the room temperatures from the Indoor Units, reset the room temperature setpoints, display alarm conditions from the VRV system. Central Controller: Locate the Central Controller per plans. Wire the central controller to each Outdoor Unit (ODU) system controller as the system is installed. Program the controller to operate the system on the schedule noted above. Alarm conditions of any component on the connected systems shall be able to be reviewed through the Central Controller. Outdoor Unit (ODU): Wire each Indoor Unit (IDU) controller to its respective ODU controller. The IDU shall coordinate its total heating /cooling requirements with its connected ODU. Indoor Unit (IDU): (Heating setpoint 72°F, Cooling setpoint 75°F) The Indoor Unit (IDU) operation shall be controlled by a factory furnished controller to be mounted on the wall. The wall-mounted controller shall operate the IDU to maintain the heating or cooling setpoint. Wire each IDU controller to the ODU controller it serves. Areas that are required to operate continuously by the Owner shall have the IDU controller set to operate the IDU continuously maintaining setpoint. E. A wall mounted temperature sensor shall monitor room temperature. If the room temperature rises above 85°F (adj.), the DDC/EMS shall signal a high room temperature alarm. F. Exhaust Fans: EF-1. Shall be started/stopped on a signal from factory thermostat (90F adjustable) or the hydrogen sensor provided with the battery charging system. When the hydrogen level in the space exceeds the set point, the fan shall run until shut down by the battery charging system. When the fan is cycled on, the operated dampers in the wall louver and fan inlet shall open and when the fan is not in operation the dampers shall be in the closed position. EF-2: Shall be started/stopped manually or by the energy management system. The fan shall run continuously. The two position dampers in the louver and at the fan shall be open when the fan is in operation and closed when the fan is off. The fan shall be turned off on a signal from the fire alarm system. END OF SECTION 25 09 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 260100 - 1 SECTION 26 01 00 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Contract Requirements: The foregoing GENERAL CONDITIONS, SPECIFIC CONDITIONS, and supplements thereto and all requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications shall form a part of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated herein. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all of the following Sections of Division 26 of these Specifications. All applicable portions of the work under Division 26 and Division 25 (Electrical Work) shall conform fully to all provisions of all other Division 26 sections along with other Sections of these Specifications including, but not limited to the following: GENERAL - STANDARDS, SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS, REVIEW, INSPECTION Sections EXCAVATING, FILLING, GRADING: DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK CONCRETE: DIVISION 3 MECHANICAL: DIVISION 25 - MECHANICAL B. Codes and Regulations: All electrical equipment and material and its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities. 1. California Code of Regulations, Title 8-Industrial Safety. 2. California Code of Regulations, Title 19-Public Safety. 3. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 1, Administrative Regulations. 4. California Building Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24-Part 2, 2013 edition. 5. California Electrical Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24-Part 3, 2013 edition. 6. California Mechanical Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24-Part 4. 7. California Plumbing Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24-Part 5. 8. California Fire Code (based on the National Fire Code - NFPA). 9. Regulations of the Division of the State Architect of the State of California, Office of Regulation Services. 10. Pacific Gas and Electric Service Requirements. NOTE: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply. Nothing in these Plans and Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable codes. C. Test and Standards: The tests, standards, or recommended procedures of the following agencies shall relate to all parts of these Specifications and shall be considered a minimum: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 260100 - 2 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 8. Illumination Engineering Society (IES). 9. National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA) 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK: The Electrical Contractor shall provide all materials, tools, equipment, labor and services necessary to furnish and install complete working electrical systems as shown on the Plans and described within these Specifications. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all power supplies, disconnects, controls, and any other work as called for in the Division 25 specifications and plans as well as all Electrical and Electrical related work as called for in the Division 26 specifications and plans. In addition, all conduit required by Divisions 27 and 28 and the associated drawings. All systems, at project completion and before final acceptance, shall be demonstrated to have a complete and working functional operation. The work includes but is not specifically limited to items indicated below. A. Demolition and Phasing: 1. De-energize, disconnect and remove electrical feeds to equipment being removed or relocated. 2. Remove or modify electrical installation in areas of remodel and demolition. 3. Make temporary feeds and connections to areas and equipment to allow phased construction and operation. B. Electrical Distribution: 1. New panelboards and related equipment. 2. Conduits and feeders for electrical power and control. C. Building and Mechanical Systems: 1. Complete lighting and power systems. 2. Electrical work associated with mechanical equipment. 3. Conduit and support system for installed telephone and computer signal systems by others. D. Communications Distribution: 1. Conduit and support system for Video Surveillance, Security, Fire Alarm, Public Address, and Clock Systems by others. E. Permits and fees relating to electrical work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 260100 - 3 END OF SECTION 26 01 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 1 SECTION 26 10 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show all raceways, wiring, number or types of fittings, offsets, bends or exact locations of items required by the electrical systems. Items not shown or indicted, which are clearly necessary for proper operation or installation of systems shown, shall be provided at no increase in contract price. B. The exact routing of systems and location of devices and equipment shall be governed by coordination with other trades, and structural and architectural conditions. The Architect or Electrical Engineer reserves the right, at no increase in contract price, to make reasonable changes in location of electrical equipment or wiring system so as to coordinate with other systems, to group them into orderly relationships, or to increase their utility. Electrical Contractor shall verify requirements in this regard prior to roughing in. C. Install electrical work in cooperation with other trades, make proper provisions to avoid interferences, and coordinate with structural and architectural feature in a manner approved by the Architect or Electrical Engineer. All changes caused by neglect to make such provisions shall be at Electrical Contractor's expense. Provide offsets and special fittings, as required to facilitate installation of the work. D. When a particular product or type of product is specified with a manufacturer's designation, the latest published specifications, installation, and construction information of the manufacturer shall constitute the minimum acceptable standard. Any substitutions shall be made in accordance with Paragraph 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS. 1.2 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE: A. Before submitting a proposal each bidder shall carefully examine the electrical, mechanical, architectural, and structural drawings and specifications. He shall also visit the sites and fully inform himself as to all existing conditions and limitations applying to the work. If, after such examination and study, it appears that any change from the drawings and specifications should be allowed, the bidder shall so state in writing together with any change in cost involved. B. By the act of submitting a proposal, each bidder shall be deemed to have made such examinations of the drawings and specifications and premises, and it will be assumed that he is therefore familiar with the entire scope of the project and has based his proposal upon the work described in the plans and specifications and upon all existing conditions and limitations applying to his work. 1.3 EXECUTION: A. Workmanship: The work shall be performed by competent licensed electrician, skilled in the particular phase of the work entailed. The work shall be first class throughout, CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 2 neat, accurate and in full accordance with the intent of these specifications, and to the satisfaction of the Architect or Electrical Engineer. B. Safety: All standard safety procedures as set forth by OSHA, CCR, and California Division of Industrial Safety shall be strictly adhered to. C. Coordination: The Electrical Contractor shall familiarize himself with the work of other crafts so as to be able to provide electrical service of correct size, voltage, and other requirements to any equipment to be installed. The installations shall coordinate as to location and time, and interference causing delays and non-acceptable construction shall be avoided. 1. Prior to commencing construction the Electrical Contractor shall arrange a conference with the Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors and sub-contractors as well as equipment suppliers, and shall verify types, sizes, locations, requirements, controls, and diagrams of all equipment furnished by them. Prior to roughing in, he shall inform the Architect and Electrical Engineer, in writing, that all phases of coordination of this equipment have been covered. 2. Exact equipment rough-in locations shall be verified from shop drawings. D. Cutting and Repairing: The Electrical Contractor shall do all cutting necessary for the proper installation of his work, repair any damage done by himself or his workmen, and coordinate his work with that of others. No cutting or patching shall be done without approval of the Architect or Electrical Engineer. Round holes through concrete slabs or walls shall be core drilled with a diamond drill, rectangular openings shall be cut with a diamond saw. In no case shall any concrete beam or column be cut. E. Sleeves and Openings: The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all sleeves and openings through walls and floors required by electrical work. All openings around conduits in sleeves shall be sealed with a material of equal fire rating as the surface penetrated. Openings not utilized shall be temporarily sealed in a similar manner. All required sleeves shall be furnished to and coordinated with the General Contractor. F. Access to Equipment: 1. Access Doors: All concealed equipment, controls, etc., shall be provided with access doors as called for in the Specifications which shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor of this section for work of this section. Installation shall be the responsibility of the trades in whose surfaces they will be installed. Access doors are not required in removable ceilings. 2. Equipment shall be installed in readily accessible locations, or means of access provided. Equipment will be deemed to be accessible only if all normal maintenance and operation can be performed with ease by an average sized person. G. Cleaning and Painting: All exposed work shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of work. Panelboard enclosures, fixtures and equipment, where finish has been marred in shipment or installation, shall be completely refinished. Minor finish damage shall be rectified as indicated by the Architect or Electrical Engineer. Electrical Contractor shall remove from the site all waste and rubbish resulting from his work. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 3 H. Permits and Fees: For work of this Specification Division, Electrical Contractor shall secure necessary permits and licenses, pay fees and deposits, and arrange for inspection, as required by applicable governmental rules, regulations, codes, and ordinances. 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL: A. Supervision: The Electrical Contractor shall personally, or through a competent representative, constantly supervise the work from beginning to completion and final acceptance. He shall cooperate fully with the inspection authorities in the provision of information and access to the work. He shall, to the best of his ability, maintain the same job foreman throughout the life of the project unless a replacement is requested or authorized by the Architect or Electrical Engineer. B. Inspection and Tests: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all labor and test equipment required to fully test and adjust the equipment installed under this specification and demonstrate its proper operation, in accordance with the General Conditions, and the following: 1. Arrange for all tests and inspections and provide minimum one (1) week prior notice to the Architect or Electrical Engineer. 2. A test must demonstrate that each piece of equipment, outlet, fixture, device, and appurtenance is in sound operating condition and in proper cooperative relation to associated equipment. 3. All tests shall be conducted under supervision of the Owner or his designated representative, and any defects of any nature which are apparent as a result of such test shall be made correct to the satisfaction of the Architect or Electrical Engineer before final acceptance is made. 4. No equipment shall be tested, or operated for any other purpose, such as checking motor rotation, until it has been fully checked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Check and tighten nuts, bolts, lugs, and similar elements of equipment; switchboards, motor control centers, busways, panels, etc. Final torquing shall be done in the presence of the Owner's inspecting representative. 6. Submit complete test reports with maintenance manual submission. C. Work Correction: Any portion of the work that does not perform satisfactorily or any defects that are disclosed by testing shall be corrected by Electrical Contractor at his expense before work will be accepted. 1.5 GROUNDING: A. The conduit system supports, cabinets, switchboards, etc., and neutral conductors must be permanently and effectively grounded by means of approved ground clamp, in accordance with the electrical safety orders of the Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California. B. The Electrical Contractor shall exercise every precaution to obtain good contacts at all panel boxes, pull boxes, etc. Where it is not possible to obtain good contacts, the conduit shall be bonded around the boxes with a #6 B&S gauge, rubber covered, double braided wire with ground clamps. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 4 C. Equipment and raceway bonding procedures shall be rigidly maintained and meet all jurisdictional requirements of codes and regulations. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Those products, or types of products, listed and specified are intended to set the standard for quality, design, and installation procedure required for the project. The Electrical Contractor shall not substitute other materials, products or systems without the written approval of the Architect or Electrical Engineer. All substitution requests must be submitted prior to bid. 1. Electrical Contractor's Options: a. Product specified only by reference standards: Select any product meeting standards. b. Product specified by naming several products and/or manufacturers: Select any product and/or manufacturer named. C. Product specified by naming several products and/or manufacturers and reference standards: Select any product meeting standards. Product and/or manufacturer names indicate products and/or manufacturers that meet standards. d. Product specified by naming only product: Select product specified. e. Product specified by naming one of more products and stating "or equivalent" in front of specified product: Select any product named or submit request for substitution for any product not specifically named in accordance with Paragraph 1.06. B. All requests for substitution shall be made in accordance with Division 1 and the General Conditions. C. Cost to Electrical Contractor or Bidder for review of Substitution Request: 1. Each review of a Substitution Request by the Engineer will be billed to the submitter (Electrical Contractor or Bidder) at an hourly rate of$200.00 an hour, two hour minimum for each review, whether approved or rejected. a. The Engineer may waive the review cost if in his sole opinion the submittal was complete and the time involved in the review was not substantial, and it was in the best interest of the Owner. D. All requests for substitution shall be in writing and shall indicate all information required thereon, including an itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product(s). Representative samples may be required for determination of equality. E. All proposed substitution shall be a standard product of the firm, under current manufacture and be a catalog item at time of bid. F. In making request for substitution, Electrical Contractor can attest that: 1. He personally investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 5 2. He will provide the same guarantee or warranty for substitution as for product or method specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently become apparent. G. Submit three (3) copies of substitution request prior to submittals required in accordance with Paragraph 1.6. 1.7 SUBMITTALS: A. Make submittals for all material to be used on the project, whether as specified or substitutions, within thirty (30) days after award of Contract by the Owner. Reference the General Conditions and Division 1 Section 01 31 13 for procedures and administration of submittals for this project in addition to the following: 1. All submittals shall be organized in an electronic folder, identified by Project Title and Section. 2. Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade name, number, size rating, and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and check materials and equipment. Words "as specified" are not sufficient identification. 3. Identify each submittal item by reference to specifications section paragraph in which item is specified, or Drawing or Detail number. 4. All submittals shall be submitted in complete groups, e.g., all light fixtures at one time. No partial or incomplete submittals will be accepted. 5. Organize submittal in the same sequence as they appear in specification sections, articles, or paragraphs. 6. Provide detailed index listing for all submittals. B. Product Data: See Prolog/Converge per Division 1 Section 01 31 13 for submittals for this project. Submit separated in groups, as follows: 1. Basic Site Components a. Conduits and raceway types required, including fittings b. Concrete pull-boxes, vaults, and manholes C. Electrical Identification items d. Concrete coloring 2. Basic Materials a. Conduits and raceway types required, including fittings b. Electric wire, cable and connectors C. Electrical boxes and fittings d. Wiring devices e. Each type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal f. Fire stopping Material g. Electrical Identification items h. Junction Boxes i. Time Clocks j. Terminal Cabinets 3. Distribution Equipment a. Switchboards b. Transformers CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 6 C. Transfer switches d. Panelboards e. Disconnects and Starters f. Terminal Cabinets 4. Lighting a. Fixtures b. Lighting Controls 5. Any Additional System C. Shop Drawings: Upon product review, submit shop drawings showing physical arrangement, wiring diagrams, construction details, finishes, materials used in fabrication, provisions for conduit entrance, access requirements for installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical characteristics, foundation and support details, weight, power sources, circuit numbers. Shop drawings shall be compatible with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Show wiring as actually installed, connected, and identified for this specific project. Include identification of cables and cable conductors. Shop and instruction drawings shall cover the equipment or device to be installed and not merely the general class of such equipment or device. Submit four prints and one reproducible as follows: 1. Panelboards 2. Special Manholes and Vaults D. Samples: Submit single, factory boxed production run samples identical to equipment to be supplied, as follows. Samples will be retained for analysis and comparison purposes. 1. Receptacles 2. SPST and 3-way switches 3. Base cover plates 1.8 DOCUMENTATION: A. Construction Record Drawings: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, in accordance with the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, a complete set of "as constructed" drawings which clearly indicate all deviations from the basic contract drawings, including exact dimensioned locations and depths for all stubbed conduits, location and size of spare conduits and conductors, all new and uncovered existing work outside the buildings, power feeder runs, and communications "primary" conduit runs. Corrections and changes shall be kept up-to-date at all times. B. All submittals and shop drawings shall be resubmitted with record drawings showing all revisions and changes made, clearly marked with field termination wire so as to reflect actual construction record conditions. Revision and changes will be enumerated and new dates of drawings shown. Grouped submittals shall be combined into loose leaf binders. C. Structural Conditions: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 7 1. Location as indicated on the drawings show the arrangements desired for the principal apparatus, fixtures, etc., and shall be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment shall be exercised in carrying on the work to secure a neat arrangement of the electrical systems and to overcome local difficulties and interferences of structural conditions wherever encountered. 2. Notching and boring of structural members must be held to an absolute minimum. Electrical Contractor shall lay out his work and obtain the approval of the Owner's Representative for necessary holes and notches before proceeding with the work. Where notches and holes are approved, they shall be carefully held to the minimum sizes actually required. D. Cutting and Patching: The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the cutting and patching of rough or finish work required by his installation. Patching shall be of the same material, finish and workmanship as the original work, and when required by the Owner's Representative, done by mechanics of the original trade. 1.9 SEISMIC RESTRAINT AND ANCHORAGE: A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and electrical equipment in accordance with latest edition CBC, Chapter 16 and Table 16A-0, and all provisions of this Section. B. Submit calculations prepared and signed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California, showing compliance with the above for all electrical equipment weighing more than 50 pounds, excepting items corresponding exactly in configuration and weight to those specified and detailed. Where anchorage details are not shown on drawings, the field installation shall be subject to the approval of the Architect and Electrical Engineer. C. All equipment mounted on concrete shall be secured with steel stud expansion anchors requiring a drilled hole. Power driven anchors are not acceptable. Minimum spacing shall be ten (10) diameters center to center and five (5) diameters center to edge of concrete. Maximum allowable stresses for tension and shear shall be 80% of the ICBO test report values. Hilti, Phillips. 1.10 EXISTING SUB-SURFACE STRUCTURES The Electrical Contractor shall examine all record drawings made available by the Owner to locate existing underground systems, utilities, conduits, and pipes prior to installing the electrical distribution system. The Electrical Contractor shall also examine the site for possible locations of sprinkler pipes. Any damage done to the existing systems during the course of the electrical work, whose locations could be reasonably determined, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and the utility or agency involved, at the expense of the Electrical Contractor. 1.11 PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS: The Electrical Contractor shall retain in his possession and shall be responsible for, all portable and detachable parts or portions of the installation, such as fuses, keys, locks, CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 8 adapters, locking clips, and inserts, until final completion of his work. These parts shall be itemized and delivered to the Owner at Project Closeout. 1.12 OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUALS: A. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare manuals describing the operations, service, and maintenance requirements of, and complete parts lists for all electrical equipment. B. Equipment: Equipment described in the manual shall include all equipment listed under "Submittals", and all other auxiliary miscellaneous systems. C. Information contained in the manual shall consist of 8'/2" x 11" size catalog data on each item, together with parts lists, description of operation, maintenance information, shop drawings, wiring and riser diagrams, and test reports as installed. Catalogs and data in the manuals shall be neat, clean copies. Drawing shall be accordion folded to letter size and installed in an envelope within the manual. An index shall be provided, which shall list all contents in an orderly manner with the respective equipment supplier's name, address and telephone number, and the manufacturer's recommended servicing instructions. Diagrams shall be complete for each system installed. Provide divider sheets with identifying tabs between each category. 1.13 INDEPENDENT TESTING AND CERTIFICATION: A. General: The Electrical Contractor shall provide the services of an independent testing and certification company acceptable to the Owner to inspect, test, and certify the electrical equipment and installation as indicated by Division 26 Specification Sections and as generally summarized as follows. 1. The testing firm shall provide all material, equipment, labor, and technical supervision to perform such tests and certifications. 2. It is the purpose of these tests to assure that all tested electrical equipment is operational and within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications. 3. The tests and shall determine suitability for energization. B. Qualifications of Testing Firm: 1. The testing firm shall be a corporately-and financially independent testing organization that can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the testing firm. 2. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in testing of electrical equipment devices, installations, and systems. 3. The testing firm shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, or be a Full Member Company of the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 4. The lead, on-site, technical person shall be currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in electrical power distribution system testing. 5. The testing firm shall utilize engineers and technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for testing services. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 9 6. The terms used here within, such as Testing Company, shall be construed to mean the testing firm. C. Methods: Testing methods and equipment utilized by the Testing Firm shall be in accordance with applicable sections of the NETA "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems". D. Testing shall be performed and certification approved before energy is applied to items tested. E. All test equipment will be noted with factory calibration certification and date. F. Any item dismounted or reconnected by the Electrical Contractor after test and certification will be retested and recertified before energy is applied. G. Any items not meeting the Manufacturer's tolerances or performance criteria shall be corrected by the Electrical Contractor and retested and recertified before energy is applied. H. Tests and certification report shall be submitted in accordance with the applicable sections of these specifications. Tests shall be presented in an organized binder with subheadings for all line ups and tests performed with results therein. I. Items not passing Manufacturer's recommended tolerances will be enumerated on a separate set of sheets before each section. J. Coordination: The Electrical Contractor shall notify Architect or Engineer of testing schedule a minimum of one (1)week in advance of performance of any test. K. Testing Firm Test and Certification Summary: 1. Main Switchboards 2. Solid State Circuit Breakers 3. Ground Fault Protected (GFI) circuit breakers 4. Isolation Panelboards 1.14 PENETRATIONS: A. Fire Rated Surfaces: Conduits or cables passing through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc., of greater than one (1) hour construction shall be sleeved. Conduits shall be centered in the sleeve and the annular space around the conduit or cable shall be sealed with fire rated materials in accordance with California State Fire Marshal requirement and approvals and as called for in the specifications. B. Concrete and Masonry: All conduits passing through concrete or unit masonry walls, floors, or foundations shall be sleeved to allow seismic movement of the building structure without overstressing of the conduit and its connections. 1.15 PRELIMINARY OPERATION: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261000 - 10 The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the electrical system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee or relieving the Electrical Contractor of his responsibilities. 1.16 GUARANTEES: All material furnished and installed under this Contract shall be new and free from all defects and shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of the work. Should any trouble develop during this period, due to defective material or faulty workmanship, this Electrical Contractor shall furnish all necessary materials and labor to correct the trouble without any cost to the Owner. Any defective material or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of installation shall be corrected immediately to the entire satisfaction of the Owner or his representative. 1.17 DEMOLITION: A. Demolition: The Electrical Contractor shall modify or remove the existing electrical installation as required by the building alterations within the area of alteration work. All removed material not to be reused or retained by the Owner shall become the property of the Electrical Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for de-energizing electrical circuits in demolition area so as to ensure safe working conditions. In walls, and ceilings to be removed, do circuit check to determine if areas beyond work will be affected and provide temporary feeds to them; disconnect and remove all electrical devices, fixtures and other devices. Cut off and seal all unused floor penetrations for existing wire not utilized. Remove conduit in exposed location. Abandon in place unused conduit in concealed locations after removing wire. B. Continuity of Service: 1. The Electrical Contractor shall permanently reroute or relocate existing wiring and/or equipment which is required, while maintaining existing systems in use. 2. Utility Work Approval: The Electrical Contractor shall give required notice and obtain approval from the utility company prior to commencing work. 3. Service outages shall be kept to an absolute minimum. There shall not be any interruption of power to any building or portion of a building that is not agreed upon by the Owner and Engineer in writing. Any outages shall occur only at times convenient to the Owner, predominately between the hours of midnight and 6:00 a.m. The Electrical Contractor's necessary work associated with outages shall commence upon de-energization and shall continue uninterrupted until normal power is restored. Electrical Contractor shall maintain optimal crew size to keep outage time to a minimum. 4. Premium Pay: Any overtime work required to comply with the above paragraph shall be included as part of this contract. No additional payments will be authorized for work performed on weekends, holidays or other than normal working hours, as required to schedule outages at Owner's convenience. END OF SECTION 26 10 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261110 - 1 SECTION 26 11 00 - ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Provide all related work required for installation of electrical systems. B. Types of electrical related work specified in this section include the following: 1. Excavating for Electrical Work: Underground electrical wiring and service tunnels. Independent (isolated)foundations. Underground electrical vaults. 2. Concrete for Electrical Work: Equipment and pole fixture bases, conduit caps. Lean concrete backfill to support electrical work. Encasement of electrical work. Underground structural concrete to accommodate electrical work. Vaults for electrical work. Electrical equipment foundations and mounting pads. Rough grouting in and around electrical work. Patching concrete which has been cut to accommodate electrical work. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. B. Protect property from damages which might result from excavating and backfilling. C. Protect persons from injury at excavations by barricades, warnings, and illumination. D. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages and hazards. E. Keep the work site clean and free from rubbish and debris. The Electrical Contractor shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping, and sprinkling with water, or other means as necessary. F. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site as soon as they are no longer necessary; and, upon completion of the work and before final inspection, the entire work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean and neat appearance. All cleanup, dust control, and project site maintenance costs shall be included in the Electrical Contractor's bid. 1.3 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: A. Unless otherwise provided, the Electrical Contractor shall repair or replace all existing improvements (e.g., curbs, sidewalks, driveways, fences, signs, utilities, street CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261110 - 2 surfaces, structures, etc.) damages or removed as a result of his operations. Repairs and replacements shall be at least equal to existing improvements and shall match them in finish and dimension. B. Trees, lawns and shrubbery not designed for removal shall be protected from damage or injury. If damaged or removed because of the Electrical Contractor's operations, they shall be restored or replaced in as nearly the original condition and location as is reasonably possible. Lawns shall be reseeded and covered with suitable mulch. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL ELECTRICAL WORK: A. Bottom of Trench to 6" above Conduit Material: Well graded sand. B. Backfill Material: Sandy or silty loam, free of lumps, laid in 6" layers, uniformly mixed to proper moisture and compacted to required density. 2.2 CONCRETE WORK: A. Equipment Bases: 2500 psi concrete and reinforcing in accordance with Division 03 concrete. B. Pole Fixture Bases: 3000 psi concrete and reinforcing in accordance with Division 03 concrete. C. Conduit Cap/Encasement: 2000 psi concrete slurry. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK: A. General: Do not excavate for electrical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total elapsed time from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimal. B. Excavate with vertical-sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations. Remove sheeting and cross bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not endanger the work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere with other work. C. Width and Cover: Unless otherwise noted, minimum earth cover above conduit shall be 36". Excavate for conduit with 6" to 9" clearance at both sides of conduit, except where otherwise shown or required for proper installation of joints and fittings. Excavate for other electrical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances. D. Depth for Subbase Support: Where installation of subbase material is indicated, excavate for installation of subbase material in depth indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 6" below bottom of work to be supported. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261110 - 3 E. Excavate near large trees (within drip line) by hand, and protect the root system from damage or dry out to greatest extent possible. Verify trench locations with Architect or Engineer prior to trenching. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. F. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner which will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line). 1. Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material. 2. Dispose of excavated material that is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material. Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in lawful manner. 3.2 DEWATERING: Maintain dry excavations for electrical work by removing water. Project excavations from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations. 3.3 BACKFILLING: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, backfill with properly qualified backfill material. B. Backfill with well graded sand to 6" above conduits. C. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil materials. D. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of electrical work, and compact simultaneously. Do not dislocate the work from installed positions. E. Backfill excavations in 6" high courses of backfill material uniformly compacted to the following densities (% of minimum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven hand- operated compaction equipment. If backfill is determined to be suitable and required compaction is demonstrated by laboratory test, water compaction in 6" layers may be used, subject to review by Engineer. Lawn/Landscaped Areas: 85% Paved Areas, Other Than Roadways: 90% Roadways: 95% F. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at time of backfilling excavations for electrical work. G. Compaction Test: Demonstrate proper compaction by testing at one-half of the trench depth. Perform three (3)tests per 100' of trench. H. Encase all underground conduits with concrete to 6" above conduit material before backfilling. PG&E conduits shall be capped with 3" concrete and the top the capping colored red. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL RELATED WORK REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 261110 - 4 3.4 BORING AND CUTTING: A. Where trench crosses concrete walks or paved areas bore or saw cut and patch as required for conduit installation. Boring shall be by screw auger or dry ramming. Where soil conditions warrant, (water boring may be allowed on a case by case basis upon approval of the Engineer). No water jetting shall be allowed. B. Bore and saw cut as indicated on the plans, or where not indicated; bore under concrete, paved, tiled or permanent surface 20'-0" wide or less. Saw cut permanent surfaces wider than 20'-0" with Engineer's approval. C. Depth of saw cutting shall be no greater than '/4" below slab thickness. 3.5 PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE, EXCAVATION WORK: A. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observable at electrical work excavations during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. B. Restore appearance, quality and condition of the surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK: A. Install concrete for electrical work in accordance with Division 03 and the drawings. B. Exposed fixture bases and enclosures shall be Architectural Grade Concrete in accordance with Division 03. END OF SECTION 26 11 10 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 1 SECTION 26 20 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: Furnish and install material and equipment as indicated on drawings and as specified. 1.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Shall be new and of the best quality used for the purpose in good commercial practice. 1.3 UL APPROVAL: All material and equipment within the scope of the UL reexamination service shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their label. 1.4 STORAGE: All material and equipment shall be stored in a manner to prevent damage or corrosion. Equipment with components which can be damaged by moisture shall be placed in special heated storage facilities. 1.5 DRAWINGS: Drawings for all equipment are intended to be diagrammatic only. Any location not actually dimensioned is not to be considered as necessarily final or accurate. Exact locations must be determined in the field from the requirements of the equipment that is to be installed. 1.6 COORDINATION: Before rough-in of any utility lines, services, and feeders, or of any equipment, the Electrical Contractor must coordinate his work with that of other crafts and trades so that these services shall be installed in their proper locations and without interference to the equipment or building structure. This will require cooperation among all crafts and trades, the Inspector, and General Contractor, along with study of shop drawings and the building plans. 1.7 ELECTRICAL WORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER: A. All electrical devices and equipment installed in exposed locations shall be protected by suitable NEMA type 3R enclosures, cast steel boxes with gasketed steel covers, or other Engineer approved methods. B. All ferrous metal portions of electrical work exposed to weather including conduits, clamps, supports, etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized. County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-1 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 2 1.8 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each item submitted under submittals, Section 261000, Paragraph 1.7. Submit calculations in accordance with Paragraph 1.9. Reference Division 01, Section 01 31 13 for the procedures and administration of submittals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. Rigid Metal Conduit-Type RMC: All locations as follows excepting those specifically indicated for EMT and PVC. All exterior locations above grade, in concrete walls and slabs, or elsewhere shown on plans. Runs within, passing through or above hazardous areas shall be rigid. RMC shall be new galvanized threaded, conforming to UL 6. All couplings and connectors shall be threaded. RMC shall be specifically used on roofs or on all surfaces of corridor and walkway coverings. Threadless fittings are not allowed. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing-Type EMT: Interior dry locations above ground, exposed only above 60" above floor in non-finished areas where not subject to physical abuse or damage, and exterior walls and underside of eaves above 96" above grade. EMT shall be new galvanized, conforming to UL 797, furnished in 10 foot lengths. In interior locations, EMT shall be coupled with steel setscrew type connectors. In exterior locations EMT shall be coupled with steel compression type couplings requiring the tightening of a nut in all locations. Crimp type or die cast connectors or couplings are not acceptable. Connectors to have nylon insulated throats. C. Flexible Metal Conduit-Type FMC: Connections from junction boxes to lay-in fluorescent fixtures in accessible ceilings only, 6' maximum. FMC shall be flexible interlocking single strip zinc coated steel with an insulated copper ground wire pulled with the conductors, conforming to UL 1. Aluminum FMC shall not be used. Minimum size 3/4". Fittings shall be steel clamp type utilizing two (2) screws, galvanized steel with nylon insulated throat type. FMC is not to be used for connection to permanently fixed equipment. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit-Type LFMC: Connections to machinery and equipment only. LFMC shall be flexible interlocking single strip steel conduit with liquid tight exterior cover, with all connections made using galvanized steel liquid tight connectors with "O" ring gaskets and nylon insulated throat and with copper ground wire, American Brass Sealtight or equivalent, conforming to UL 1. LFMC maximum length allowed is 36". LFMC is not to be used for connection to permanently fixed equipment. E. Rigid Polyvinyl chloride Conduit-Type PVC.: Underground locations and below vapor barrier of slabs. No PVC shall be installed in slab floors or in exposed locations. PVC County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-2 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 3 conduit shall be schedule 40, Underwriters' Laboratories tested, furnished in 10' lengths, conforming to UL 651-77. F. Surface Metal Raceway: Type and locations as noted on the drawings. Provide concealed connections. Paint to match adjacent surface unless noted otherwise. 2.2 OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES: A. Boxes shall be one piece die formed galvanized steel of shape and with fittings necessary to suit location and use. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to contain all wires, devices, and connection fittings required without crowding, minimum 2 gang for receptacles. Ceiling and surface mounted boxes shall be minimum 4" square by 1'/2" or octagonal. Plaster rings shall be provided where required. Boxes shall be used wherever possible. Where voltages are mixed in the same box (120V/277V), install welded partition barriers to separate the systems. B. Exposed boxes shall be cast steel provided with steel gasketed weatherproof covers and utilize only cast metal threaded hub type fittings. 2.3 WIRING DEVICES: A. Wall Switches: 1. 120/277 Volt Switches: Quiet slow make, slow break design, toggle handle, with totally enclosed case, rated 20 ampere, heavy duty specification grade conforming to Federal Specification WS896. Provide matching two pole, 3-way, 4-way, and key switches as required. Hubbell or ArrowHart 1221 series. 2. Switch and Pilot Light: Push action type with red handle, integral long-life neon pilot light, rated at 15 ampere, 120 volts. 3. Color: Normal Lighting Circuits; provide ivory, gray, white, and brown colored switches dependent upon room wall finish as directed by Architect. Emergency power circuits; provide red colored switches. 4. Thermal switches where designated on plans or in specifications shall be equivalent to Square D, Type "F", Class 2510. Thermal switch heater elements shall be rated for overload protection of loads controlled. Switches for special purposes, such as exhaust fans, boiler control, heaters, etc., shall be engraved with 1/8" high letters on plates. Adhesive labels are not acceptable. B. Receptacles: 1. Duplex Receptacles: Full gang size, polarized duplex, parallel blade, U-grounding slot, specification grade conforming to Federal Specification WC596, rated at 20 amperes, 125 volts, designed for split feed service. Hubbell or ArrowHart 5352 series or equal. 2. Duplex Receptacle - Ground Fault Interrupting: Hubbell or ArrowHart #GF-5362 series or equal. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be required within six (6)feet of all sinks and in exterior locations. 3. Nameplates: Provide engraved or embossed plastic for receptacles other than standard duplex receptacles, indicating voltage, phase and amperes. County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-3 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 4 4. Color: Normal Power Circuits; Provide ivory, gray, white, and brown colored receptacles dependent upon room wall finish as directed by Architect. Emergency Power Circuits, provide red colored receptacles. 2.4 WALL PLATES: A. Provide plate for each wiring device, or as required to protect or cover-up existing conditions left exposed due to the removal of existing devices, conduits, or equipment. B. Interior Flush: All locations unless noted otherwise, stainless steel (0.35") satin finish, Sierra "S" series. C. Weatherproof Plates: Steel, gasketed, for receptacles, provide spring loaded gasketed doors. Provide at all weatherproof locations. D. Where two gang boxes are required for single gang devices, provide special plates with device opening in one gang and second gang blank. E. Receptacle Plates: Each receptacle plate shall be identified with the panel number and the circuit number. This identification shall be with engraved phenolic labels applied to plate with permanent contact cement. Labels shall be 5/16" high, gray phenolic plastic, with 1/8" high white engraved lettering. Special receptacles shall also indicate voltage, phase, and amps. F. Multi-Gang Switch Plates: Where three or more switches occur at a common location, provide engraved labeling, '/4' high (black), on the switch plate(s) indicating areas or fixtures served by each switch. Submit schedule to Engineer for approval. G. Blank bushed or special outlet plates shall be provided for all signal systems outlets as required. 2.5 FLOOR BOXES: A. Floor Boxes: Concrete tight fully adjustable type with round brass faceplate, deep fill type. Walker 886 series, Hubbell or Steel City equivalent. B. Receptacle Floor Fitting: Brass, duplex flap Walker 895 series or equivalent. C. Telephone Floor Fitting: Brass round opening, combination 2'/4" x 1", Walker 866 CK-1 series or equivalent. 2.6 WIRE: A. Low Voltage - (Under 600 Volt): 1. Feeder and Branch Circuit Wire: Copper type THWN/THHN, 600 volt, from new fresh stock, bearing UL label, delivered to site in unbroken packages; minimum size 12 AWG. All 20/1 home runs over 180 feet from panel for 277 volt circuits, and 100 feet from panel for 120 volt shall be increased to next larger size. All County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-4 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 5 conductors shall be stranded copper. All control, signal, and communication wires shall be stranded. Fire alarm wire shall be solid. 2. High Temperature Wire: NEMA type AF or SFF-2 stranded, for fixture wires and circuit runs within fixtures. 2.7 TERMINAL CABINETS: A. Telephone and Signal System Cabinets: 1. Telephone and signal system cabinets for collection of individual device or outlet homeruns, or mounting of equipment shall be 24" wide x 36" high x 6" deep unless otherwise noted. Cabinets shall be provided with V fire treated plywood backboard "Dricon", conforming with CBC Section 207, one piece per cabinet, sized to maximum dimension of cabinet. 2. Cabinets shall be provided with vertical barriers as required separate conduits of different signal systems, one partitioned area per system type; i.e. fire alarm, clock, etc. 3. Cabinets located in finished areas; classrooms, corridors, storage rooms, etc. shall be flush mounted, constructed to match lighting panelboards, with concealed flush door hinges and concealed face panel trim clamps. Provide with flush lock keyed to match panelboard locks. 4. Cabinets located in electrical rooms or electrical closets may be screw cover type with continuous hinged door, surface or flush to match adjacent panels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT RACEWAYS: A. General: Install conduits in a neat manner, concealed except as noted. Mount conduits directly to building structure with clamps or two hole straps where possible. Secure straps with cadmium plated wood screws into wood, and machine screws into metal or inserts preset in concrete. Where impractical to secure directly to structure, suspended on conduit hangers. Wherever possible, group and rack multiple conduit runs. 1. Conduit Size: All branch circuit homeruns, and conduit runs containing more than two (2) circuits shall be a minimum of V diameter. B. Installation and Cleaning: Install free from dents, kinks and bruises. Plug ends at time of installation to prevent entry of dirt or moisture. Thoroughly clean out conduits before installing conductors. Thoroughly clean all exposed conduit exteriors. C. Provide tagged pullwire in all empty conduits. Pullwire shall be 1/4" Kevlar high strength measuring tape #39243 with a minimum breaking strength of 1250 pounds. Leave 36" free coiled each end. Tagging all runs shall include the source and destination locations. D. Plastic conduit shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and accepted trade practice. Where plastic conduit runs rise above ground in exposed County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-5 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 6 locations, the riser bend and riser shall be of 40 Mil PVC coated galvanized rigid metal conduit installed according to rigid metal portion of this specification section. E. All plastic, flexible, feeder and receptacle branch conduits shall carry a grounding bond wire with the size as shown, or where not shown, as determined by applicable codes for the ampacity of the circuit being carried. F. Protective Coating: All metallic conduits installed in contact with earth, or in concrete in contact with earth, shall be coated with a minimum 40 Mil PVC coating on all conduit lengths and fittings. The coating shall correspond to ATSM D638-68, D1706, D140-64, and D746-64T specifications and Federal Test Standard 141, Method 615z. Coating shall be continuous without flaws showing exposed metal. Coating shall extend to the device conduit is terminated to in exposed locations and 12" above grade in unexposed locations. Tape wrapped conduit is not acceptable. G. Conduits which stub-up from or through floor slabs shall be installed so that none of the curved portion of the elbow is exposed. Conduits stubbed up shall be rigid type with coupling installed flush floor to permit future conduit removal. Seal unused conduit with a flush threaded pipe plug. H. Conduit Routing: Route exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to walls or floors. Install conduits in masonry walls at time of wall construction. No conduits shall be run under heavy equipment, footing or other structural elements. Where runs must cross footings, install in sleeves per structural details. I. Conduit Runs in Ceiling Areas: Conduits running above accessible ceiling shall be routed parallel or perpendicular to ceiling system and structural members. All conduit runs shall be coordinated to avoid conflicts with mechanical and structural systems, lighting fixtures and ceiling support system. Conduits shall be installed as close to the structure above as possible to avoid conflict with removal of ceiling panels. It is specifically not permitted to attach or support conduit from ceiling system suspension wire. Exposed cables shall be strapped to the structure above the accessible ceiling. J. Conduits Penetrating Membranes: Where conduits penetrate wall or slab membrane moisture barriers, penetration shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of these Specifications for"Thermal and Moisture Protection." K. Conduits Penetrating Roof: Provide flashing and counter flashing making watertight joints where conduits pass through roof or waterproofing membranes. L. Escutcheons: Conduits penetrating wall, floors, or ceiling in exposed locations shall be installed with appropriate escutcheon plates. M. Separations: Coordinate with all other crafts to allow minimum of 12" running and 6" crossing clearance at flues, hot water pipes, steam pipes, and heat sources. Keep electrical conduits free from contact with all other piping runs of other systems or of dissimilar metals. County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-6 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 7 N. Concrete Encased Conduits: All conduits installed underground shall be encased with 2,000 psi concrete to a minimum of 6" above the conduit. The top of concrete encasements for feeds greater than 600 volts shall be colored red. O. Conduits Crossing Building Joints: Conduits shall not be run in concrete slab or wall construction where passing through an earthquake or expansion joint. At such condition, conduit shall be run exposed or in furred ceiling space with 24" length of flexible conduit crossing joints. P. Conduits Penetrating Floors and Walls: Provide grouting around raceways where penetrating floor slabs, concrete or masonry walls. At fire separation walls or floors, use Engineer and CSFM approved expanding type intumescent foam, to maintain the fire rating of the surface penetrated. Q. Conduit Support: Support of conduit and tubing in steel stud walls shall be by #18 gauge steel wire, secured to steel bars or straps attached to steel studs. Conduits rising vertically between wall studs shall be tied to a horizontal cross support attached tightly to eliminate any movement. R. Conduits Installed Below Floor Slabs: Conduits 1" diameter and smaller may be installed below concrete slab vapor barriers or sand fill by shallow scraping and recovering with earth as required to bury just below surface. Install to minimize disruption to engineered fill. Conduits larger than 1" shall be trenched to a minimum depth of 12" below slab and backfilled and compacted in accordance with Section 26110. S. Conduits Installed in Area of Footings: Conduits installed in the area of footings shall be installed per the applicable structural details and the electrical details for installing conduits in the vicinity of footings. T. Conduit Hangers: 1. Conduit hangers spaced at 8'-0" on center maximum with one hanger adjacent to each outlet box, shall be installed wherever conduit cannot be directly attached to structure. Hangers shall be secured to wood structures with steel brackets and wood screws; to steel structures with appropriate clamps complete with positive attachment restraining strap or hook rod to prevent slippage; and to concrete structures with preset imbedded inserts or machine screws with expansion shields. Preset inserts are preferred to provide a secure anchorage with greatest location flexibility. Power or velocity driven type attachments will not be allowed. Complete hanger installation shall provide a safety factor of five (5) based upon maximum CEC allowed conduit fill. 2. Hangers for rigid conduit and EMT 2" and smaller in concealed spaces shall be galvanized perforated type strap wrapped around raceway and bolted; then fastened to structure as described above. 3. Hangers for exposed conduit and tubing suspended below ceilings shall be steel rods '/4" size for up to 2" and 3/8" for larger size conduits, with adjustable pipe ring; Steel City#C-149, Fee and Mason #199 or#201, or approved equivalent. County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-7 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 8 4. Trapeze type supports shall be used where conduits are run grouped together. Such hangers shall consist of 3/8" minimum steel rods, structural steel channels, and clamps of Kindorf, Unistrut, or approved equivalent manufacture. 5. Electrical Contractor shall furnish concrete inserts to General Contractor, and coordinate location. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOXES AND INTERIOR PULL BOXES: Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or in electrical rooms, utility rooms, or storage areas. No junction box shall be installed in an inaccessible area. Exposed boxes shall be cast with gasketed weatherproof covers. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR PULL BOXES AND MANHOLES: A. Where pull boxes are used without bottoms, they shall be set on 3/4' crushed rock of a volume equal to that of the pull box used. B. Where pre-cast units are used, all joints are to be tongue and groove, sealed with a suitable sealer. C. Where conduits enter, they shall be properly bushed and extended a minimum 1/2" from inside of wall into pull box. D. All conduits entering pull boxes and manholes shall be sealed watertight with suitable duct sealing compound. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES: A. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes flush in finished areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and above removable ceilings. Boxes shall be set true and flush with all necessary and correct adapters and/or plaster rings. All boxes set deeper than code allowable shall be corrected by use of factory made extension rings such as Raco#976 or equivalent. Boxes in wood construction shall be mounted to support with wood screws. B. Device Locations: Locations of devices on plans are approximate only. Electrical Contractor shall study the architectural and structural plans and locate the outlets so that his work is coordinated with the work of others and the fixtures and devices present a pleasing and symmetrical appearance when installed. The location of outlets centered on any architectural feature shall be exact. Outlet locations may be moved a maximum of ten (10) feet from the location shown on the plans before roughing-in without cost to Owner. Switches in relation to door swings and cabinets must be coordinated with architectural drawings. This Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with Mechanical Contractor regarding thermostat outlets and other equipment locations. C. Device Height: The following dimensions for locating wall outlets represent the distance from the finished floor to the center of the outlet, unless noted otherwise. OUTLET INCHES County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-8 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 9 Telephone 15 Convenience receptacle 15 Lighting switch 48 Clock outlet 84 Wall mount telephone 54 Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with required location for equipment served. D. Boxes Located in Stud Walls: Securely mount with screws to studs or blocking so that box face is straight and true with finish wall alignment. Install backing to align box where studs are twisted or crooked, and as required to meet dimensioned or detailed device spacings. Blocking material shall be same as wall studs and shall be attached to two adjacent studs. E. Boxes in Counterbacks or Casework: Install in accordance with architectural details. Where not indicated in details, the Architect or Engineer shall be consulted prior to installation. F. Boxes Above Accessible Suspended Ceilings: Mount to horizontal trapeze hangers, secured to rod attached to structure above. It is specifically not permitted to attach or support boxes from ceiling system suspension wire. Conduit and boxes shall be located a minimum of 12" above ceiling where suspended depth permits. Conduit and boxes shall not be installed prior to ceiling unless system is attached or braced to structure as to prevent horizontal movement of conduit. G. Boxes Located in Masonry Walls: Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for boxes. Use rotary cutting equipment to cut masonry work for installation. Where furring occurs, install extension rings to bring box flush to furred surface. Where masonry is the finished surface, locate boxes uniformly for each height at either the top or bottom of a block course and install so that device plate will fit tight to block wall without extending over mortar joints. H. Outlets in Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Locate either centered on the joint between tiles, or in the center of a tile. All such outlet locations shall be carefully planned and verified with the Architect or Engineer. I. Exterior Wall Outlets: Conduits shall enter boxes or exterior wall mounted devices at the sides or top only. No conduit shall enter the bottom of such boxes. J. Common Boxes and Alignment: Devices shown adjacent to each other at the same mounting location shall be gang under a common plate, except for outlets of different voltages such as telephone and duplex receptacles. Outlets mounted one over the other, or side by side, shall be in exact alignment, centered on one another. K. Sound Control: Boxes and conduit shall be installed in a manner that minimizes sound transmission between rooms. Boxes mounted in a common wall shall be offset horizontally a minimum of 12" and mounted in different stud spaces wherever possible. County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-9 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 10 No boxes shall be mounted back to back. No through boxes shall be used. Offset boxes may be connected with flexible conduit not to exceed 18" length. L. Sealing: All unused holes or openings in boxes shall be slugged or sealed by an acceptable means. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: A. Devices shall be securely fastened to outlet box with face flush with plate. B. Mount receptacles vertically in appropriate boxes with grounding pin towards floor, except where noted for horizontal installation. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF WALL PLATES: Install coverplates on wiring devices. Plates shall be set plumb and flush with finish wall surface. Plates located adjacent to one another shall be exactly the same height. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF WIRE: A. Scope: Provide all wiring for complete electrical work, installed in code conforming raceway. Branch circuit wiring shall be#12 AWG minimum, unless noted otherwise. B. Home Runs: Branch circuit conductors shall home run to panelboards or motor control centers in groupings shown on the drawings. Combining branch circuit home run conductors in single conduits other than that shown shall not be permitted. C. Color Coding shall be strictly adhered to and shall be as indicated in Section 26210 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION: 1. Color coding utilized shall be noted on electrical "as constructed" drawings and shop drawings. 2. The color coding for control circuit wires will be as noted on the plans or as agreed upon with the Architect or Electrical Engineer and will be of a color other than that designated for the phase wires. Where control wires are installed and various colors are used, they shall be noted on them "as constructed" drawings and shop drawings turned in at the completion of the job. D. Pulling: Use approved wire pulling lubricant for pulling #4 AWG and larger wire. Oil or grease is prohibited as a conductor pulling lubricant. All conductors #8 and smaller shall only be pulled by hand. Pulling lubricant for conductors over 600 volt shall be approved by the conductor manufacturer and the Architect or Electrical Engineer. E. Splices & Terminations: Join the conductors securely, both mechanically and electrically using crimp, compression, or Scotch Lok type connectors, except that screw-on type connectors shall not be used for conductors larger than #6 AWG. Splices and terminations of conductors larger than #10 AWG shall be made using an oxide inhibitor (NoAlox or equal). The splice area shall be taped to provide equal or greater insulation than the original. Tape run-back over the original insulation shall extend 3 to County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-10 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262000 - 11 5 overall diameters of the insulated conductor. Type of connectors used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No splices in conductors over 600 volt or feeders over#6 AWG permitted. F. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes. G. Wiring in panelboards, switchboards, cabinets, and junction boxes shall be neatly installed. Wiring shall be grouped, laced or clipped, and fanned out to wiring terminals. H. Identification and Markings: Provide identification and markings as indicated in Section 26210 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. I. Cable Testing: 1. All wires under 600 volt potential, #6 or larger shall be tested as follows: a. Continuity test to insure proper cable connection. b. Insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 Volts do for 1 minute. C. Readings shall be recorded and handed in with the record drawings at the completion of the project. 2. Test Values: Minimum insulation resistance values shall be not less than 5 megohms. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL CABINETS A. Install cabinets flush, straight and true, with top aligned with any adjacent panelboards. B. Terminate conduits in cabinet with lock nut and bushing or lock nut and grounding bushing. Conduits shall be located in front of plywood backboard, minimum 1" from rear of terminal cabinet (measured from edge of conduit). C. Install a minimum of two (2) %" and two (2) 1" conduits from each cabinet stubbed to accessible attic or ceiling space for future connections. D. Terminate wiring on terminal blocks or strips. All wiring shall be neatly cabled or fanned. Label conductors and cables, including spares with plastic Panduit MP series labels, and corresponding location on terminal or punch block with permanent black marker. E. Identify all conduits terminating in terminal cabinets, new and existing, with waterproof permanent black marker on conduit surfaces close to terminal cabinet; or inside terminal cabinet adjacent to conduits. Electrical Contractor shall furnish a supplemental diagrammatic layout of conduits inside each terminal cabinet at Project Closeout. END OF SECTION 26 20 00 County Contract No.: D-22-456 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/12/2024 26 20 00-11 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262100 - 1 SECTION 26 21 00 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations, including but not limited to the following: Buried electrical line warnings Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. Warning and caution signs. Equipment labels and signs. B. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each type of product specified. See Prolog/Converge per Division 1 Section 01 31 13 for submittals for this project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct-burial service not less that 4" wide by 4 mils thick. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. B. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter. C. Plastic Write-on Tags: 0.015" thick, all-nylon, accepts waterproof ink labeling, Panduit MP series or Engineer approved equivalent; 1/4" x 31/2" for panelboard and switchboard circuits, 1/4" x 1 S/,,"for signal, communication, and fire alarm circuits. D. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fasteners. Dimensions: 2" x 4" (19 gauge). E. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16" minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8" in length; 1/8" thick for large sizes. Engraved legend and color as indicated. F. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. G. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide '/4' grommets in corners for mounting. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262100 - 2 H. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated Labels and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. I. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18" minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minimum 50°F to 350°F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of CEC. C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. 3.2 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. High-Voltage Feeder Conduits: Identify feeder conduits (over 600v) by words "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2" high, stenciled at 10-foot intervals over continuous painted orange background on entire surface of exposed conduits. B. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal, and communications service lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker, located directly above line at 12" below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line marker. 3.3 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: A. Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows: 208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green B. Color: 1. Use conductors with factory-applied color for wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 262100 - 3 2. For conductors larger than No. 10 AWG, apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of six (6) inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1" wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. 3. For conductors 10 AWG and smaller being fed from sources identified as emergency, use appropriately colored conductors with black and white tracer color for all conductors of the circuit. 3.4 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. Conductor Labeling: Tag or label conductors as follows: 1. Future: Identify conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicating source and circuit number. 2. Switchboards, Panelboards, MCC's, Starters and Similar Equipment: Identify incoming feed circuit at lugs with write-on tag indicating point of origination, circuit number, phase, and voltage. Identify all distribution and branch circuit wires with write-on tags indicating circuit number, destination area or equipment, and load description; i.e., "A-13 / Room #14/ North wall plugs". 3. Junction and Wiring Boxes: Identify each wire passing through or terminating in junction or wiring boxes with write-on tag indicating panel and circuit #, voltage, and phase. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by means of coded color of conductor insulation. Three circuit, four-wire branch circuit home runs may be identified by a common tag. 4. Control Circuits: All control circuits shall be marked at each control panel termination point as to their function and where they terminate. Where control wires terminate into relays or enclosures or terminal cans remote from the main point of control the incoming wires shall be identified with write-on tags as to their function and where they originate. All associated wiring integral within a control cabinet shall be marked with the printed circular wire wrapping at each end corresponding to circuiting diagrams. B. Raceway System Labeling: Label raceway system conduits and boxes as follows: 1. The interior of all junction and pull boxes shall be marked with permanent ink marker indicating the panel and circuit numbers of the wires passing through, originating, or terminating in the box. In attic spaces, the cover shall be marked with the same information. 2. The conduits and/or raceways entering and leaving boxes shall be marked with permanent ink marker to indicate respective points of origination and destination; i.e., "Panel A" / "Room 16". 3. All junction boxes in attic spaces terminating or serving as gathering points for emergency power or lighting circuits shall have the cover and first six (6) inches of entering and leaving conduits painted red. END OF SECTION 26 21 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 1 SECTION 26 30 00 -SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Work Included: Furnishing and installation of a complete electrical service, distribution, and grounding system. Conditions of this section apply to all other 26000 series sections included. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Regulations, Reference Standards: See Section 26100. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on service entrance equipment switchboards, motor control centers and/or individual starters, transformers, panelboards, disconnect switches and grounding components. B. Trip Curves: Submit trip timing curves for all circuit interrupting devices. C. Nameplate Schedule: Submit nameplate schedule for approval. 1.4 COMPONENT COORDINATION: A. In order to maintain close control and coordinate the various components of the distribution systems, the number of manufacturers shall be kept to a minimum. Equipment manufacturer shall be General Electric, Eaton, or Square D. It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility through the Electrical Contractor to coordinate all components of the system in order to ensure systems that will provide maximum protection of equipment and reliable safe operation. 1.5 NAMEPLATES: A. General: Engraved plastic-laminated, color coded red for 277/480 volt equipment, black for 120/208 volt equipment, with white letters. Provide for identification of each piece of electrical equipment, switchboards, transformers, panelboards, disconnects, and enclosed breakers. A schedule of nameplates shall be included with the shop drawings for approval. Nameplates shall be secured with permanent adhesive and two (2) stainless steel self-tapping screws. B. Each piece of electrical equipment shall be provided with a 2" x 3'/2" nameplate on the front of the door or on the trim, indicating designation, voltage, and distribution panel and circuit feeding the panel. C. Switchboards, distribution panelboards, and all starters and disconnects shall have sub feeders and main breakers marked with 1"x 3" nameplates indicating load served. D. All weatherproof disconnects shall be marked with 1" x 3" nameplates indicating voltage and the panelboard or switchboard from which it is fed from. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 2 E. Provide identification for emergency system boxes and enclosures by labeling the boxes and enclosures and painting the conduits entering with red paint at a length of six (6) inches. 1.6 FEEDER CONNECTIONS: A. Provide cast saddle type bolted lugs, or hydraulically set compression lugs, for all bus connections. Manufacturer shall be Thomas and Betts, Burndy, O-Z Gedney or approved equivalent. 1.7 MISCELLANEOUS: A. Equipment Bases: Provide appropriately sized concrete housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted equipment. B. Hoisting Lifting Lugs: Provide on all heavy equipment as required to ensure safe hoisting. C. Space for Future Protective Device: Provide as indicated on drawings, shall be completely equipped for the future addition of a circuit breaker or fused switch, including all connections. D. Keys: All equipment enclosures shall be keyed alike. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING: A. Clamps, bonds, etc., suitable and as necessary to provide continuous ground system. B. Ground Rods: "Copperweld" %" diameter, 10' long. C. All grounding conductors shall be copper, sizes not less than that required under CEC requirements. 2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. General: Provide factory-assembled, molded case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standards Publication AB1. Breakers covered under this specification may be applied in switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, combination motor starters, and individual enclosures. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by General Electric, Eaton, or Square D. B. Construction: Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for reverse connection capability, mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40°C. Two and three-pole breakers shall be common trip. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 3 C. Operation: Automatic operation of the circuit breaker shall be obtained by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices located in each pole of the breaker. The thermal device shall provide time-delay tripping on overloads, and the magnetic device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short circuits. The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and accessible from the front of the breaker on frame sizes above 100 amperes. D. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Breakers: Bolt on construction, Square D QOB, General Electric, or Eaton equivalent. 1. All single pole 15 and 20 amps shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" and carry the SWD marking. 2. Breakers indicated as "GFI" (Ground Fault Interruptive) shall provide UL Class AC 5-milliampere sensitivity ground fault protection integral within the breaker. Single pole GFI breakers shall take no more panel space than a conventional breaker. E. Current Limiting Breakers: Provide breakers with current limiting capability as indicated or required to meet system short circuit requirements. Square D I-Limited, General Electric, or Eaton equivalent. 1. On high level fault currents, the circuit breaker shall limit peak current and let-thru energy and provide a voltage transient-free interruption at near unity power factor. On fault currents below the threshold of limitation, the circuit breaker shall provide conventional overload and short circuit protection. 2. The unit shall not contain replaceable elements and the limiter automatically reset after circuit interruption. F. Series Connected Ratings: Where utilized to meet short circuit requirements, combinations for series interrupting ratings shall be recognized by Underwriters Laboratories and shall appear in the Recognized Component Directory under the "Circuit Breakers - Series Connected" product category DKSY2. Current limiting circuit breakers shall allow the use of branch circuit breakers with lower interrupting capacities on systems capable of delivering fault currents up to 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480V, ac and 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 600V, ac. G. Solid State Trip Breakers: Main and feeder breakers indicated "SS" shall be solid state trip type with ampere setting adjustment knobs for changing current carrying capability of units, and with ground-fault protection components with external neutral current transformer(CT). Construct with current carrying components isolated from the trip unit and field installed accessories, and with integral trip unit independent of any external power source. Square D ME/NE/PE/SE, GE or Eaton equivalent. 1. Provide with Long Time, Short Time, Instantaneous, and Ground Fault Pick up and delay (LSIG) unless indicated otherwise. H. Ground Fault Protection: All 1,000 amp or greater 480 volt and "GFI" indicated service breakers shall be furnished with ground fault protection. Protection may be provided by a zero sequence/shunt trip system or solid state breaker with integral GFI. System shall be complete with all required CTs, power supplies, etc., required. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 4 2.3 PANELBOARDS: A. Power and Lighting Panelboards shall be Air Circuit Breaker bolted type, UL rated for 75°C. connections, with voltage, phase, breakers, and NEMA rating as specified in panelboard schedules. Panelboards shall be installed flush or surface as indicated. Panelboards shall be installed in code gauge rust proof steel cabinets with flush doors having flush lock(s), all keyed alike, and with trim cut square and true; NEMA 3R steel cabinets with gasketed doors having 3-point vault locks, all keyed alike, and two (2) spring loaded trunk catches. 120/208 Volt Panelboards: Square D type NQOD, Eaton or General Electric equivalent. 277/480 Volt Lighting Panelboards: Square D type NEHB, Eaton, or General Electric equivalent. B. Power Distribution Panelboards shall be Molded Case Circuit Breaker type, UL rated for 75°C connections, with voltage, phase, breakers, and NEMA rating as specified in panelboard schedules. Panelboards shall be installed flush or surface as indicated. Panelboards shall be installed in code gauge rust proof steel cabinets with flush doors having flush lock(s), all keyed alike, and with trim cut square and true; NEMA 3R steel cabinets with gasketed doors having 3-point vault locks, all keyed alike, and two (2) spring loaded trunk catches. 277/480 Volt Power Distribution Panelboards: Square D I-Line, Eaton or General Electric equivalent. 1. Spaces indicated on panelboard schedules are a minimum. Specifically sized spaces shall be provided. When schedules do not designate space frame size, the panelboard shall be supplied with spaces for one (1) three-pole breaker of the largest frame size which can be accommodated, and two (2) three-pole breakers of the next largest frame size which can be accommodated in the scheduled panelboard. 2. All spaces shall include all required circuit breaker mounting hardware. Any breaker mounting area available after allotment to scheduled or required spaces shall be filled out with all required hardware to mount three-pole breakers up to 225 amp frame size. C. Short Circuit Rating: Panelboard and breakers shall have short circuit rating equal to or exceeding that indicated. Rating shall be for each panelboard as a complete integrated unit, tested in accordance with UL Standard UL 67. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating. D. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They shall be so designed that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors, so that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 5 E. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrow column panels are indicated. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type and ratings. F. Unless otherwise noted, full size insulated neutral bars shall be included. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. A ground bus will be included in all panels. G. Boxes shall be at least 20" wide unless otherwise indicated and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the California Electric Code. At least four (4) interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. H. Door hinges shall be concealed. All locks shall be flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler type locks with catches and spring loaded door pulls, keyed alike. Directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished with each door. I. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the trim shall be properly cleaned, primed with a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating, and finished with a gray ANSI 61 paint. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box for at least 3/4" all around. Surface trims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be mountable by a screwdriver without the need for special tools. After installation, trim clamps shall not be accessible when the panel door is closed and locked. J. All bus bars shall be copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50°C above an ambient of 40°C maximum. 2.4 SWITCHBOARDS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide switchboards of one of the following: General Electric Eaton Square D B. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchboards of types, sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information. C. Auxiliary Components: Where indicated or specified, auxiliary components such as transformers, meters, contactors, controllers, etc. shall be incorporated at the factory. Miscellaneous components such as current transformers, instrument transformers, etc. shall be included as required to form complete and functional systems, whether specifically specified or not. D. AC Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards: Provide factory assembled, dead-front, metal enclosed, self-supporting secondary power switchboards, of types, sizes and electrical ratings and characteristics indicated; consisting of panel (vertical) units, and CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 6 containing circuit breakers of quantities, ratings and types indicated. Provide copper main bus and connections to switching devices of sufficient capacity to limit rated continuous operating temperature rise to 54°F and 90°F for circuit breaker branches; with main bus and tap connections silver-surfaced and tightly bolted for maximum conductivity. Brace bus for short circuit stresses up to maximum interrupting capacity. Prime and paint switchboard with manufacturer's finish and color. E. Enclosures: Construct dead-front switchboards, suitable for floor mounting, with front cable/wire and conduit accessibility. Provide welded steel channel framework, hinge wireway front covers to permit ready access to branch circuit breaker load side terminals. Coat enclosures with manufacturer's standard corrosive resistant finish. NEMA Type 3R construction, unless otherwise noted. F. Short Circuit Rating: Switchboards shall have integrated short circuit rating meeting the serving Utility Company available, 42,000 AIC minimum; or as indicated on plans. G. Service Switchboards: Switchboards to be utilized as service boards shall be constructed in accordance with serving Utility Company requirements; pull section, lugs, meter provisions, etc. 1. Provide with specific grounding provisions as indicated on plans. H. Spaces: All switchboards shall include all required circuit breaker mounting hardware for designated frame size. Any breaker mounting area available after allotment to scheduled or required spaces shall be filled out with all required hardware to mount three-pole breakers up to 225 amp frame size. 2.5 DISCONNECTS: A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label. B. Disconnect switches shall be suitable for area where they are installed, i.e., weatherproof, and shall be rated heavy duty. Use only 600 volt class with proper number of poles. Switches shall be fused unless indicated on plans. Fuses shall be dual element time delay UL Class RK5 or of type specified on plans. Weatherproof switches shall be in a NEMA 3R/12 enclosure. C. All fuses shall be of a type to coordinate with the equipment be protected; i.e. dual element fuses for motors and HVAC compressor motors. D. When the disconnect is not clearly visible from the control location, provide it with an operating handle which is lockable in the open and closed positions. 2.6 AC COMBINATION STARTERS: A. General: Individual motor starters shall be circuit breaker combination magnetic starters unless noted otherwise. Units shall be housed with an enclosure for the area in which starter is installed. Starter size, voltage, and horsepower rating shall be determined by motor being served. All starters shall be rated 600 volt. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 7 B. Combination starter shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards, sizes, and horsepower ratings, and shall be UL listed. Disconnect device and starter shall be mounted in one enclosure. Handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the "OFF" and "ON" positions with up to three padlocks. C. Starters: Shall be gravity dropout type with double break silver alloy contacts, molded coil, and melting alloy type overload relays. Thermal units shall be one-piece interchangeable. Provide with 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contact, unless noted otherwise. D. Accessories: Provide starters with "Hand-Off-Auto" (HOA) selector switch - and red pilot light, mounted in cover; unless noted otherwise. E. Manufacturer: Combination starters shall be Square D Class 8539, General Electric, or Eaton equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING: A. Scope: Provide grounding system complying with the codes and ordinances specified. Grounding system shall provide continuity through the entire electrical system including: 1. Panelboard ground buses. 2. All conduit or other raceways. 3. All motors. 4. All lighting fixtures. 5. Grounding terminals of all receptacles. 6. Miscellaneous grounds required by code. B. Equipment and raceway bonding procedures shall be rigidly maintained and meet all jurisdictional requirements of codes and regulations. C. Grounding conductors shall be terminated using a bolted crimped lug connection. D. Good, electrically continuous, metal to metal contacts shall be made wherever possible at all panel boxes, pull boxes, etc. Where it is not possible to obtain good contacts, the conduit shall be bonded around the boxes with a #6 B&S gauge, rubber covered, double braided wire with ground clamps. E. A separate grounding conductor shall be run in all conduit runs from distribution, lighting, and power, etc., panelboards, motor control outlets, etc., back to their respective service or distribution panelboards. F. Flexible Conduit Grounding: Provide a separate grounding conductor in all flexible conduit runs to include watertight flexible conduit with integral grounding straps. Install ground conductors inside conduit with ungrounded conductors. Extend from nearest panel to device being connected. G. A separate insulated (green colored) copper grounding conductor shall be run in all branch circuit conduits. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 8 H. Ground Rods: All new service installations shall be grounded in accordance to code requirements and per plans. Isolated transformers, including mini power zones, shall be grounded on the secondary to a ground rod. 1. Check resistance to ground at all locations (new services and transformers) and other grounded locations. If resistance exceeds 25 OHMS, install additional ground rods separated at least 6-0" until resistance is reduced to 25 OHMS or less (CEC 250-84). Submit results to Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS: A. Provide mounting brackets, busbar drillings, and filler pieces for unused spaces. B. Branch circuits shall be connected as shown in line diagrams and/or panelboard schedules, with wires neatly tie wrapped in panel. C. Branch circuit panelboards shall have a plastic covered circuit directory card on the inside of each door complete with all circuit destinations neatly typed. Provide also project name and date of installation on card. D. The Electrical Contractor shall check and tighten all factory made wire or lug connections. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. E. Install four(4) spare %" conduits from all panelboards to accessible ceiling space. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARDS: A. Install switchboards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that switchboards comply with requirements of NEMA and CEC standards, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation." B. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torque specifications. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize switchboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. C. Testing: All G.F.I. breakers shall be tested and shown to comply with CEC Section 230-95 in accordance with International Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA) standards by a NETA certified independent testing company. D. Switchboards shall have a plastic covered circuit directory card on the inside of each door with all circuit destinations neatly typed. Provide also project name and date of installation. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECTS: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION AND REEDLEY, CA. GROUNDING SECTION 263000 - 9 A. Install disconnects for all equipment and motors of the size required and as recommended by manufacturer. B. Fuses installed for all mechanical furnished equipment shall be sized and coordinated with Mechanical Contractor for specific motor or equipment requirements. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS: A. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates. B. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided. C. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. END OF SECTION 26 30 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 263100 - 1 SECTION 26 31 00 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: Furnish and install floor, shelf, or wall mounted style, dry type transformer as indicated on drawings and as specified. All dry type transformers shall comply to 2016 energy efficiency standards for transformers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated KVA, frequency, primary and secondary voltages, percent taps, polarity, and impedance. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's drawings indicating dimensions, and weight loadings for transformer installations, showing layout, mountings and supports, spatial relationship to associated equipment and panelboards, and transformer connection to electrical equipment. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide transformer of one of the following: Square D General Electric Eaton 2.2 POWER/DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer and as required for complete installation. B. Transformer: Dead front, single phase or three phase, two winding, 60 Hz., 150°C. rise, self-cooled type, KVA capacity as shown on plans. Primary shall be 480 volts delta and secondary shall be 208/120 volts wye for three phase transformers and 480 volts delta primary and 240/120 volts delta secondary for single phase transformers, or as otherwise noted on plans. Impedance shall be manufacturer's standard. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 35°C rise above a 40°C ambient. All insulating materials used to be in accordance with NEMA ST20 or NEMA TR27 standards for a 220°C. insulating system. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. C. Enclosure: Transformers 25 KVA and larger shall be in a heavy gauge, sheet steel, ventilated enclosure. Provide wire fabric rodent guard over ventilated openings and designed to prevent accidental access to live parts in accordance with UL, NEMA, and CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 263100 - 2 California Electric Code standards for ventilated enclosures. Transformers 25 KVA through 75 KVA shall be designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted. Above 75 KVA they shall be floor mounted. D. Sound: Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 15 - 50 KVA 45 dB 51 - 150 KVA 50 dB 151 - 300 KVA 55 dB 301 - 500 KVA 60 dB PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS: A. Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of CEC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Floor and roof mounted transformers shall be mounted on captive steel insert neoprene mountings, Vibrex Model F.U. vibration isolators, seismic rated or equivalent. Conduit entering transformers shall be isolated from case with oversize hole, ground wire, and rubber grommet. 3.2 GROUNDING: Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective ground, for transformers as indicated. 3.3 TESTING: Upon completion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuit at rated voltage and frequency from normal power source and test transformers, including, but not limited to, audible sound levels, to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 26 31 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIOTOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE REEDLEY, CA. SUPPRESSION SECTION 264300 - 1 SECTION 26 43 00 -TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Transient voltage surge suppression shall be provided on all main services (Class C), all MCC's, and the secondary main bus of station step-down transformer. Minimum 240KA/PH rating for all 480 volt MCC's. TVSS installation to include fused or circuit breaker disconnect. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 26320 Motor Control Centers 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish submittals for all products identified in this Section. 1.4 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of transient voltage surge suppression equipment must have engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment for a minimum of five (5) years. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION: A. Provide transient voltage surge suppressors suitable for the circuit voltage rating, service equipment, and connected loads. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL: A. The specified system shall be tested to meet ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992. B. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C waveforms. 2.3 MANUFACTURER: A. Manufacturer shall be Eaton SPD Max, Square D EMA or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Transient voltage surge suppression equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and all applicable codes and standards. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIOTOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE REEDLEY, CA. SUPPRESSION SECTION 264300 - 2 END OF SECTION 26 43 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 264950 - 1 SECTION 26 49 50 - HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This section includes equipment used for local disconnects at motors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 26 Electrical 1.3 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) B. National Electrical Code C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) D. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) 1.4 SUBMITTALS: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish submittals for all products identified in this Section. PART 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. Switches to be Heavy Duty Safety switches, 600 volt, single throw, 3 pole, fusible. B. Enclosure to be rated NEMA 4 dust tight, water tight, and corrosion resistant with lockable access door. All current carrying parts to be copper. C. Switch to be rated full load break. D. Short circuit withstand rating to be 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. E. Switch to be equipped with a cover viewing window showing the position of the stabs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. All safety switches shall be installed and calibrated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 26 49 50 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 265000 - 1 SECTION 26 50 00 - EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Make all connections of power to all equipment along with installation of required disconnecting means. B. Furnish all electrical disconnects, power supplies, and controls as noted within the electrical plans for equipment, compressors, fans, etc. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Conduits, boxes, cover plates, disconnects, etc., per applicable related sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. Furnish all electrical disconnects, power supplies, and controls as noted within the Division 15 and Division 26 plans for Division 15 equipment as shown on the mechanical plans. B. Make all connections of power to all mechanical equipment along with installation of required disconnection means. The work is generally as noted, but not specifically limited to the following: 1. Air-cooled chillers 2. Pumps 3. Air conditioning units 4. Exhaust fans 5. Fan coils 6. Temperature control panels 7. Boilers 8. Air compressors and air dryers 9. Air handlers C. Supply all electrical junction boxes for mechanical equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. Make all connections of power to all Owner-furnished equipment along with installation of required disconnection means. The work is generally as noted, and also as shown on the architectural plans, but not specifically limited to the those. B. Supply all electrical junction boxes for Owner-furnished equipment. 3.3 MOTOR CONNECTIONS: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 265000 - 2 A. The Electrical Contractor shall make all line connections for each motor sized as shown on the plans. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for proper phasing and rotation of all connected motors. B. The Electrical Contractor shall supply those starters indicated on the plans, install these and Mechanical furnished starters, and make motor-starter connections for all indicated motors. C. The Electrical Contractor shall verify motor characteristics prior to installing wiring. Exact location of motor and motor connections shall be ascertained prior to installing conduits. D. A Liquidtight Flexible Metal (LFMC) conduit connection, in lengths not to exceed 36", shall be provided at each motor. Lengths exceeding 36" are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3.4 TESTING: After all wiring to each unit is complete, the Electrical Contractor shall cooperate with Mechanical or Equipment Contractors in testing equipment for proper operation and shall correct wiring as required for proper operation. END OF SECTION 26 50 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 1 SECTION 26 51 00 —TIER 4 EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install an indoor emergency standby generation unit. Supplier shall verify/guarantee generator will start and run all connected loads and provide simulation data with the submittal. The generator set shall be rated per plans standby with 0.8 power factor at 60 hertz with ratings calculated at 50°C using #2 Diesel Fuel. The ratings will be with the radiator fan included, for continuous electrical service during interruption of the normal utility service. Supplier to submit verification the emergency generator meets all Regional Air Quality Board requirements and provide the required Authority to Construct/Authority to operate application with all technical data completed. The emergency generator shall meet all fire marshal requirements. B. The generator set shall have an output voltage of 120/208 volt, three phase, four wire. C. The generating unit shall be furnished ready for operation as soon as the required connections have been made to the unit's wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on engine-driven electric generator systems and components. Include manufacturer's product warranty statement showing single source responsibility by the engine manufacturer, for replacement of materials and equipment used in standby engine driven generator system. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of engine-driven generator units and accessories including, but not limited to, automatic transfer switches, fuel line piping, remote start/stop stations, and instruments, showing accurately scaled generator set layout and its spatial relationship to associated equipment, and connections to remote equipment. C. Other: Supplier shall verify/guarantee generator will start and run all connected loads and provide simulation data with the submittal. Supplier to submit verification the emergency generator meets all Regional Sir Quality Board requirements and provide the required Authority to Construct/Authority to operate application with all technical data completed. 1.3 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP: The engine generator set shall be a factory fabricated and assembled package of new and quality grade components. Only those products currently being manufactured for the purpose of power generation will be considered. All work shall be congruent with the highest quality standards. 1.4 DESIGN: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 2 The unit shall be designed and fabricated to meet all applicable codes and standards associated with the area and application for which it is intended. Routine maintenance and adjustments shall be able to be performed without the use of special tools or instruments. 1.5 WARRANTY: Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and administered by the selling dealer against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of five (5) years from date of acceptance. It shall cover full parts and repair labor expenses plus travel time and mileage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide engine/generator set of one (1) of the following: Caterpillar, Cummins, or Generac. 2.2 GENERAL: Furnish and install a complete and working packaged generator set including all engine and generator components, standard engine mounted control panel, radiator and fan, all engine oil and engine filters, and 50% Ethel glycol solution in the radiator and water cooling system. To qualify as manufacturer, the engine must be the principal item manufactured and the completed engine generator shall be supplied by that manufacturer's authorized representative. 2.3 ENGINE: A. Construction: The engine shall run on natural gas or#2 diesel, be fully water cooled, of four stroke cycle design, compression ignited, rated for continuous standby application. It shall produce sufficient horsepower to achieve ratings indicated while driving all accessories and parasitic loads such as fans or alternators. B. Governor: The engine shall be equipped with mechanical governor with a 3% speed regulation from no load to full load. C. Safety Devices: The generator set shall have installed and be warranted by the engine manufacturer the following alarm and shutdown features: 1. Low oil pressure pre-alarm 2. High water temperature pre-alarm 3. Low water temperature alarm 4. Low oil pressure shutdown 5. High water temperature shutdown 6. Overspeed set for 118% rated speed. It shall allow the unit to be tested at 75% of the actual trip point. D. Cooling System: The engine shall be equipped with either a gear or belt driven centrifugal water pump. The engine shall be cooled through a base mounted radiator CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 3 sized to continuously maintain safe operation at full load and at 1150OF ambient air at the radiator core. A blower type fan will be furnished. The fan and all rotating members and drive belts shall be guarded and meet OSHA standards. E. Block Heater: A jacket water heater will be provided to maintain engine coolant temperature between 90°-120°F. in an ambient of 30°F. The heaters shall be thermostatically controlled. Voltage shall be 120 volt, single phase unless indicated otherwise on plans. 2.4 EXHAUST SYSTEM: The engine shall have a single exhaust outlet for installation ease. A critical grade silencer and stainless steel bellows type flexible section shall be furnished complete with all gaskets and hardware. The silencer shall be mounted as a complete system to the weather protective enclosure. 2.5 FUEL SYSTEM: Provide an integral sub-base fuel tank with high , low, and shutdown level switches and a pre-wired tank control panel with alarms lights and contacts and on off emergency switch hose MO Rt fuel taRkcomplying with NFPA 37 requirements, and UL Listed rated 48 hours of run time dual contained sub-bas with low level and leak detector switches, 5 gallon overfill/spill basin, 2" lockable fill capvent caps for norma and emergency venting extended as required per local code. 2.6 MOUNTING: The engine and generator shall be soft mounted to the base, minimizing transmission of vibration to the package. 2.7 GENERATOR AND CONTROLS: A. Construction: The generator shall be manufactured and packaged by the engine manufacturer to insure proper performance and effect a single source of responsibility. The generator shall be rated as per drawings, and conform to NEMA standards for temperature rise and construction. Total harmonic content in the generator shall be less than 5% measured line-to-line at rated voltage on an open circuit. No single harmonic shall exceed 3%. B. Voltage Regulator: The voltage regulator shall be solid-state, volts per hertz type. It shall be mounted in the generator providing +/-1% no load to full load regulation. Adjustable controls for voltage droop, level and gain shall be provided. Voltage level adjustment shall be -25% to +10%. The regulator shall incorporate built-in under voltage and an under frequency protection for the voltage regulator and generator. It shall have parallel capability, TIF less than 50, and EMI/RFI suppression to commercial standards. C. Circuit Breaker: A main line circuit breaker shall be installed in a generator mounted NEMA 1 cabinet that can be easily accessed by removing one (1) of the lockable weather protective doors of the generator enclosure. The rating shall be as shown of the drawing. The circuit breaker shall be UL listed and conform to NEMA and NEC CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 -4 standards. Load lugs shall be provided to accept conducted size and quantity as shown on the drawings. A fully rated, isolated neutral and ground lug shall be provided. D. Control Panel: The control panel shall be designed and built by the engine/generator set manufacturer and shall incorporate 100% solid state circuitry, microprocessor control, sealed dust tight, watertight modular components, and digital instrumentation. The panel shall be shock mounted to the generator and labeled with ISO symbols. The panel shall include the following equipment: 1. Safety Devices: One (1) ISO red emergency stop pushbutton. 2. Generator AC Output Metering Devices: Three (3) backlit LCD displays for volts, hertz and amperes in one (1) environmentally sealed module. Numeral height shall be 0.5% accuracy for voltage and current and 0.3% accuracy for a frequency throughout a temperature range of-40°C to +70°C. 3. Silenceable alarm horn to annunciate shutdowns for overspeed, low oil pressure, high water temperature and overcrank. E. Excitation: Permanent magnet excitation. 2.8 STARTING SYSTEM: A. Starter: The unit shall be equipped with a 24V DC staring motor, a starter relay and an automatic reset circuit breaker in case of butt engagement. B. Battery System: The starting batteries shall be the lead acid type, rubber cased with removable fill caps. The batteries shall be mounted to the generator set base and provide with seismic rated anchorage. Required cables and lugs shall be furnished of the proper size. C. Battery Charger: A solid state battery charger of current limiting design shall be provided with DC voltmeter and ammeter. The charger shall maintain batteries by automatically tapering output amperage as dictated by battery condition. Input shall be 120 VAC, single phase, with output of 5 ampere minimum at 24 volts DC. The battery charger shall have an undervoltage alarm and contacts. The input power shall be fused or circuit breaker protected. The battery charger shall be mounted in the generator set enclosure. 2.9 OPERATION: Upon power outage the transfer switch shall signal the engine-generator to start. When generator output reaches approximately 90% rated voltage and speed, load shall be transferred from the normal to the emergency source. Maximum time for generator on- line shall be ten (10) seconds. Upon return of normal power, the transfer switch shall transfer load to the utility bus and engine shall start into a cool down period. This period shall be automatically overridden in the event of an additional utility failure. The cool down shall last five (5) minutes. 2.10 OPERATING SYSTEMS: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 5 Filtering systems shall be adequate for a minimum of 200 hours of engine operation under normal conditions. Furnish any special tools required for routine maintenance. Provide sufficient lube oil and air cleaner elements for first change. Exposed parts which are subject to high operating temperatures or which are electrically energized, and moving parts which man constitute a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, enclosed or guarded. Provide the unit with the initial fill of lubricating oil together with 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze for cooling system. Enclosure will be pre-wired for jacket water heater, generator space heater, battery charger, and LED enclosure lights to an interior load panel with circuit breakers. 2.11 ENCLOSURE: The engine/generator assembly and components shall be equipped with a weather protective sound attenuated enclosure constructed of steel sheet metal. It shall be designed, manufactured and assembled by the engine manufacturer and carry the same warranty as the engine. It shall be properly primed and finished for extended wear. The doors shall be able to be locked. The doors shall be easily removable. The enclosure shall provide a Level II 76dB(A) maximum sound attenuation. 2.12 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH: Furnish and install freestanding automatic transfer switch, of size indicated on drawings. Switch shall be enclosed in a code gauge steel housing of NEMA 1 construction. Provide transfer switch that is fully compatible with Emergency Generator, as manufactured by Eaton, Cummins, ASCO, Russelectric, or approved equivalent. A. The automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer module and a control module interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. The automatic transfer switch shall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single-solenoid mechanism energized from the source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and be inherently double throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible operations - normal or emergency. The automatic transfer switch shall be suitable for use with emergency sources such as an engine or turbine generator source or another utility source. B. All main contacts shall be of silver composition. They shall be protected by arcing contacts in sizes 400 amperes and over. They shall be of the blow-on configuration and of segmented construction in ratings 600 amperes and over. The operating transfer time in either direction shall not exceed one-sixth (1/6) of a second. C. All contacts, coils, springs, and control elements shall be conveniently removable from the front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power conductors. D. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state and mounted on plug-in printed circuit boards. Printed circuit boards shall be keyed to prevent incorrect installation. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust covers. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 6 E. Automatic transfer switches utilizing components of molded case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof which have not been intended for continuous duty or repetitive load transfer switching are not acceptable. F. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-447 and Underwriters' Laboratories UL-1008 and shall be UL listed as follows: 1. For use in emergency systems in accordance with Articles 517 and 700 of the California Electrical Code. 2. Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric- discharge lamps, electric-heating and tungsten-filament lamp loads as referred to in Paragraph 30.9 of UL 1008. 3. Transfer switch rated 400 amperes and less shall be suitable for 100% tungsten- filament lamp load. Switches rated above 400 amperes shall be suitable for 30% or 400 amperes tungsten-filament lamp load, whichever is higher. G. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated to withstand the RMS symmetrical short circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals with the type of overcurrent protection, voltage and X-R ratio shown on the plans. H. Operation: 1. Two pole switches shall be used for single phase service and three pole switches for three phase service. Neutral conductor terminal lugs shall be provided as required for the power system. 2. The automatic transfer switch control panel for single phase and for three phase shall utilize solid state sensing on normal and emergency for automatic, positive operation. The following shall be provided: a. For single phase switches, the normal source voltage across live lines shall be monitored, and for three phase switches all phases of the normal shall be monitored line-to-line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value. The transfer of emergency will be initiated upon reduction of normal source to 85% of nominal voltage and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95% of nominal. b. A time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all transfer switches and engine starting signals. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0.5 to 6 seconds and factory set at 1 second. C. A time delay on retransfer to normal source. The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and normal source is available. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 30 minutes. d. An unloaded running time delay for emergency generator cool down. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and factory set at five (5) minutes. e. A time delay on transfer to emergency. Initially set at zero but field adjustable up to five (5) minutes for controlling timing of load transfer to emergency, where indicated. f. Independent single phase voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency source. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85% to 100% of CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 7 nominal. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal. Transfer to emergency upon normal source failure when emergency source voltage is 90% or more of nominal frequency is 95% or more of nominal. g. A contact that closes when normal source fails for initiating engine starting, rated 10 amps, 32 VDC. Contacts to be gold plated for low voltage service. h. A contact that opens when normal source fails for initiating engine starting, rated 10 amps, 32 VDC. Contacts to be gold plated for low voltage service. i. A white signal light to indicate when the automatic transfer switch is connected to the normal source. A yellow signal light to indicate when the automatic transfer switch is connected to the emergency source. j. One (1) auxiliary contact that is closed when automatic transfer switch is connected to normal, and one (1) auxiliary contact that is closed when automatic transfer switch is connected to emergency. Rated 10 amps, 480 volts, 60 Hz AC. k. A test switch to momentarily simulate normal source failure. I. Harnessing between transfer switch and control panel shall have built-in disconnect for routine maintenance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING: A. Manufacturer's Shop Tests: The generator set shall be tested for proper operation prior to delivery. Standard factory full load tests shall be performed. The supplier shall submit standard test reports with operation and maintenance materials. B. Jobsite Testing: The equipment supplier shall test the installed generator set with resistive load bank. The unit shall be tested at 50% load for one (1) hour, and 100% rated load for one-half ('/2) hour. All starting and shutdown systems will be demonstrated. The suppliers' standard test form shall be used with readings made and recorded every fifteen (15) minutes. A copy of the test report along with the operation guide and wiring diagrams shall be submitted within ten (10) days after performance of the job site test. 1. In presence of the Engineer or Owner's Representatives, test emergency systems, by means of simulated power outage, utilizing full load sized resistive load banks, automatic start-up by remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust transfer switch timers for proper system coordination. 3.2 ANCHORAGE: A. Units shall be anchored to a concrete equipment pad per structural engineer.with vibration isolators. 3.3 MOUNTING: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 8 All components other than the automatic transfer switch will be either engine/generator mounted . All batteries will be in earthquake racks. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER SWITCHES: A. Install transfer switches, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that transfer switches comply with requirements. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC and NFPA pertaining to wiring practices and installation of electrical power transfer switches. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. C. Provide equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing Company Tests: Prior to energization, provide independent testing company test and certification of the indicated components of the Generator System in accordance with the following NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications Sections: 1. Section 7.22.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspection 2. Section 7.22.2 Protective Relays 3. Section 7.22.4.1 Automatic Transfer Switch Visual and Mechanical Inspection B. Supplier Tests: Prior to energization, perform the following tests: 1. Furnish and install test equipment and materials and perform load bank test in accordance with the following schedule: 25% rated for 30 minutes 50% rated for 30 minutes 75% rated for 30 minutes 100% rated for 3 hours Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil pressure, and coolant temperature at periodic intervals during test. 2. Perform automatic transfer tests to: a. Simulate loss of normal power b. Return to normal power C. Simulate loss of emergency power d. Simulate all forms of single-phase conditions. 3. Monitor and verify correct operation and timing of following simulations: a. Normal voltage sensing relays b. Engine start sequence CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND REEDLEY, CA. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 265100 - 9 C. Time delay upon transfer d. Automatic transfer operation e. Interlocks and limit switch function f. Time delay and retransfer upon normal power restoration. g. Engine cool down and shutdown feature. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 1 SECTION 26 96 09 — ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING AND NFPA 70E REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. General 1. Related Sections — 01 81 00 Project Commissioning 2. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. 3. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of the Notice Inviting Bids shall be used. 4. "Engineer" and FOR (Engineer of Record) = same designation. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 1. IEEE 400, Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage Test on Power Cable Systems in the Field 2. IEEE 519, Guide for Harmonics Control in Electrical Power Systems D. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) F. Electronics Industry Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA) 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1, B.2, B-2-1, B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 2. TIA/EIA-569-B - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 3. TIA/EIA 606A-Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 4. EIA/TIA 607A- Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 5. EIA-310-D - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment G. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) part 15, part 68 and part 76 H. Rural Electrification Association (REA), Bulletin 345-63, REA Standards for Acceptance Tests and Measurements of Telephone Plant 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 26100 1.7. Submittals will include completed test reports. B. Test procedures will adhere to NETA (National Electrical Testing Associations), NEMA, IEEE, other applicable industry standards, and/or specific requirements added by the EOR. It will be the contractor's responsibility to provide personnel to carry out and/or Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 2 assist with these procedures and rectify issues as they are discovered. Test procedures shall include but not be limited to: 1. Detailed procedures in sufficient detail to verify conformance with these Specifications. 2. Incorporation of the Test Record Sheets included at the end of this Section. Use of pre-formatted test forms and/or test results by manufacturers instrumentation software is not permitted unless pre-approved by the EOR. 3. Detailed comprehensive testing schedule including: a. Electrical testing of each major process area. b. Each major piece of electrical distribution equipment. c. Each major electrical subsystem. d. Duration of each test. e. Milestone test completion date. f. Coordination with the master construction schedule. g. Date of test results submittals following completion of the tests. h. Names and qualifications of the individual(s) responsible for performing the testing. 4. Submit six (6) like complete lists(s) of Procedures and Test Results. Tab in logical order per Voltage/Phase (descending), cables (identified "from and to"), panels with relays descending order), and all other miscellaneous equipment and systems. Submit in punched individual sheets in three-ring binders with spline identification and title sheet, index, references, and tabbed data. C. Following completion of the test submit the completed test results to the FOR for review. The results shall include a dedicated section with the "as-left" settings of all devices, relays, circuit breakers, system software, relay program software with PDF copy on thumb drive (one (1) per each of six (6) packages), etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Upon completion of various phases of the project all new electrical equipment, wiring and cabling systems shall be tested in accordance with these specifications. B. The Engineer reserves the right to witness all tests and shall be notified at least 5 days prior to testing. C. All test results shall be recorded on the attached Test Record Sheets or Contractor- equivalent that are acceptable to the Engineer (see Section 269609, 1.2 SUBMITTALS). Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer. D. High potential tests shall not be repeated without authorization by the Engineer. E. The tests shall be documented on the Test Record Sheets. The checks and tests that are required shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Visually check all wire and cable connections 2. Check all AC and DC control circuits for short circuits and extraneous grounds 3. Functional test of power, control, and lighting circuits 4. Functional test of electrical signal and alarm systems 5. Continuity tests of all 600-volt power and control circuits 6. Check grounding system 7. Check current transformer ratios and continuity of the secondary circuits by passing current through the primary windings and taking readings of the primary current Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 3 and of the current flowing through the meter, relay, and instrument coils in the secondary circuits. 8. Checks shall be performed to determine the proper functioning of all switches, circuit breakers, relays, starters, and other items including control interlock and sequence circuits. All necessary adjustments shall be made on apparatus in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and design requirements. Alarm systems and circuits shall be tested by manually operating the initiating devices. Relays and control components that may prove to be sluggish or otherwise unreliable shall be repaired and replaced as necessary. 9. Special tests will be required on equipment if they are recommended by manufacturers. F. All safety rules and precautions shall be followed. 3.2 TESTS ON POWER, CONTROL, INSTRUMENTATION, AND LIGHTING CIRCUITS A. Perform continuity checks of all power, control, and instrumentation cables including each conductor of multiconductor and multipair cables. B. Verify wire numbers. Verify that actual wiring conforms to the construction drawings. C. Conductor ends shall be clean, dry, and guarded for personnel safety during testing. Circuits in the immediate vicinity that are not under test shall be grounded. D. Perform insulation resistance tests on 600-volt power cables. Testing shall be for one minute using 1,000 VDC. E. Perform insulation resistance test on medium voltage power cable. Testing shall be 1 minute using 2,500 VDC for 5 kV cables, 5,000 VDC for 15 kV cables, 7,500 VDC for 21- 25 kV cables. F. Each conductor in a multiconductor or multipair cable or conduit shall be tested against ground with the conduit and conductor to conductor. G. Circuit testing shall be as follows: 1. Motor control circuits tested and verified for proper operation with control stations and overcurrent devices connected. H. Prior to performing insulation resistance tests on cables, verify that they are not connected to a solid state device or any other connection not rated for test voltage. I. The Engineer shall be consulted if minimum insulation values per IEEE and/or NEMA cannot be obtained. J. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for each alarm point, and alarm indicators shall be checked for proper operation. K. Metering and indication lights for motors and other devices shall be tested for proper operation. L. All control circuits such as bus paralleling, motor, interlock and remote shall be tested for proper operation. 3.3 PROTECTIVE RELAYS INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications. 2. Inspect relays and cases for physical damage. Remove shipping restraint material. Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 4 3. Tighten case connections. Inspect cover for correct gasket seal. Clean cover glass. Inspect shorting hardware, connection paddles, and/or knife switches. Remove any foreign material from the case. Verify target reset. 4. Set relays in accordance with Relay settings sheets. B. Electrical Tests 1. Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame. Determine from the manufacturer's instructions the allowable procedures for this test for solid-state and microprocessor-based relays. 2. Inspect targets and indicators. a. Determine pickup and dropout of relay targets. b. Verify operation of all light-emitting diode indicators. c. Set contrast for liquid-crystal display readouts. d. Test and record for minimum trip on all taps and leave on tap to be used. Submit recorded test data to Engineer. e. The minimum trip accuracy for protective relays is +/-5% and the time curve calibration is +/-% from manufacture's rating and curves for the particular relay. f. Primary overall test for each phase and from each source. C. Functional Operation 1. 27 - Undervoltage Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays 59 - Overvoltage a. Determine dropout voltage. b. Determine time delay. c. Determine the time delay at a second point on the timing curve for inverse time relays. 2. 32 - Reverse Power Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine minimum pickup at maximum torque angle. b. Determine closing zone c. Determine maximum torque angle d. Determine time delay e. Verify the time delay at a second point on the timing curve for inverse time delay 3. 46 - Current Balance Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine pickup of each unit. b. Determine percent slope. c. Determine time delay. 4. 47 - Phase Sequence or Phase Balance Voltage Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine positive sequence voltage to close the normally open contact. b. Determine positive sequence voltage to open the normally closed contact (undervoltage trip). c. Verify negative sequence trip. d. Determine time delay to close the normally open contact with sudden application of 120 percent of pickup. e. Determine time delay to close the normally closed contact upon removal of voltage when previously set to rated system voltage. 5. 49T - Temperature (RTD) Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 5 a. Determine trip resistance. b. Determine reset resistance. 6. 50 - Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine pickup. b. Determine dropout. c. Determine time delay. 7. 51 - Time Overcurrent (51 C, 51 V) or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine minimum pickup. b. Determine time delays at two points on the time current curve. 8. 81 - Frequency Relay (Over and Under) or Element in Multifunction Relays a. Determine overfrequency pickup. b. Determine overfrequency time delay. c. Determine underfrequency pickup. d. Determine underfrequency time delay. 9. XX— other relays or functions as noted in plans and specifications. D. Control Verification 1. Verify that each of the relay contacts performs its intended function in the control scheme including breaker trip tests, close inhibit tests, 86 lockout tests, and alarm functions. E. System Tests 1. After the equipment is initially energized, measure magnitude and phase angle of all inputs and compare to expected values. 2. Test critical logic and controls including source transfer logic, tie breaker interlocks, generator starting and stopping, etc. F. Test Values 1. Use manufacturer's recommended tolerances when other tolerances are not specified. 2. When critical test points are specified, the relay shall be calibrated to those points even though other test points may be out of tolerance. 3.4 GROUNDED SYSTEMS A. Relays and alarms for ground protection and system neutrals shall be tested and calibrated. B. Earth resistance measurements shall be made by using "Megger" ground-tester in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. All ground rods and switchgear communication panels or boards, panel, motor control centers, switchboards, etc. with neutral bus disconnects. D. All neutral busses with protective devices in "OFF" and ground bus disconnected. E. Submit a complete NFPA 70E Flash Hazard Analysis from point of electrical connection (normal utility derived power and/or on or off site self-generated power) to end of run last device being distribution panel, motor disconnect, motor combination starter or any device where Maintenance and Operation personnel have access of any kind to energized or switching ports or devices. (Use IEEE 1584, NFPA 70E 2015 Annex DA as standard.) Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 - 6 1. Prepare and apply approved sunlight and ultra-violet resistant weatherproof tags to all equipment as applicable with all approach, minimum distance, clothing, class to be used, eye/face protection to be used and tag identification corresponding to identification number on study. END OF SECTION 26 96 09 Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 TEST RECORD SHEETS The test record sheets listed below shall be used to record testing of electrical equipment and of the electrical installation as required by these specifications. Sample copies of each sheet are attached. Sheet Title No. 1 Insulation Resistance (Power, Control Wire, and Cable) Test Record. 2 Insulation Resistance (Instrument Wire and Cable) Test Record 3 DC High Potential (Medium Voltage Cable) Test Record 4 Ground Electrode Testing Test Record 5 Neutral Grounding Resistor Test Record WHEN USED. 6 Bonding Resistance Readings (Nonelectrical Equipment/Structures) Test Record 7 Bonding Resistance Readings (Electrical Equipment) Test Record 8 Insulation Resistance (Transformer) Test Record 9 Insulation Resistance (Equipment) Test Record 10 Insulation Resistance (Rotating Equipment) Test Record 11 Equipment Absorption Ratio and Polarization Index Test Record. 12 Record Feeder Breaker Test Record 13 Breaker/Contactor Test Record 14 Motor Circuit Test Record 15 Medium Voltage Motor Circuit Test Record 16 Electric Motor Run-In Test Record with all VFD or Soft Start Programming As-left, Minimum, Mid-Range, or Maximum Amps, Volts, Power Factor, Kilowatts, Kilo-Volt Amperes, and Input Harmonic Analysis at each Rang Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 1 INSULATION RESISTANCE (POWER, CONTROL WIRE, AND CABLE) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: °C OF DATE: NOTES: 1. Perform Insulation Resistance Test(megger) between each conductor and all other conductors and metallic sheath for cables with nonshielded conductors. Test between each conductor and shield for multiconductor cables with shielded conductors. Record lowest reading for each cable. 2. Use 1,000-V test set for cable rated 600 volts and 2,500-V test set for cable rated over 600 volts. 3. Readings will vary inversely with temperature and cable length. When the use of temperature correction factors is specified, attach a second sheet with computed values. Indicate on each sheet"measured" or"temperature corrected." Panel No. Cable Wire or Cable Insulation Circuit No. Wire Rated Resistance Feeder No. Tagging Voltage Quantity Size From To me ohms * Initials *Minimum acceptable values: Cable/Wire Size Resistance When Cable Cable Rated Test Resistance for or Amperage Connected to Equipment Voltage Duration Cable Only (megohms) (ohms) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 2 INSULATION RESISTANCE (INSTRUMENT WIRE AND CABLE) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: °C OF DATE: NOTES: 1. Record only the lowest value. 2. MP- Multi-pair cable. SP - Single pair cable. 3. Megger with instruments disconnected. 4. Use 250 volt (or lower voltage, when specified) range on DC test set. 5. Readings will vary with temperature and cable length.* Conductor Shield to Overall Lead and Shield to Cable Indicate to Conduit Conductor Conductor Shield to Armor Conduit Number MP or (Single Pair to to Shield Shield or SP Type Non- Conductor (Multipair (Multipair (Single Pair Instrume Shielded (megohms Cables Cables Only Cables nt (2) Cables) (megohms ) Only) (megohms) Only) Initials Number (megohms) ) (1) (megohms) (megohms) 1 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 3 DC HIGH POTENTIAL (MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE) TEST RECORD CIRCUIT NUMBER: REF. DWG.: CABLE SIZE: (SQ.MM.) (MCM) FROM: TO: NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS: NO. OF SPLICES: CABLELENGTH: MANUFACTURER: INSULATION TYPE: THICKNESS: JACKET MATERIAL: WEATHER: TEMP.: °C OF % HUMIDITY: DATE: TEST EQUIPMENT USED: NOTES: 1. The test voltage shown below shall be reached in 10 equal voltage increments. 2. After each voltage increase, the leakage current shall be allowed to stabilize during a 1- minute interval. If 1-minute intervals are insufficient to stabilize the current, the cable shall be discharged, and the test repeated with new time intervals of greater, but still equal duration. 3. Record the stabilized leakage current, in microamps, at the end of each time interval. 4. Allow the voltage to remain constant at the full test voltage and record the leakage current for 5 minutes for unshielded cables and 15 minutes for shielded cables. 5. Read test equipment instruction manual prior to testing cable. 6. When the plotting of test results is specified, attach the second sheet with separate plot for each phase. Note leakage current, in microamps, on "y" axis. Note step-voltage increase on "x" axis, followed by time, in minutes, for the dielectric absorption portion of the test. 7. All other phases and shields to be grounded. Voltage hold time at each step k k k k k k k k k k sec. V V V V V V V V V V OA7 OB7 OC7 RECORD LEAKAGE CURRENT IN MICROAMPS Time at SE MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN Kv C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 30 CABLE-RATED VOLTAGE TEST VOLTAGE (kilovolts) (kilovolts) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 4 GROUND ELECTRODE TESTING TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: (Note 1) (Note 2) REFERENCE DRAWING: NOTES: 1. Record resistance-to-earth for each electrode with all other conductors disconnected. Resistance not to exceed 25 ohms for any single anode. 2. Check continuity from each electrode to any test bar or other electrode such that the complete ground loop is tested. Resistance to Ambient Rod Number Earth Temperature Weather Taps Initials/Date (ohms) (°C/°F) (4) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 5 NEUTRAL GROUNDING RESISTOR TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: NOTES: 1. Use 1,000-volt test set for 600-volt equipment and below, 2,500-volt test set for equipment rated over 600 volts. 2. Resistor must be disconnected from ground and neutral during Insulation Resistance (megger) and DC Overpotential Tests. 3. Resistor must be disconnected from neutral during Cold Resistance Test. 4. Apply DC Overpotential Test between terminals and ground for the complete device. (The voltage applied between the terminals of each assembly and its grounded enclosure shall be twice the rated AC voltage plus 1000 V when rated 600 V or less, or 2.25 times the rated AC voltage plus 2000 V when rated over 600 V for 1 minute. This test is a Pass/Fail test based purely on withstand alone. 5. Inspect assembly for damage and missing parts. 6. Check to assure that the center tap ratio is correct, when CT is supplied with resistor. Verify resistor reterminated. Tag. Cold Res. Insul. Res. Overpot. CT Ratio Reterm No. (ohms) Fm egohms)* 4 Pri-Sec 4 Initials/Date *Minimum acceptable values: VOLTAGE CLASS INSULATION RESISTANCE (megohms) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 6 BONDING RESISTANCE READINGS (NONELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/STRUCTURES) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT USED: WEATHER: NOTES: 1. Vessels, tanks, and structural steel bonded to the main grounding system, dedicated ground rod or foundation, as indicated on drawings listed below. 2. Measure resistance from ground wire tap (or anchor bolt)to tagged equipment frame or structural steel. EQUIPMENT TAG NO. MEASURED OR DRAWING RESISTANCE INITIALS/DATE STRUCTURE (ohms) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 7 BONDING RESISTANCE READINGS (ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT USED: WEATHER: NOTES: 1. Electrical equipment bonded to the main grounding system or dedicated ground rod, as indicated on drawings listed below. 2. Measure resistance from ground wire tap to tagged equipment bus bars, tagged equipment enclosures, and any other points indicated on the drawings. EQUIPMENT TAG NO. MEASURED OR DRAWING RESISTANCE INITIALS/DATE STRUCTURE (ohms) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 8 INSULATION RESISTANCE (TRANSFORMER) TEST RECORD SUBSTATION NO.: TEST EQUIPMENT: NOTES: 1. Use 1,000-V test set for 600-volt equipment and below, 2,500-V test set for equipment rated 601 - 5,000 volts, and 5,000-V test set for equipment rated over 5,000 volts. 2. Test voltage to be applied for 1-minute duration, and reading taken. 3. Neutral must be disconnected from ground during test. 4. Record temperature of surrounding air temperature for dry-type transformers. 5. Readings will vary inversely with temperature. When the use of temperature correction factors is specified, attach second sheet with computed values. Indicate on each sheet "measured" or"temperature corrected." RESISTANCE IN me ahoms Pri Voltage Pri-Sec Liquid Equipment Primary Secondary to Rating or Temp. Tag No. OA to OB to C to G QUA to G OB to G OC to G Se (kV) Air (°C/°F) G c *Minimum acceptable values: VOLTAGE CLASS RESISTANCE (megohms) TESTER'S INITIALS/DATE --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 9 INSULATION RESISTANCE (EQUIPMENT) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: SUBSTATION: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: °C OF DATE: REFERENCE DRAWING: REF. SEC.: NOTES: 1. Use 1,000-V test set for equipment rated 600 volts and below, 2,500/5,000-V test set for equipment rated over 600 volts. 2. For equipment with solid state control circuits, consult manufacturer's literature for maximum test voltages. Switchgea Test Rated Initials/ r INSULATION RESISTANCE (megohms) * Voltage Voltag Date MCC e (other) OA to G OB to G OC to QUA to OB OB to OC OC to OA (kV) (kV) G *Minimum acceptable values: EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE CLASS RESISTANCE (megohms) TESTER'S INITIALS/DATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 10 INSULATION RESISTANCE (ROTATING EQUIPMENT) TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: °C OF DATE: EQUIP. TEMP., IF KNOWN: °C OF HOW KNOWN: NOTES: 1. Use 1,000-V test set for equipment 600-volt and below, 2,500/5,000-V test set for equipment rated over 600 volts. 2. Test duration shall be 1 minute, note if otherwise: 3. Isolate all motor leads from one another and from frame, test phase separately, wherever practical. 4. Document testing of low voltage and medium voltage equipment on separate sheets. 5. Readings will vary inversely with temperature. When the use of temperature correction factors is specified, attach second sheet with computed values. Indicate on each sheet "measured" or"temperature corrected." Equipment Rated Equipmen Tag No. INSULATION RESISTANCE (megohms) * Voltage t Initial/Dat e OA to G OB to G OC to OA to OB to OC to G � 013 0C � OA *Minimum acceptable values: VOLTAGE CLASS RESISTANCE (megohms) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 11 EQUIPMENT ABSORPTION RATIO AND POLARIZATION INDEX TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: TEST VOLTAGE: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: °C OF DATE: EQUIP. TEMP., IF KNOWN: °C OF REL. HUMIDITY: NOTES: 1. Perform test as indicated on Test Records for each individual equipment type. Reference the following sheets: Transformers 8 Equipment 9 Motors and Generators 10 2. Absorption Ratio = 1-Minute Resistance Value 30-Second Resistance Value 3. Polarization Index = 10-Minute Resistance Value 1-Minute Resistance Value OHMS TO OHMS TO OHMS TO DIELECTRIC GROUND GROUND GROUND ABSORPTION POLARIZATION 30-SECOND 1-MINUTE 10-MINUTE RATIO INDEX READING READING READING OA TO GROUND OA TO GROUND OA TO GROUND OHMS TO OHMS TO OHMS TO DIELECTRIC GROUND GROUND GROUND ABSORPTION POLARIZATION 30-SECOND 1-MINUTE 10-MINUTE RATIO INDEX READING READING READING OB TO GROUND OB TO GROUND OB TO GROUND OHMS TO OHMS TO OHMS TO DIELECTRIC GROUND GROUND GROUND ABSORPTION POLARIZATION 30-SECOND 1-MINUTE 10-MINUTE RATIO INDEX READING READING READING OC TO GROUND OC TO GROUND OC TO GROUND TESTER'S INITIALS/DATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 12 FEEDER BREAKER (480 V MCC) TEST RECORD EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION LOAD (kW/kVA) VOLTAGE F.L.A. CIRCUIT BREAKER MFG. RATING SETTING CONDUCTOR SIZE POWER GROUND 1. Check nameplate data of breaker against approved vendor drawings. 2. Check breaker components for cleanliness. 3. Check mechanical function of breaker. 4. Check wiring for proper identification. 5. Check conduits/cables for tagging. 6. Check components for identification. 7. Check equipment for conformance of area classification. 8. Check installation for seals, breathers, and drains. 9. Verify power conductor continuity. 10. Check that power cable insulation resistance test(megger) is completed. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 13 BREAKER/CONTACTOR(480 V MCC) TEST RECORD EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION LOAD (kW/kVA) VOLTAGE F.L.A. CIRCUIT BREAKER MFG. RATING SETTING CONTACTOR MFG. SIZE CONDUCTOR SIZE POWER CONTROL GROUND 1. Check nameplate data of breaker, contactor fuses and relays against approved vendor drawings. 2. Check main and auxiliary contacts. 3. Check contactor/breaker components for cleanliness. 4. Check control fuses, CPT rating, and coil voltage. 5. Check mechanical function of contactor and breaker. 6. Check wiring for proper identification. 7. Check conduits/cables for tagging. 8. Check components for identification. 9. Check equipment for conformance to area classification. 10. Check installation for seals, breathers, and drains. 11. Verify continuity of all power and control leads. 12. Check that power and control cable Insulation Resistance Test(megger) is completed. 13. Complete functional operation check of the control circuit using contract drawings and approved vendor drawings. Close and open the contactor using all control devices. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 14 460 V MOTOR CIRCUIT (480 V MCC) TEST RECORD EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION MOTOR TAG NO. VOLTAGE F.L.A. KW/HP RPM S.F. CIRCUIT BREAKER MFG. RATING SETTING STARTER MFG. SIZE O/L HTR. SIZE C.T. RATIO O/L RELAY SETTING CONDUCTOR SIZE POWER GROUND 1. Check motor starter for cleanliness. 2. Check nameplate data and tagging of motor starter components for conformance to approved vendor drawings. 3. Check conduits and/or cables for correct tagging. 4. Check equipment and installation for conformance to area classification. 5. Check main and auxiliary contacts of breaker and contactors. 6. Manually check mechanical operation of breaker, contactor, O/L relay, and O/L reset device. 7. Check continuity of power and control cables. 8. Complete functional operation check of the motor control circuit using the contract drawings and approved vendor drawings. Close and open the starter using all control devices. 9. Verify proper operation of motor winding space heater unit. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 15 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CIRCUIT TEST RECORD EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION MOTOR DESCRIPTION TAG NO. SERIAL NUMBER. MANUFACTURER SERVICE FACTOR. KW/HP RATED VOLTAGE. FLA STARTER DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER C.T. RATIO CONTACTOR RATING TYPE RATED CURRENT RATED VOLTAGE O/L RELAY SETTING FUSE SIZE. CONDUCTOR SIZE POWER CONTROL GROUND 1. Check motor starter for cleanliness. 2. Check nameplate data and tagging of motor starter components for conformance to approved vendor drawings. 3. Check conduits and/or cables for correct tagging. 4. Check equipment and installation for conformance to area classification. 5. Check installation for seals, breathers, and drains. 6. Check main and auxiliary contacts of breaker and contactors. 7. Check mechanical operation of breakers, contactors, and relay and O/L reset devices. 8. Check continuity of power and control cables. 9. Verify calibration and setting of protective relays. 10. Check wiring to surge arrestors, capacitors, stator RTDs and current transformers. 11. Complete functional operation check of the motor control circuit using the contract drawings and approved vendor drawings. Close and open the starter using all control devices. GENERAL COMMENTS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ DISTRI BUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 269609 Sheet 16 ELECTRIC MOTOR RUN-IN TEST RECORD TEST EQUIPMENT: REFERENCE DRAWING: NOTES: 1. Duration of tests to comply with specifications. TEST REMARKS INITIALS/DATE RESISTANCE: Bonding resistance measured from motor frame to main ground/earth system tap. ohms VOLTAGE: Actual voltage measured at Motor Control Center. volts ROTATION CHECK: Bump motor to verify rotation. Motor to be uncoupled. NO LOAD CURRENT: At beginning of test amps At end of test amps TEMPERATURE OF BEARING: Check bearing for high temperature: Before start: 15 minutes after start 30 minutes after start 1 hour after start 2 hours after start 3 hours after start VIBRATION: Make visual inspection during run-test. Record any unusual vibration in remarks column. NOISE: Record any unusual noise in remarks column. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- DISTRIBUTION: CONTRACTOR/Date Contract 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 265100 - 1 SECTION 270000 — GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This specification section provides general conditions for all division 27 specifications. All contractors working with in the Division 27 specification shall adhere to this specification and these related specifications: Section 270528 Communication Infrastructure Systems Section 271000 Structured Cabling System Section 272010 Uninterruptable Power Supply Division 26 : Electrical Division 27 : Mechanical 1.2 REGULATORY REFERENCES A. Contractor will comply will all Federal, State, Local Codes/Regulations and Industries Standards. 1. Federal: • California Electric Code(CEC) 2013 or latest approved Chapter 8: "Communications Systems" Article 250: "Grounding" • NFPA 70 - National Electric Code(NEC) • FCC - Part 15, Part 68 • ADA—Americans with Disabilities Act 2. State of California: • CCR Part 2 - California Building Code. • CCR Part 3 - California Electrical Code • Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). • Title 24, Building Standards, State of California. • Title 19, California Code of Regulations. • Title 8, Electrical Safety, State of California 3. ANSI Standards • ANSI C2-2001 National Electrical Safety Code. • ANSI C80.3 Specification for Zinc-coated Electrical Metallic Tubing. • ANSI/UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing. • ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-2001 - Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable Technical Requirements. 4. Industry Standards: • Telecommunications Industry Associations/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA) TIA/EIA-568.0-D Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA/EIA-568-1.D General Requirements TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components Standard CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 265100 - 2 TIA/EIA-568-3-D Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecom Pathways and Spaces TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Grounding/Bonding Requirements TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA/EIA-758-1 Addendum No. 1 to TIA/EIA-758, Customer- Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard • National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) • Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 (Ethernet) 802.3ab (Gigabit Ethernet over 4-pair Category 5e, 6 & 6A or higher) 802.3Z (Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber) 802.11 ac (Wireless LAN Specfications) • Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) • International Organization for Standardization/International Electromagnetic Commission (ISO/IEC) ISO 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises • Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM 13th Edition or latest). • ASCII - American Standard Code for information Interchange • ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials B. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. C. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be aware of and comply with all local codes that may impact this project. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK : The Contractor shall provide all materials, tools, labor and services necessary to furnish and install equipment and accessories associated with communication systems as shown on the Plans and described within these Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish all power supplies, disconnects, controls, and any other work as called for in all Electrical and Electrical related work as called for in the Division 26 specifications and plans. In addition, all conduit required by Divisions 27 and 28 and the associated drawings. All systems, at project completion and before final acceptance, shall be demonstrated to have a complete and working functional operation. END OF SECTION 270000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 1 SECTION 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for cable trays and accessories serving electrical systems. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints. 1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 2 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing. B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations. C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters: 1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 3 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, SS, Grade 33] ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. 4. Finish: Mill galvanized before fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90. b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633. 5. Finish: Electroga Ivan ized before fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM B 633. b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633. 6. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136. 7. Finish: Epoxy-resin paint. a. Powder-Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion-inhibiting treatment, with factory-applied powder-coat paint. b. Epoxy-Resin Prime Coat: Cold-curing epoxy primer, MPI# 101. C. Epoxy-Resin Topcoat: Epoxy, cold-cured, gloss, MPI# 77. d. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136. 8. Finish: Factory-standard primer, ready for field painting, with chromium-zinc-plated hardware according to ASTM F 1136. 9. Finish: Black oxide finish for support accessories and miscellaneous hardware according to ASTM D 769. B. Aluminum: 1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts. 2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136. 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. C. Stainless Steel: CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 -4 1. Materials: Low-carbon, passivated, stainless steel, Type 304L or Type 316L, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 2. Hardware for Stainless-Steel Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. 2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Covers: Made of same materials and with same finishes as cable tray. C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 2.5 WARNING SIGNS A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel." B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA FG 1 NEMA VE 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA FG 1 NEMA VE 2. B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment. D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts. F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 5 G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Comply with seismic-restraint details according to Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application. J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA FG 1 NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA FG 1 NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables. T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V. U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2. V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps. W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 6 3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems." B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches. D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed. B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER & EQUIPMENT SHELTER CABLE TRAYS REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270536 - 7 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. 1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION 270536 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SLEEVES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270544 - 1 SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SLEEVES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270544 - 2 B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch . b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches , thickness shall be 0.138 inch . 2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.4 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non- fire-rated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SLEEVES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270544 - 3 2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SLEEVES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 270544 -4 E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. END OF SECTION 270544 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER COMMUNICATIONS ROOM REEDLEY, CA. FITTINGS SECTION 271100 - 1 SECTION 271100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Grounding. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and accessories. 2. Section 271300 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 3. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 4. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. LAN: Local area network. C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER COMMUNICATIONS ROOM REEDLEY, CA. FITTINGS SECTION 271100 - 2 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For equipment frames from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Equipment frames shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER COMMUNICATIONS ROOM REEDLEY, CA. FITTINGS SECTION 271100 - 3 2.2 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES A. General Frame Requirements: 1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat. B. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type,steel or aluminum construction. 1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and a power strip. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. C. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each. 2.4 LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER COMMUNICATIONS ROOM REEDLEY, CA. FITTINGS SECTION 271100 - 4 C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross- connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. 3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling." 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER COMMUNICATIONS ROOM REEDLEY, CA. FITTINGS SECTION 271100 - 5 bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. END OF SECTION 271100 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 1 SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Stripping and stockpiling rock. 6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing or abandoning site utilities in place. 8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 2 D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings. B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program. C. Rock stockpiling program. D. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles. B. Rock Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of stockpiles. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 3 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed trafficways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation- control measures are in place. F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 -4 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones. C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place. D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Resident Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. F. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections; in applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security, and utilities sections; and in Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" and Section 024119 "Selective Demolition." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 5 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 2 inches in diameter, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to depth indicated on Drawings in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to72 inches . 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.6 STOCKPILING ROCK A. Remove from area indicated on Drawings naturally formed rocks that measure more than 1 foot across in least dimension. Do not include excavated or crushed rock. 1. Separate or wash off non-rock materials from rocks, including soil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER SITE CLEARING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 6 B. Stockpile rock where indicated on Drawings away from edge of excavations without intermixing with other materials. Cover to prevent windblown debris from accumulating among rocks. 1. Limit height of rock stockpiles to 36 inches . 2. Do not stockpile rock within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus rock. Surplus rock is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus rock to allow later use by the Owner. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Burning tree, shrub, and other vegetation waste is permitted according to burning requirements and permitting of authorities having jurisdiction. Control such burning to produce the least smoke or air pollutants and minimum annoyance to surrounding properties. Burning of other waste and debris is prohibited. C. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work. END OF SECTION 311000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 1 SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. 2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices for earth moving specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices." B. Quantity allowances for earth moving are included in Section 012100 "Allowances." 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 2 B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by the Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 fee in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or[3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Equipment for Footing, Trench, and Pit Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch maximum-width, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 Ibf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 Ibf with extra-long reach boom. 2. Equipment for Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-Ibf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 3 K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. C. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and plant-protection zones. d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. e. Field quality control. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required: 1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 3. Warning tapes. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below: 1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698. C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 4 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations. D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls"and Section 311000 "Site Clearing" are in place. E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place. F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones. H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. I. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate. J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 1. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 6 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations. B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations. C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 7 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 8 soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Engineer. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpiles borrow soil materials and excavate satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 9 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing. E. Initial Backfill: 1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Final Backfill: 1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. 2. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation. G. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.10 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 10 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.11 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 3.12 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances: 1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch . 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch . 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 11 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, and ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and recompact. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER EARTH MOVING REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 311000 - 12 C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer. 1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 1 SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete and post footings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. b. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. C. Gates and hardware. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of fence and gate assembly. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate. B. Product Test Reports: For framework strength according to ASTM F 1043, for tests performed by manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 2 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to comply with performance requirements. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Faulty operation of gate operators and controls. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate frameworks shall withstand the design wind loads and stresses for fence height(s) and under exposure conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Lightning Protection System: Maximum resistance-to-ground value of 25 ohms at each grounding location along fence under normal dry conditions. 2.2 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist according to "CLFMI Product Manual" and requirements indicated below: 2.3 FENCE FRAMEWORK A. Posts and Rails ASTM F 1043 for framework, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following: 1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Light-Industrial-Strength Material: Group IC-L, round steel pipe, electric- resistance-welded pipe. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 3 3. Heavy-Industrial-Strength Material: Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40 Group IC, round steel pipe, electric-resistance-welded pipe. 4. Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate, top, and bottom rails according to ASTM F 1043. 5. Brace Rails: ASTM F 1043. 6. Metallic Coating for Steel Framework: a. Type A: Not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq.ft.zinc coating according to ASTM A 653/A 653M. 2.4 TENSION WIRE A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- diameter, marcelled tension wire according to ASTM A 817 or ASTM A 824 2.5 SWING GATES A. General: ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single swing gate types. 1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated. 2. Framework Member Sizes and Strength: Based on gate fabric height of 72 inches. B. Pipe and Tubing: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; 2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel 3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings D. Hardware: 1. Hinges 360-degree inward and outward swing. 2. Latch: Permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate. 3. Lock: Manufacturer's standard internal device. 4. Padlock and Chain: 5. Closer: Manufacturer's standard 2.6 FITTINGS A. Provide fittings according to ASTM F 626. B. Post Caps: Provide for each post. 1. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 -4 C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post. D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long. 2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails to posts. E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post. G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment. H. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626. 1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, according to the following: a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel:0.106-inch-diameter wire galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric. I. Finish: 1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz./sq. ft. of zinc. a. Polymer coating over metallic coating. 2.7 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. B. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating, and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.8 GROUNDING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 5 B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Listed and labeled for complying with UL 467. 1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. 2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, 5/8 by 96 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A. Install chain-link fencing according to ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. 1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line. B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to shed water. b. Concealed Concrete: Place top of concrete 2 inches below grade as indicated on Drawings to allow covering with surface material. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 6 D. Terminal Posts: Install terminal end, corner, and gate posts according to ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. For runs exceeding 500 feet, space pull posts an equal distance between corner or end posts. E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c. F. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 1. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 72 inches or higher, on fences with top rail, and at two-third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. G. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch- diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1. Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric. Install top tension wire through post cap loops. Install bottom tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire. 2. Extended along top of extended posts and top of fence fabric to support barbed tape. H. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer. I. Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Secure to posts with fittings. J. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1-inch bottom clearance between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. K. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts, with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c. L. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric according to ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c. CONTRACT 24-S-04 REEDLEY RADIO TOWER AND EQUIPMENT SHELTER FENCES AND GATES REEDLEY, CA. SECTION 323113 - 7 M. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates. END OF SECTION 323113 CONTRACT 24-S-04